0% found this document useful (0 votes)
1K views462 pages

Aectp-300 Edd v1 e

Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
1K views462 pages

Aectp-300 Edd v1 e

Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 462

NATO STANDARD

AECTP-300

CLIMATIC ENVIRONMENTAL TESTS


Edition D Version 1
NOVEMBER 2019

NORTH ATLANTIC TREATY ORGANIZATION

ALLIED ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AND TEST PUBLICATIONS

Published by the
NATO STANDARDIZATION OFFICE (NSO)
© NATO/OTAN
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
AECTP-300

RESERVED FOR NATIONAL LETTER OF PROMULGATION

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300

RECORD OF RESERVATIONS

CHAPTER RECORD OF RESERVATION BY NATIONS

Note: The reservations listed on this page include only those that were recorded at time of
promulgation and may not be complete. Refer to the NATO Standardization Document
Database for the complete list of existing reservations.

III Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

IV Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300

RECORD OF SPECIFIC RESERVATIONS

[nation] [detail of reservation]

Note: The reservations listed on this page include only those that were recorded at time of
promulgation and may not be complete. Refer to the NATO Standardization Document
Database for the complete list of existing reservations.

V Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

VI Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300

RECORD OF SIGNIFICANT CHANGES

General Updated the entire document format to match the most recent
NATO AP Template. Corrected various typographical errors.
Method 300 Method 301 revised and moved to Method 300.
Method 301 Method 312 Low Pressure (Altitude) moved to Method 301.
Method 302 Complete revision to High Temperature test method.
Method 313 Complete revision to Sand and Dust test method.

VII Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

VIII Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300

ALLIED ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AND TEST PUBLICATIONS

AECTP-300

CLIMATIC ENVIRONMENTAL TESTS

INDEX

AECTP-300 is one of 6 documents included in STANAG 4370. It is important for users


to note that the content of AECTP-300 is not intended to be used in isolation, but is
developed to be used in conjunction with the other four AECTPs to apply the
Environmental Project Tailoring process. This process ensures that materiel is
designed, developed and tested to requirements that are directly derived from the
anticipated Service use conditions. It is particularly important that AECTP is used in
conjunction with AECTP 100 which addresses strategy, planning and implementation
of environmental tasks, and AECTP 200 which provides information on the
characteristics of environments and guidelines on the selection of test methods.

AECTP-300 test methods address climatic elements which may occur either
individually or in combination with other climatic elements or mechanical environments.
While the application of combined environments is realistic, is encouraged, and is often
preferred to produce synergistic effects, analysis of results is often difficult with regard
to assigning failure to a particular element.

The enclosed index of AECTP-300 Methods reflects currently-completed draft


methods. It is not comprehensive in that it will be revised as other methods are
developed. It is not intended that all test methods shall be applied to all materiel, but
selected as required for the particular application.

In developing a test program, consideration shall be given to the anticipated life cycle
of the materiel. The cumulative damage caused by long term exposure to the various
combinations of climatic and mechanical environments should be simulated. The
interface with the appropriate platform shall also be taken into account.

The tests herein are believed to provide a reasonable demonstration of the test item's
resistance to the effects of climatic elements. The tests are not necessarily intended to
duplicate the environment and, where possible, guidance on the limitations or
application is provided.

When possible, the use of measured and response data to develop test severities is
recommended.

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300

METHOD TITLE

300 GENERAL GUIDANCE AND REQUIREMENTS

301 LOW PRESSURE

302 HIGH TEMPERATURE

303 LOW TEMPERATURE

304 THERMAL SHOCK

305 SOLAR RADIATION

306 HUMID HEAT

307 IMMERSION

308 MOULD GROWTH

309 SALT FOG

310 RAIN/WATERTIGHTNESS

311 ICING

312 Moved to Method 301

313 SAND AND DUST

314 CONTAMINATION BY FLUIDS

315 FREEZE/THAW

316 EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE

317 TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY/ALTITUDE

318 VIBRATION/TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY/ALTITUDE *

319 ACIDIC ATMOSPHERE

* To be developed in the next edition.

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 300

METHOD 300
GENERAL GUIDANCE AND REQUIREMENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE............................................................................................... 1-1


1.1 PURPOSE ................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 APPLICATION........................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................ 1-2
CHAPTER 2 NOMINAL AND STANDARD CONDITIONS ...................................... 2-1
2.1 STANDARD LABORATORY CONDITIONS .............................................. 2-1
2.2 CONTROLLED / NOMINAL (REFERENCE) CONDITIONS ...................... 2-1
CHAPTER 3 TEST TOLERANCES AND DEVIATIONS.......................................... 3-1
3.1 TEST TOLERANCES ................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 INSTRUMENTATION AND CALIBRATION .............................................. 3-1
3.3 DEVIATIONS............................................................................................. 3-2
CHAPTER 4 GUIDANCE ON GENERAL CONDITIONS ........................................ 4-1
4.1 PRE-CONDITIONING AND TEMPERATURE STABILISATION ............... 4-1
4.2 VARIATION OF CLIMATIC CONDITIONS ................................................ 4-3
4.3 MONITORING OF HIGH TEMPERATURE EXPOSURE .......................... 4-3
4.4 POST-TEST CLIMATIC RECOVERY ....................................................... 4-4
4.5 POST-TEST NATURAL DRYING CONDITIONS ...................................... 4-4
4.6 POST-TEST ASSISTED DRYING CONDITIONS ..................................... 4-4
4.7 POST-TEST CONTROLLED RECOVERY ................................................ 4-5
4.8 WATER PURITY ....................................................................................... 4-5
CHAPTER 5 TEST CONSIDERATIONS ................................................................. 5-1
5.1 TEST ITEM CONFIGURATION................................................................. 5-1
5.2 MOUNTING OF TEST ITEM ..................................................................... 5-1
5.3 SUPPLIES AND SERVICES ..................................................................... 5-2
5.4 CHAMBER REQUIREMENTS................................................................... 5-2
5.5 TEST MONITORING ................................................................................. 5-3
5.6 FUNCTIONAL TESTS ............................................................................... 5-4
5.6.1 Pre-Test ............................................................................................. 5-4
5.6.2 During-Test ........................................................................................ 5-5
5.6.3 Post-Test ............................................................................................ 5-6
5.7 PRE- AND POST-TEST EXAMINATION .................................................. 5-6
CHAPTER 6 INFORMATION REQUIRED .............................................................. 6-1
6.1 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTIONS ...... 6-1
6.2 INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR VERIFICATION ................................... 6-2
6.2.1 Pre-Test ............................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.2 During-Test ........................................................................................ 6-4
6.2.3 Post-Test ............................................................................................ 6-4
CHAPTER 7 TEST INTERRUPTION GUIDANCE .................................................. 7-1
7.1 DEFINITION .............................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 UNDER-TEST INTERRUPTION ............................................................... 7-1
7.3 OVER-TEST INTERRUPTION .................................................................. 7-3

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 300

7.4 SCHEDULED INTERRUPTION ................................................................ 7-3


7.5 INTERRUPTIONS DUE TO TEST ITEM FAILURE ................................... 7-4
CHAPTER 8 GUIDANCE ON TEST PROGRAMME DEVELOPMENT ................... 8-1
8.1 TEST REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................... 8-1
8.2 TESTING IN THE NATURAL ENVIRONMENT ........................................ 8-1
8.3 TAILORING ............................................................................................... 8-1
8.4 SEQUENCE .............................................................................................. 8-2
8.5 COMBINED ENVIRONMENTS ................................................................. 8-2
8.6 SYNERGISTIC EFFECTS ......................................................................... 8-2
8.7 SELECTION OF CLIMATIC CONDITIONS ............................................... 8-2
8.8 EXPOSURE DURATION ........................................................................... 8-3
CHAPTER 9 EVALUATION OF TEST RESULTS ................................................... 9-1
9.1 FAILURES ................................................................................................ 9-1
9.2 RETESTS .................................................................................................. 9-1
9.3 EXCEPTIONS ........................................................................................... 9-3
CHAPTER 10 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS ........................... 10-1

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 300

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE

1.1. PURPOSE

1. This document provides general guidance related to the climatic test methods
of AECTP-300. It also defines the general test conditions and associated tolerances
utilised with the test methods of AECTP-300. Its purpose is to provide general
guidance and requirements for preparing the Environmental Test Program (captured
within the Test Plan or Test Procedures).

2. The conditions and tolerances of this document are set for standardisation
purposes and are intended to be generally applicable where no specific advice is
supplied. However, where different conditions and tolerances are stated in the
applicable test methods of AECTP-300 or in the relevant Environmental Test
Specification, they shall take precedence over those stated in this document.

1.2. APPLICATION

This method includes information which should be considered when adapting the
generic test methods of AECTP-300 for any specific environmental test program.
Method 300 provides information relative to:

a. Test program development.

b. Test parameter values.

c. Exposure duration.

d. Test item configuration.

e. Information required prior to and following testing.

f. Test parameter tolerances.

g. Characteristics of test facilities.

h. Temperature stabilization.

i. Test controls.

j. Test interruption.

k. Functional Test Points:

1-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

(1) Pre-Test

(2) During Test

(3) Post Test

1.3. LIMITATIONS

1. The primary limitation of the Methods within AECTP-300 is that they are
largely intended to simulate the natural environments, however they cannot fully
replicate all the synergistic effects of the natural conditions. General limitations
relevant to the application of the Climatic Test Methods include:

a. Identification of all the relevant environmental conditions.

b. Limited ability to operate and evaluate the test item as required in


service.

c. Limited environmental data (response or input).

d. Inability of test facilities to replicate and / or apply the climatic elements


as they occur in the service environment.

e. Impracticality of performing tests for durations comparable to field


exposure.

f. This standard only addresses natural environments found within the


atmosphere up to 30,000 m (98,425 ft). Beyond this, other standards
addressing non-terrestrial / space environments should be considered,
for example (not an exhaustive list):

(1) The US Range Commanders Council (RCC) Series

(2) The European Cooperation for Space Standardization (ECSS)


Publications

(3) ECSS-E-ST-10-04C – Space Environment

(4) BS ISO 17851:2016 Space systems. Space environment


simulation for material tests. General principles and criteria

2. These limitations should be addressed in the preparation of the Test Plan and
Test Procedures for the specific application (see AECTP 100).

1-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

CHAPTER 2 NOMINAL AND STANDARD CONDITIONS

2.1. STANDARD LABORATORY CONDITIONS

1. When Standard Laboratory Conditions are specified in the test procedures of


this standard, the test facility conditions shall fall within the ranges set out below.
(These conditions are comparable to the 'Standard Atmospheric Conditions for
Measurement and Tests' given in IEC 60068-1.)

Temperature 15 °C to 35 °C
Relative Humidity 25% to 75%
Air Pressure 86 kPa to 106 kPa (860 mbar to 1,060 mbar)

2. Variations should be kept to a minimum during a series of measurements


carried out as a part of one test on one test item.

3. Where it is considered impracticable to carry out additional measurements


within the Standard Laboratory Conditions during test, a record of the prevailing
conditions should be kept.

2.2 CONTROLLED / NOMINAL (REFERENCE) CONDITIONS

1. During measurement, functional tests or performance assessments, it may be


necessary to adopt Controlled / Nominal (Reference) Atmospheric Conditions to
ensure accurate and / or repeatable measurements. The atmospheric conditions
stated below, are reference conditions to be used if the parameters to be measured
are dependent upon temperature, pressure and humidity and the law of dependence
is unknown.

Temperature 21 °C to 25 °C
Relative Humidity 45% to 55%
Air Pressure 86 kPa to 106 kPa (860 mbar to 1,060 mbar)

2. They may also be used where no other atmospheric conditions are specified,
but where the environment needs to be controlled. Some commodities may use
different nominal conditions and these are tabulated in Table 1.

2-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

Table 1: Controlled / Nominal (Reference) Conditions

Relative Humidity
Temperature (°C) Air Pressure Note
(%)
Nominal Close Wide Close Wide
kPa mbar
Value Tolerance Tolerance Range Range
86 to 860 to
20 ±1 ±2 63 to 67 60 to 70 1
106 1060
86 to 860 to
23 ±1 ±2 48 to 52 45 to 55 1
106 1060
86 to 860 to
25 ±1 ±2 48 to 52 45 to 55 2, 3
106 1060
86 to 860 to
27 ±1 ±2 63 to 67 60 to 70 1
106 1060
86.45 to
23 ±2 45 to 55 4
103.05

Note 1: These values are those published in IEC 60068-1, ISO 554, and ISO 3205.

Note 2: These values are those published in IEC 60068-1, but do not appear in
ISO 554 or ISO 3205.

Note 3: The value of 25 °C is included primarily because of the interest for the testing
of semiconductor devices and integrated circuits.

Note 4: These values are those published in MIL-STD-810

3. The close tolerances in Table 1 may be used for reference measurements.


The wider tolerances may be used only when specified in the relevant Test Plan or
Test Instructions. Relative Humidity may be disregarded when it is known to have no
influence on the accuracy of results or the repeatability of measurements.

2-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

CHAPTER 3 TEST TOLERANCES AND DEVIATIONS

3.1. TEST TOLERANCES


Unless otherwise specified in the individual test methods of AECTP-300 or the test
instructions, the overall tolerances on test conditions shall be as given in Table 2.

Table 2: Test Tolerances

Tolerance
Parameter
(of specified value unless stated
(and usual units if applicable)
otherwise)
Temperature (°C) ±2 °C
Relative Humidity (%) ±5%
Pressure (Pa) ±5%
-0% / +1% up to a maximum of
Time (s, m & hr)
15 minutes
±20%, averaged between 10% and 90%
Rate of change of temperature (°C/min)
of the total temperature change
Air velocity / wind speed (m/s) ±15%
±10%, averaged between 10% and 90%
Rate of change of air pressure (Pa/s)
of the total pressure change.

3.2. INSTRUMENTATION AND CALIBRATION

The accuracy of all instrumentation and test apparatus used to control or monitor the
test parameters should be verified at regular periods. All instruments and test
apparatus used shall;

a. Be subject to regular calibration traceable to National Standards.

b. Have a measurement uncertainty that is no greater than one half, but


should ideally be no greater than one third of the tolerance of the test
parameter to be measured. However, if this cannot be achieved, then
refer to the appropriate International or National Standards. Further,
measurement uncertainty should include all uncertainty values
associated with the sensor and the data acquisition system.

c. Not significantly influence the response of the test item to the test
environment it is being subjected to.

d. Not significantly influence the test environment.

3-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

3.3. DEVIATIONS

1. If the required tolerances cannot be met then, with the agreement of the Test
Specifier, the following deviations to the tolerances are permitted:

a. For test items with a volume greater than 0.5 m 3, the temperature
tolerance may be increased to ±3 °C.

b. For temperature modifying test items (e.g., those generating their own
heat during test), the temperature tolerance may be increased to ±3 °C.

c. For higher temperatures, more than 100 °C, the temperature tolerance
may be increased to ±5 °C.

2. Any other deviation from the stated conditions and tolerances shall be agreed
with the Test Specifier and recorded in the Environmental Test Report along with the
reasons for the deviation.

3-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

CHAPTER 4 GUIDANCE ON GENERAL CONDITIONS

4.1. PRE-CONDITIONING AND TEMPERATURE STABILISATION

1. For many of the test procedures within AECTP-300 there is a requirement to


climatically pre-condition the test item / specimen. This includes stabilising the
specimen before commencing the test, to either; a specified temperature, Standard
Laboratory Conditions, or to establish a stable temperature cycle. The following
paragraphs offer guidance on how to achieve temperature stabilisation for both cyclic
and fixed temperature regimes.

2. All test items should be pre-conditioned to ensure the equipment begins the
testing in the condition it would be close to in the natural or operational environment,
ensuring test repeatability. The minimum period of climatic pre-conditioning should
be sufficient for the test item to stabilise at the required conditions, however this will
also depend upon the thermal characteristics of the equipment; e.g., thermal
capacity, physical size and thermal transfers.

a. Non-Operating:

(1) For constant temperatures. Temperature stabilisation is reached


when that part of the test item which has the longest thermal lag
reaches the required temperature within the stated test
tolerances.

(2) For cyclic temperatures. The minimum number of cycles is


predicated on achieving repeated test item thermal response
within 2 °C (or the stated test tolerances) between successive
cycles, at that part of the test item which has the longest thermal
lag.

NOTE: In some cases, instrumenting the location of longest thermal lag may
not be feasible or appropriate. Multiple points on a test item may need to be
monitored to assess stabilization including those components that will
experience peak response conditions, critical components, and where
necessary, components with the longest thermal lag. In some cases, a thermal
survey or analysis should be performed to determine the conditions and
duration that the test item should be exposed, to reach stabilisation.

4-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

b. Operating:

(1) Unless otherwise specified, operating temperature stabilisation is


reached when the temperature of the functioning part(s) of the
test item (including heat dissipating components) with the longest
thermal lag is changing at a rate of no more than 2 °C per hour.

3. If the conditioning time is unknown, impractical to measure and / or where


there is uncertainty in the thermal analysis; additional conditioning may be necessary,
but this is dependent upon the type of materiel. Most materiel can withstand the
temperature pre-conditioning and stabilisation periods arising from the procedures
within the methods of AECTP-300. Certain materiel however, particularly energetic
materials, may become unstable or unsafe if subjected to prolonged periods of pre-
conditioning and stabilisation. In such cases, the Environmental Test Specification
should state the maximum pre-conditioning and stabilisation periods.

4. The nominal air temperature rate of change for pre-conditioning test items is
less than 3 °C per minute. Unless specified otherwise, the rate of change of
temperature of the test chamber should be kept below 10 °C per minute. Otherwise
the temperature change may be closer to a thermal shock and in extreme cases
could endanger the test item. In some instances, to shorten the pre-conditioning
time, it may be desirable to force the conditioning rate by setting the chamber
temperature at a greater extreme than the requirement. This should only be
considered with prior agreement of the Test Specifier. In such cases, it becomes
more important to accurately control the rate of change of the test item.

5. Certain equipment may have an agreed conditioning duration for stabilisation.


These are not always accurate as they depend upon the initial condition of the test
item and assumes all equipment in the family have equivalent thermal capacity,
physical size and thermal transfer characteristics. Therefore, it is good practice to
validate the agreed conditioning duration for stabilisation.

6. For test programs where a consistent and controlled temperature is required


throughout the test item; a thermal survey or thermal analysis should be performed to
determine the soak time required to achieve stabilization. The thermal survey would
include a test item with instrumented internal components subjected to the required
air temperatures. The air speed in the chamber should be considered, as convection
is likely to be the primary mode of heat transfer. For materiel containing energetic
materials, it is recommended that representative inert / simulated materials are used
for the thermal survey, as prolonged thermal exposure may cause the energetics to
become unstable or unsafe. The inert / simulated materials should have similar:

a. Mass and volume.

b. Thermo-mechanical behaviour.

4-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

c. Heat transfer coefficients.

4.2. VARIATION OF CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

1. During any series of measurements, function or performance assessments,


variations in temperature, pressure and humidity should be kept to a minimum during
the measurement or assessment period. Where this is impractical, such as during a
diurnal cycle, the Environmental Test Report should state what the actual conditions
were over the period.

2. Every climatic chamber has a useful working volume which is smaller than the
actual chamber volume. The size of the working volume will depend upon the type of
test being undertaken, whether the equipment can modify the temperature and the
flow of air within the chamber. The ratio between chamber size and equipment size
can create considerable variability in the temperature and humidity within the working
volume of the chamber. If the equipment is too large for the working volume of the
chamber it may not be possible to adequately control the temperature within the
working volume because the test item is absorbing, dissipating and / or radiating too
much heat. Guidance on the calculation of uncertainty of conditions in climatic test
chambers can be found in IEC 60068-3-11.

3. When testing heat dissipating test items, air flow around or over the test item
can modify the temperatures experienced. This is particularly true of test items being
subjected to solar radiation testing. Therefore, when testing such test items, the air
flow around or over the test item should be known to ensure that the conditions
approximate as close as possible typical free air conditions or those conditions
expected when the equipment is in use.

4. Non-uniform heat sources of a test chamber should be located so that the test
item is not subjected to direct radiant heat unless this is a requirement of the test, as
for example in the solar radiation test.

4.3. MONITORING OF HIGH TEMPERATURE EXPOSURE

1. High temperature conditioning may accelerate the chemical degradation of


certain materials and can have detrimental effects. Uncovering such degradation
may be a desired outcome of the test, but care must be taken not to overexpose the
test item. Specifically, hazardous or energetic materials can become unstable and
unsafe if subject to excessive elevated temperature during a sequential programme.

2. When testing equipment that may be degraded by exposure to high


temperatures, it is necessary to apply limits to the total period of pre-conditioning
occurring within the test programme. Additionally, a record should be taken at
sufficient intervals to characterise the temperature of the test item throughout the test
programme. Typically, the temperature should be recorded at intervals not greater
than 5 minutes.

4-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

4.4. POST-TEST CLIMATIC RECOVERY

1. After undertaking the prescribed environmental test, the test item should
normally be allowed to return to Standard Laboratory Conditions and stabilise at
those conditions before undertaking any Post-Test examinations, functional tests,
performance tests or any test item characterisation work. Unless the Environmental
Test Specification specifies otherwise, the rate of change of temperature of the test
item should be kept below 3 °C per minute. The test item should be allowed to
stabilise at Standard Laboratory Conditions in the same manner as stated earlier in
this chapter.

2. If recovery and any Post-Test examinations, functional tests, performance


tests or any test item characterisation work is performed in separate chambers, the
combination of temperature and humidity conditions should be such that
condensation on the surface of the test items does not occur when the test item is
transferred between chambers. Additionally, care should be taken to avoid thermal
shock with the rate of change of temperature kept to the tolerance described in
paragraph 4.1.4.

4.5. POST-TEST NATURAL DRYING CONDITIONS

A Post-Test natural drying regime for the test item may be required, before
undertaking any Post-Test examinations, functional tests, performance tests or any
test item characterisation work. Where natural drying conditions are required, the
test item should be allowed to dry in Standard Laboratory Conditions. Unless
otherwise specified the drying period should be not less than 6 hours.

4.6. POST-TEST ASSISTED DRYING CONDITIONS

1. In some instances Post-Test assisted drying for the test item may be required,
before undertaking any Post-Test examinations, functional tests, performance tests
or any test item characterisation work. Where assisted drying is required the
conditions stated below should be used for a period of 6 hours, unless otherwise
specified.

Temperature 55 ±2 °C
Relative Humidity Not exceeding 20%
Air Pressure 86 kPa to 106 kPa (860 mbar to 1,060 mbar)

NOTE:
1) These conditions are comparable to IEC 60068-1.
2) The temperature used should not exceed the maximum operating
temperature of the test item.

4-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

2. After assisted drying, the test item should be allowed to stabilise within
Standard Laboratory Conditions, before undertaking any Post-Test examinations.

3. If it is impracticable to carry out assisted drying under the conditions detailed


above in paragraph 4.6.1, the actual drying conditions shall be detailed in the
Environmental Test Specification and it should be noted in the test report.

4.7. POST-TEST CONTROLLED RECOVERY

1. In some instances the test item may need to be subjected to controlled


recovery conditions before undertaking any Post-Test examinations, functional tests,
performance tests or any test item characterisation work. Controlled recovery
conditions are needed to prevent moisture being absorbed or lost by the test item.
Controlled recovery conditions are only necessary if the parameters to be measured
are liable to change rapidly. For example, if insulation resistance is liable to rise soon
after removal of the test items from a humidity chamber (ca. within 1 to 2 hours).

2. If controlled recovery conditions are needed, acceptable controlled recovery


conditions are set out below. The recovery conditions should begin within 10 minutes
of the completion of the test and the required Post-Test measurements should be
completed within 30 minutes of removal of the test item from the recovery conditions.

Temperature The prevailing laboratory temperature may be within the


limits of 15 °C to 35 °C. The measurement accuracy shall
be within ±1 °C.

Relative Humidity The prevailing laboratory Relative Humidity may be within


the limits of 25 to 75%. The measurement accuracy shall
be within ±2%.

Air Pressure The prevailing laboratory pressure may be within the limits
of 86 kPa to 106 kPa.

NOTE: These conditions are comparable to IEC 60068-1.

4.8. WATER PURITY

1. The water used for Method 306 (Humid Heat), Method 310 (Rain /
Watertightness), Method 315 (Freeze / Thaw), Method 317 (Temperature / Humidity /
Altitude), and Method 318 (Vibration / Temperature / Humidity / Altitude) should be
fresh tap water of good quality. To prevent clogging of nozzles the water should be
filtered and may be demineralised.

4-5 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

2. Water used for humidity measurement (water vapour and wet bulb socks) as
well as that used for Method 308 (Mould Growth) and Method 309 (Salt Fog), should
not introduce contaminants or unintended products. Chemicals commonly found in
commercial water supplies, such as chlorine, may have unintended corrosive effects
on test items or affect fungus germination. Soluble materials, such as calcium
carbonate (lime), as well as insoluble materials can also cause nozzles to clog and
can leave deposits. Water with a non-neutral pH could cause unintended effects on
equipment. Rather than impose unrealistic water purity requirements, the
recommend water used for these tests, should be relatively clean of impurities and
chemicals, and have a pH in the range of 6.5 to 7.2 at 25 °C, at the time of the test.
Water resistivity in the range of 0.15 MΩ.cm to 5 MΩ.cm, is recommended. Water
used that is outside this range should be documented. Water within this range can
be produced using distillation, demineralization, reverse osmosis, or deionization.

4-6 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

CHAPTER 5 TEST CONSIDERATIONS

5.1. TEST ITEM CONFIGURATION

The test item should be installed within the test facilities in the required orientation
and configuration, as specified in the Environmental Test Specification. The
configuration should, as far as possible, be the in-service configuration of the
equipment when it is in storage, in transit, in operation or during use. As a minimum,
the following configurations should be considered for the test item:

a. In a transport/storage container or transit case.

b. Protected or unprotected.

c. In its normal operating and thermal configuration (representative or to


the extent practical).

d. Modified with kits for special applications.

5.2. MOUNTING OF TEST ITEM

1. Many of the climatic test methods of AECTP-300, either specify or imply a


method of mounting a test item. Where this is not the case, the method of mounting
a test item for undertaking environmental climatic testing, should be specified in the
Environmental Test Specification.

2. Mounting of the test item in the test facility should simulate, as closely as
practicable, the installation arrangements that exist in normal in-service use.
Unrepresentative orientations, structural frames, thermal screening, mixing of
incompatible material, etc., that could influence the outcome of the test should be
minimised.

3. The method of mounting a test item when undertaking climatic tests at


temperatures other than ambient, can be important because heat transfer depends
on the thermal characteristics of mounting and other connections. Moreover, heat
dissipating equipment is commonly intended to be mounted on heat sinks or other
heat conducting arrangements. Consequently, when assessing heat dissipating test
items or when the effects of thermal conduction is to be assessed, the Environmental
Test Specification should define the thermal characteristics of the in-service
equipment mounting. These characteristics should be reproduced during testing.

4. If equipment can be mounted in several ways when in-service, with mounting


arrangements having different values of thermal conductivity, then;

5-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

a. The mounting arrangement with the lowest thermal conductivity should


be used for heat dissipating test items when undertaking high
temperature tests.

b. The mounting arrangement with the highest thermal conductivity should


be used for non-heat dissipating test items when undertaking high
temperature tests and when undertaking low temperature tests with or
without heat dissipation.

5. If more than one test item is in the same chamber, it is necessary to ensure
that all the test items experience the same test temperatures and have identical
mounting conditions. Unless otherwise specified, install the test item in the chamber
in a manner that will simulate service use to the maximum extent practicable, with
test connections made and instrumentation attached as necessary. For example:

a. If the item to be tested consists of several individually packaged units /


subsystems, these units / subsystems may be tested separately,
provided the functional aspects are maintained as defined in the
Environmental Test Specification.

b. If units are being tested together and the mechanical, electrical, and
Radio Frequency (RF) interfaces permit, position units at least 15 cm
(6 inches) from each other and / or from the test chamber surfaces to
allow for consistent and controlled air circulation. For heat dissipating
equipment, ensure that one product does not influence another.

5.3. SUPPLIES AND SERVICES

Supplies and services (electrical power, air, hydraulics, etc.) required for operating or
monitoring the test item should, where practicable, be derived from or simulated by
sources identical to, or typical of, those provided for in-service use. Consideration
should also be given to any changes in the physical properties or characteristics of
the supplies and services which may arise when operating in extreme environments
(e.g., higher or lower working pressures, reduced cranking amperage on batteries,
etc.). These effects may need to be replicated to properly evaluate operation of the
test item.

5.4 CHAMBER REQUIREMENTS

1. To optimise the conditions of heat transfer between a test item and the
surrounding chamber, the following guidance should be considered:

a. Volume and Size: a minimum volume ratio of 5 to 1, between the


internal chamber volume and the test item volume. To ensure
adequate airflow, there should also be sufficient distance between the
test item and the walls of the test chamber or other test items. A

5-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

minimum distance around each test item of 150 mm (6”) is


recommended.

b. Radiative: the temperature of the chamber's (internal) walls should not


differ more than 3% from that of the chamber's air temperature
(expressed in degrees Kelvin). The emissivity of the chamber's walls
should be minimized as much as possible.

c. Conductive: the temperature of the support surface on which the test


item is placed / mounted should be approximately equal to that
anticipated during the life cycle of the materiel.

d. Convective: the air flow around or over the test item should ensure that
the conditions approximate as close as possible typical free air
conditions or those conditions expected when the equipment is in use.
However, consult the specific test method for further specifications.

2. In the case of convective flow-field, it may not be necessary to match in-


service conditions. Air-flow tends to primarily be of concern for heat dissipating
equipment, evaporative processes, and situations where radiative heat exchange is
important. In all other cases, ensuring a consistent and controlled temperature
around the test item is sufficient, so long as excessive temperature gradients are
avoided (in the air and in the product).

3. The following chamber parameters should also be considered:

a. The chamber should have sufficient heating and cooling capacity to


maintain test conditions when operating heat dissipating materiel.

b. The chamber should have sufficient means and capability of detecting


and exhausting noxious fumes and / or volatile compounds when
testing items which may emit said gases; particularly when personnel
may need to enter the chamber.

5.5. TEST MONITORING

1. It is good scientific and engineering practice to monitor test conditions to


ensure the test parameters are correct and the desired environmental conditions are
being maintained within specified tolerances throughout the duration of the test.
Therefore:

a. Install sufficient sensors to determine test item and chamber conditions


(these will be required for Pre-, During- and Post-Test). Ensure sensors
are adequate to:

(1) Determine temperature stabilisation.

5-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

(2) Establish chamber working volume air conditions.

(3) Monitor critical positions associated with the test item response.

b. See paragraphs 6.2.b and 6.2.c for additional requirements.

2. Sufficient sensors should be used to monitor all the specific conditions created
by the specific test, ensuring the sensors are adequate for the purpose. These shall
include but not be limited to:

a. Test item response to environmental conditions and monitoring of


critical positions associated with the test item response.

b. Monitoring of test facility environmental conditions specific to the test;


e.g., Temperature, Relative Humidity, Wind Speed, etc.

3. Establish an alarm system to be triggered by parameter levels which go


outside of acceptable limits. These alarms are prudent (when monitoring) to ensure
that the test environment is being applied appropriately. These alarms are critical
when monitoring parameters that may result in unsafe conditions for personnel.

5.6. FUNCTIONAL TESTS

If any Pre-, During- or Post-Test functional tests are required, conduct said test as
appropriate with the advice provided in the specific test Method and as detailed within
the Environmental Test Specification.

5.6.1. Pre-Test

Unless specified otherwise in the Environmental Test Specification, a Functional Pre-


Test standard ambient check should be conducted to provide functional baseline data
for all test items.

a. General: Record the basic information, including required information


from each Test Method.

b. For each Test Method in AECTP-300:

(1) Visually examine the test item with special attention to stress
areas and document observations including appropriate
photographs and sensor positions.

(2) Insert the test item into the chamber in the required test
configuration. Ensure that all cable connections have been
made; that unused electrical (or other) connections have been
adequately covered to simulate the actual operational

5-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

environment, and that other similar requirements for proper


operation have been accomplished.

(3) Conduct any required functional tests.

(4) If the test item operates in accordance with the requirements,


proceed to the appropriate test procedure. If not, document
observations, resolve the problems and restart the Pre-Test.

5.6.2. During-Test

Unless specified otherwise in the Environmental Test Specification, monitoring


should be undertaken throughout the test to ensure that test specification has been
met and that no deviation has occurred.

a. General: Record the basic information, including required information


from each Test Method.

b. For each Test Method in AECTP-300:

(1) Performance check. Monitoring and recording of test item’s


critical performance parameters is required before and after all
tests. If the test item is required to function during the conditions
of the test, conduct any required functional tests as detailed
within the Environmental Test Specification.

(2) If the test item operates in accordance with the Environmental


Test Specification, continue with the test as required in the test
method.

(3) If the item has not functioned as expected; document the


observations, refer to the Environmental Test Specification for
guidance and if necessary, stop the test. For test interruptions,
see Chapter 7 and the guidance within the specific test method.

NOTE: Where appropriate (for items containing energetic / volatile materials; e.g.,
weapons), these checks should be conducted remotely, where personnel should not
physically enter the test chamber or examine the item under test whilst the test is in
progress. If personnel are required to directly operate or manipulate the test item during
the test (i.e., for functional tests), then this shall be detailed in the Environmental Test
Specification. The safety of personnel to enter the chamber however, may be limited by
the potentially hazardous nature of the specific test and / or specific test item. Therefore,
the hazard should be understood prior to conducting the test and referenced within the
Environmental Test Specification. Particularly, care shall be given to exhausting any
noxious fumes (from combustion or off gassing) as well as monitoring the air quality inside
the chamber. Data from these checks should be included within the Test Report.

5-5 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

5.6.3. Post-Test

Unless specified otherwise in the Environmental Test Specification, a post test check
should be conducted to provide data for all test items. After completing the
environmental test, examine the test item in accordance with the Environmental Test
Specifications.

a. General: Record the basic information, including required information


from each Test Method.

b. For each Test Method in AECTP-300:

(1) Before returning to the test item, ensure that the test facility
safety procedures and any specific requirements within the
Environmental Test Specification are followed (which may vary
depending upon the item), and that the item is safe to approach.

(2) Undertake visual inspection of the test item, document findings


and observations with a written record, photographs, and if
appropriate, videography. If significant hazards or safety issues
are found, these should be reported to the relevant test facility
authority and the test facility safety procedures followed.

(3) If required and appropriate, a functional test of the test item may
be undertaken to obtain Post-Test data. Compare the results
with the Pre-Test data.

NOTE: Climatic testing is generally looking for subtle changes caused by the
environment. These tend to be observed by comparing the Pre-, During- and
Post-Test functional test data. Functional tests should be designed to exercise
critical functions (operational and safety). These should include worst-case
conditions; i.e., extremes of the performance envelope for a given environment,
especially relating to heat transfer, power draw, etc. Repeated functional tests
may be necessary to characterise variability in the results, due to either
operational variability and / or human operator error.

5.7. PRE- AND POST-TEST EXAMINATION

1. Prior to conducting, and at the completion of the tests, the condition of each
test item shall be established as follows:

a. Basic. This consists of visual examination supported by photography


as necessary (wide angle and close detail).

5-6 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

b. Intermediate. Encompasses ‘Basic’ but may also include radiography


and / or additional non-destructive techniques (e.g., tomography,
ultrasonic).

c. Full. Encompasses ‘Basic’ and ‘Intermediate’ but may also include


disassembly for internal examination. This is typified by destructive
examination, and assessment of the chemical and physical properties
of the materials contained within the test item.

2. For additional and / or other specific instructions for Pre- and Post-Test
Examination, consult the Environmental Test Specification.

5-7 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

5-8 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

CHAPTER 6 INFORMATION REQUIRED

6.1. INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTIONS

For each of the AECTP-300 Methods, the following information is required in the test
instructions (where applicable). The individual AECTP-300 Methods may contain
additional requirements to augment this list.

a. Purpose of the test; i.e., a demonstration of performance, survival or


ageing.

b. The test method to be used and appropriate test procedure, where


more than one is available.

c. Test severities; i.e., type, number of cycles, and appropriate change


rates.

d. The tolerances to be applied.

e. Test item identification (manufacturer, lot and serial number, etc.), test
item configuration and the number of test items is required. This should
also include whether the test item is to be tested in its normal packaging
or unpackaged as well as the state the test item is to be tested in; e.g.,
valves, hatches, covers and doors open or closed, power on or off, and
restraints in place if necessary.

f. Method of mounting and orientation of the test item within the chamber.

g. Estimated dimensions and volume occupied by the test item / required,


and actual working volume in the chamber.

h. Type and location of control and monitoring sensors, including locations


at which stabilization is to be measured on the test item; i.e., known
critical components. The component used to determine the stabilization
point should be detailed in the Environmental Test Specification, with
appropriate justification provided.

i. If functional performance is to be assessed;

(1) The phases of the test when the test item is to operate and be
assessed.

(2) The levels of performance required.

6-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

j. Whether any visual or other examinations are required. If they are, the
phases of the test that they are to be conducted at and the
requirements to be met.

k. Whether natural or assisted drying is required and the duration of any


recovery period before final visual inspection or assessment of
performance.

l. Any additional parameters to be recorded, or instrumentation installed.

m. Any permitted deviations from the test procedure.

n. Any other known safety concerns; e.g., engine exhaust requirements.

6.2. INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR VERIFICATION

For each of the AECTP-300 Methods, the following shall be provided so that the test
can be verified at the completion of the test, with the requirements included within the
test instructions and reported within the test reports.

a. Measurements shall be undertaken to enable a verification process to


be completed; to demonstrate that the required test severities have
been achieved and within the specified tolerance bands.

b. The frequency of monitoring may vary depending on the data


requirements and how the data is to be used. Measurements shall be
taken of the applicable test parameters immediately prior to the test at
sufficient locations to characterise the variability within the working
space of the chamber. Test parameters such as temperature, humidity
and pressure should be recorded at suitable intervals, typically not
greater than 10 minutes or one 100th of the overall period, including
any required preconditioning and any Post-Test recovery periods,
whichever is the smaller. The specified recording intervals,
preconditioning and recovery period durations should be detailed within
the Environmental Test Specification.

c. In determining appropriate monitoring requirements, the following


aspects should be considered:

(1) The frequency of monitoring will depend upon the type of climatic
test and its data requirements. Test conditions should be
monitored at intervals that are appropriate for the test item and at
a rate which ensures the prescribed severities can be
maintained, within the required tolerances, by the test facilities.
Other minimum intervals may be set to capture transient events
that may occur at any time during the test.

6-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

(2) Monitoring may involve real-time continuous recording, periodic


recording or other agreed techniques.

(3) The test item should be monitored to verify its physical condition
or performance. This will ensure that pertinent changes in the
condition of the test item is recorded throughout the conditioning,
enabling meaningful analysis to be performed.

(4) The format and measurement accuracy used in the presentation


of the verification process results should be the same as those
specified in the Environmental Test Specification. The
verification data should be presented in an agreed digital format.

NOTE:
1) Monitoring equipment, such as thermocouples or other sensors, should not
modify or attenuate the materiel’s temperature and / or thermal conductivity.

2) Original (raw) data captured during the test shall be preserved to ensure that
there is an unmodified source of test data.

In addition to the information within the chapter and specific to the AECTP-300 test
method, the following information is required to verify the completion of the test(s)
described in the method. This shall be provided within the Environmental Test
Specification and / or recorded in the test report.

6.2.1. Pre-Test

Unless specified otherwise in the Environmental Test Specification, a Pre-Test


standard ambient check should be conducted to provide baseline data for all test
items.

a. General: Record the basic information, including required information


from each Test Method.

b. For each Test Method in AECTP-300;

(1) Test item identification (manufacturer, model / serial number,


etc.).

(2) Test equipment identification, including accessories and


calibration information.

(3) Description, with photographs, of the test item’s configuration


and orientation within the test chamber for each test procedure.

6-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

(4) List of all sensor (thermocouples, hygrometers, etc.) placement


locations, with photographs.

(5) Identification of the components / assemblies / structures to be


used for measuring the response and evaluating the test item(s).

(6) If required, a record of the test item temperature-versus-time


during any Pre-Test functional tests.

(7) If required, a record of the ambient temperature and humidity


during any Pre-Test functional test.

(8) Results of functional test.

6.2.2. During-Test

Unless specified otherwise in the Environmental Test Specification, monitoring


should be undertaken throughout the test to ensure the test specification has been
met and that no deviation has occurred.

a. General: Record the basic information, including required information


from each Test Method.

b. For each Test Method in AECTP-300;

(1) Record of the test conditions-versus-time for the entire test


duration including Pre-Test and Post-Test conditions.

(2) Documentation of when stabilization of the test item was


achieved for evaluating the duration of test condition exposure.

(3) Any changes to the installation, configuration, or orientation of


the test item within the test chamber during testing.

(4) Documentation of test item operating and non-operating periods


as well as any functional tests completed.

(5) Results of functional test.

6.2.3. Post-Test

Unless specified otherwise in the Environmental Test Specification, a post test check
should be conducted to provide data for all test items. After completing the
environmental test, examine the test item in accordance with the Environmental Test
Specifications.

6-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

a. General: Record the basic information, including required information


from each Test Method.

b. For each Test Method in AECTP-300;

(1) Results of any visual inspections and any functional tests


performed.

(2) If required, a record of the test item temperature-versus-time


during any Post-Test functional tests.

(3) If required, a record of the ambient temperature and humidity


during any Post-Test functional tests.

(4) The actual test sequence (programme) used.

(5) Performance data collected on the same parameters at the same


operational levels as those of the Pre-Test.

(6) Other data specified in individual methods or requirements


document(s).

(7) List of any test interruptions and deviations from the test plan,
ensuring that the guidance within Chapter 7 was followed,
including the provision of the explanation of the interruption /
deviation, and documented approval from the Test Specifier /
Stakeholder Panel.

6-5 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6-6 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

CHAPTER 7 TEST INTERRUPTION GUIDANCE

7.1. DEFINITION

1. An interruption is defined as the occurrence of out-of-tolerance test conditions.


Unless otherwise specified in the Environmental Test Specification, the procedures
set out below, in addition to the requirements found within the specific Test Method,
should be followed when a test is interrupted. For hazardous materials, appropriate
non-destructive testing of the materials may be necessary.

2. All interruption criteria shall be detailed in the test item’s Environmental Test
Specification. In the event of an interruption:

a. Consult the guidance within this Method

b. Consult the guidance within the specific Test Method

c. Inform the relevant Stakeholder Panel to obtain approval of the required


course of action.

3. Figure 1 provides a simplified guide of how to proceed following an


interruption. In addition to Figure 1, the specific sections below should be reviewed
and understood prior to proceeding.

7.2. UNDER-TEST INTERRUPTION

If the effect of the interruption resulted in the test conditions becoming less severe
than those required:

a. Re-establish the prescribed conditions; e.g., chamber temperature,


humidity, etc.

b. Re-establish any required pre-conditioning; e.g., test item conditioning


temperature.

c. Continue the test from the point of the interruption.

d. Any identified deviation must be explained in the test report, with the
cause determined and the impact on the test items explained.

7-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

Test Started &


Interruption Occurs.
Ensure interruption noted in
Test Report.
(See Section 7)

Continue Test without changing


Was it an
In-tolerance Yes Test Duration, unless otherwise
Interruption? specified.
(See Section 7.1)

No

Continue Test and adjust Test


Was it a
Scheduled Yes Time Appropriately, unless
Interuption? otherwise specified.
(See Section 7.4)

No

Continue Test and adjust Test


Was it an No Time Appropriately, unless
Out-of-Tolerance
otherwise specified.
Overtest?
(See Section 7.2)

Yes

Out-of-Tolerance Overtest
(See Section 7.3)

Yes

Was the
Item Damaged or have No
materials degraded?

Yes

Is the No
Item Repairable?

Restart Test at Beginning with


Yes New Item
(See Section 7.5)

No
Were repairs made?

Yes
Restart Test at Beginning with
New or Rebuilt Item
(See Section 7.5)

Figure 1: Simplified Guide for Interruption Procedure

7-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

7.3. OVER-TEST INTERRUPTION

When the effect of the interruption resulted in the test conditions becoming more
severe than those required, the preferable course of action is to terminate the test
and reinitiate testing with a new test item. However, there would be a loss of the
cumulative and / or synergistic effects from the previous testing, see Chapter 8
paragraph 8.6. Therefore, the following should be considered:

a. Stop the test and conduct an operational and visual check of the test
item.

b. If no defects are revealed, re-stabilise the test item at the test conditions
that correspond to the point of interruption and continue the test.

c. If a defect is revealed, restart the test from the beginning with a new
test item.

d. Any identified deviation must be explained in the test report, with the
cause determined and the impact on the test items explained.

e. Consider the time at over-test conditions as valid test time. The


consequences of any over-test should be considered, with guidance
provided in Chapter 9.

7.4. SCHEDULED INTERRUPTION

1. If the interruption is due to scheduled maintenance or repair of the test


equipment or the test item:

a. Stop the test and conduct an operational and visual check of the test
item.

b. Re-establish any required pre-conditioning.

c. Re-establish the prescribed conditions.

d. Continue the test from the point of the interruption.

e. Any identified deviation must be explained in the test report, with the
cause determined and the impact on the test items explained.

2. Scheduled test interruptions should be avoided and may not be allowed for
some test methods due to the time required to re-establish an equivalent response /
condition in the test item.

7-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

7.5. INTERRUPTIONS DUE TO TEST ITEM FAILURE

An interruption could occur where the test item has suffered a structural failure or has
failed to operate during functional tests. For guidance on the types of failure and
remedial actions to undertake in the event of said failure, see Chapter 9.

7-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

CHAPTER 8 GUIDANCE ON TEST PROGRAMME DEVELOPMENT

8.1. TEST REQUIREMENTS

1. The purpose of this document is to provide general guidance related to the


climatic test methods of AECTP-300, defining the general test conditions and
associated tolerances utilised with the test methods of AECTP-300. Advice on the
selection of environmental tests, the derivation of the sequence in which those tests
should be undertaken and the preparation of test specifications by indicating which
test methods are preferred however, is provided in greater detail within AECTP 230.

2. AECTP 230 complements, amplifies, and extends the information contained in


AECTP-300 by:

a. Identifying potential damaging effects that natural and induced


environmental conditions have on materiel.

b. Providing guidance on the selection of suitable test methods.

c. Providing a detailed description of the natural and induced


environments.

3. For the assessment of munitions (in particular) reference should also be made
to the guidance contained in STANAG 4297 Edition 2.

8.2. TESTING IN THE NATURAL ENVIRONMENT

Testing in the natural environment is the most realistic approach. However, since it is
not possible to control the natural environment, it is rarely possible to ensure that the
required extreme environment is available for the test. Where testing in the natural
environment is impractical, laboratory testing becomes essential, but it should be
accepted that the full synergistic effect of the natural environment may not be
accurately replicated in all aspects.

8.3. TAILORING

The tailoring process (as described in AECTP 100, Guidelines on the Management of
Environmental Testing of Defence Materiel, or equivalent national documents) shall
be used to determine the appropriate tests and test variables based upon the Life
Cycle Environmental Profile (LCEP). Whenever possible, data obtained under actual
end-use conditions should be utilised to define test parameters. When measured
data are not available, analytical derivations and data from similar applications may
be used. The requirements documents must, in all cases, define the anticipated

8-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

operational scenarios for the test item, so that the environmental test conditions can
be derived.

8.4. SEQUENCE

The sequence of tests should normally reflect the sequence of environments that the
materiel is expected to experience during its life cycle. Practically, limitations such as
time, scheduling and resources may require modification to this approach. There
are, in some situations, specific guidelines or recommendations for test sequence.
These are identified in the individual test methods.

8.5. COMBINED ENVIRONMENTS

The tailoring process (AECTP 100) may identify a need to apply combined
environments to the test item. Such combinations as temperature and altitude,
temperature and vibration, or temperature and shock may produce a more realistic
representation of the effects of the environment than a series of single tests.
Combined environment testing is encouraged, and the appropriate test procedures
should be blended by the environmental engineering specialist to provide the
required simulation.

8.6. SYNERGISTIC EFFECTS

Materiel will frequently experience two or more environmental stresses either


simultaneously or consecutively, producing cumulative or synergistic effects that do
not occur due to a single stress event. Accordingly, it is recommended that, to the
maximum extent possible, the same test item(s) be used throughout the test
sequence for both climatic and dynamic tests. Exceptions to this guidance are
provided in the individual test methods as appropriate.

8.7. SELECTION OF CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

1. The climatic test parameter values shall be based upon actual measurements,
documentation containing climatic data such as AECTP 230 Leaflet 2311, similar
national documents, or data banks.

2. In determining parameters, consideration shall be given to the following:

a. Natural (Meteorological) climatic conditions: The naturally-occurring


ambient environmental conditions anticipated for the areas of use,
which are not modified by the structure in or on which the materiel is
placed.

b. Induced environment: The ambient environmental conditions resulting


from the modification of the natural climatic conditions due to the
structure in or on which the materiel is utilized. Examples of values that

8-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

may be considered if no specific data are available, are given in


AECTP 230, Leaflet 2310.

c. Controlled (constant) environment: The steady state conditions that


exist in environments that are relatively controlled; e.g., aircraft cargo
bays, maintenance rooms, inside storage areas, or other conditioned
enclosures.

3. Where there is any likelihood of differential stressing from thermal cycling


being significant, it may be appropriate to use cyclic temperature testing or, in some
instances, thermal shock testing. For other situations, constant temperature testing is
appropriate.

4. When the materiel is intended to be used throughout the world, allowance


should be made for the conditions encountered in the most extreme climatic zones.
However, there may be short periods of time during which Service conditions exceed
the environmental extremes presented in these methods and, during which, proper
materiel functioning may be inhibited. Once an acceptable frequency of occurrence
of a climatic element has been determined, the corresponding climatic value can be
ascertained from the climatic data documentation. Appropriate diurnal cycles are
given in AECTP 230, Leaflets 2310 and 2311. Care should be taken when
considering occurrences exceeding 87 hours per year (1% of the duration of one
month) because of under-design possibilities. For worldwide low temperatures,
consideration should be given to the possibility of the materiel entering the C3
category. Since the C4 category only covers the coldest areas of Greenland and
Siberia, it is only necessary to consider this for specialised materiel. If the materiel is
likely to enter C3, then -51 °C is an appropriate low temperature to use for design
and test purposes. For other cold categories, appropriate cycles are provided in
AECTP 230, Leaflets 2310 and 2311.

8.8. EXPOSURE DURATION

The duration of exposure to severe temperatures may have a significant impact on


materiel and its component materials. Normal diurnal cycling will involve thermal lag
for which the most severe test item response is normally achieved within 7 cycles.
Constant (non-cyclic) conditions will generally produce thermal stabilisation in a
shorter period. Actual exposure durations should take into consideration the LCEP.

8-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

8-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

CHAPTER 9 EVALUATION OF TEST RESULTS

9.1. FAILURES

1. Failure of a test item to operate as required during functional tests, or a failure


of the item’s structure and / or components presents a situation with several possible
options. Failure of subsystems often has varying degrees of importance in evaluation
of the test materiel integrity.

2. Any one of the following conditions shall normally constitute a test item failure:

a. Deviation of monitored functional parameter levels beyond acceptable


limits established in the requirements document.

(1) Degraded performance at specified environmental extremes is


permissible if identified in the test plan. Degraded performance
is a failure if:

(a) Degradation exceeds the permissible limits, or

(b) Specified performance is not restored upon removal of the


environmental extreme.

b. Non-fulfilment of safety requirements or the development of safety


hazards.

c. Non-fulfilment of specific test item requirements.

d. Changes to the test item that could prevent it from meeting its intended
service life or maintenance requirements. (For example: Corroded oil
drain plug cannot be removed with commonly available tools or without
damaging the surrounding components.)

3. All failure criteria shall be detailed in the test item’s Environmental Test
Specification. In the event of a failure of the test item to function as required during
operational checks, consult the Environment Test Specification and inform the
relevant Stakeholder Panel to confirm the required course of action.

9.2. RETESTS

1. Test items with parts or assemblies that have been replaced, repaired or
redesigned should be re-tested to the complete test environment. It is recommended
that one of the following options is undertaken:

9-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

OPTION A. The preferable option is to replace the test item with a ‘new’ item
and restart the entire test.

OPTION B. Replace / repair the failed or non-functioning component or


assembly within the test item, with one that functions as intended
and restart the entire test. If the non-functioning component or
subsystem is a Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) whose life-cycle is
less than that of the system test being conducted, it may be
possible to substitute the LRU and proceed from the point of
interruption. However, the following should be considered:

(1) If the component is one which contains energetic


materials; e.g., an igniter from a rocket motor, then
replacing the component may not be appropriate as this
would void any cumulative and / or synergistic effects from
the testing done previous and increase uncertainty in the
life of the assembly.

(2) The life of the ‘system’ would be limited to that of the


component which failed; unless an appropriate life
extension or maintenance programme is planned to
replace the life limiting component.

OPTION C. For system level tests involving unique materials / materiel, it


may not be possible to acquire additional hardware for re-test
based on a single subsystem failure. For such cases, the
organization responsible for the system under test, in conjunction
with other relevant stakeholders, should perform a risk
assessment to determine if replacement of the failed subsystem
is feasible and resumption of the test is an acceptable option.
Subject to Stakeholder Panel approval, the failed component
could be retested at the component level (see paragraph
9.2.2.b).

2. Caution for Retest

a. For Option B:

(1) If the test item contains energetic / volatile materials, repeating


the test from the start (following the replacement / repair of other
components or assemblies) may cause any original energetic /
volatile materials to degrade beyond their design limits. This
could cause an unrepresentative failure to occur and / or cause
the energetic materials to become unstable and hazardous.

9-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

(2) Non-energetic materials could also fail if the duration of the test
programme exceeds the design limits of the materiel.

b. For Option B and C

(1) Component testing is not usually appropriate when its boundary


conditions are significantly influenced by adjacent components or
the overall system, such that they affect the component’s thermal
behaviour or its safety-critical functional response. When the
component characteristics are affected, then testing should
normally be conducted as an integral part of the overall system
or as part of a major sub-assembly.

(2) Component testing is appropriate when the boundary conditions


are well defined and there is no significant influence from the
overall system that is likely to affect the components thermal
behaviour, or its safety-critical functional response.

(3) Safety and Suitability for Service environmental testing, whether


at complete assembly or component level, needs to demonstrate
that all necessary failure modes have been exercised. This
intrinsically means that the thermal conditions experienced by
the components are fully representative of those experienced
during operational use.

9.3. EXCEPTIONS

The following conditions by themselves need not necessarily constitute a failure of


the test item, although a re-test would normally be necessary.

a. Failure of a test tool, fixture or other associated support equipment.

b. Operator error.

c. Mishandling or improper assembly during troubleshooting or


maintenance of the test item.

d. Failure of associated Government Furnished Equipment (GFE) /


Contractor Furnished Equipment (CFE).

e. Test item failures induced by test tools, fixtures, GFE / CFE, and
associated support equipment.

f. Failure of test item elements or assemblies during retest (at conditions


more extreme than those detailed in the deployment scenario) that have
previously met environmental testing requirements.

9-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

g. Failures induced by the failure of test item elements or assemblies


during retest that have previously met environmental testing
requirements outside the extremes specified in the equipment
specification.

9-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

CHAPTER 10 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

a. IEC 60068 Part 1, Environmental testing – General and guidance, 2014.

b. IEC 60068 Part 3-11, Environmental testing – Supporting


documentation and guidance – Calculation of uncertainty of conditions
in climatic test chambers, 2007.

c. ISO 554, Standard atmospheres for conditioning and/or testing, 1976.

d. ISO 3205, Preferred test temperatures, 1976.

e. STANAG 4297, Guidance on the Assessment of the Safety and


Suitability for Service of Non-Nuclear Munitions for NATO Armed
Forces.

f. STANAG 4370 AECTP-100, Environmental guidelines for defence


materiel, May 2009.

g. STANAG 4370 AECTP 230 Section 2311 Leaflet 2310, Environmental


guidelines for defence materiel - Climatic conditions - Worldwide
extreme climatic & environmental conditions for defining design/test
criteria - Climatic categories and their geographical location.

h. STANAG 4370 AECTP 230 Section 2311 Leaflet 2311, Environmental


guidelines for defence materiel - Climatic conditions - Worldwide
extreme climatic & environmental conditions for defining design/test
criteria - World-wide ambient air temperature and humidity conditions
and levels of direct solar radiation.

i. MIL-STD-810 Environmental Engineering Considerations and


Laboratory Tests.

j. DEF STAN 00-035 Environmental Handbook for Defence Material.

k. The US Range Commanders Council (RCC) Series.

l. European Cooperation for Space Standardization (ECSS) Publications.

m. ECSS-E-ST-10-04C – Space Environment.

n. BS ISO 17851:2016 Space systems. Space environment simulation for


material tests. General principles and criteria.

10-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 300

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

10-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 301

METHOD 301
LOW PRESSURE (ALTITUDE)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE ........................................................................................... 1-1


1.1. PURPOSE ................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2. APPLICATION........................................................................................... 1-1
1.3. LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................ 1-1
CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE .......................................................................... 2-1
2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT ........................................................ 2-1
2.1.1. Physical/Chemical .............................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2. Electrical............................................................................................. 2-1
2.2. CHOICE OF TEST PROCEDURE ............................................................ 2-1
2.2.1. Procedure I – Storage/Air Carriage .................................................... 2-2
2.2.2. Procedure II – Operation/Air Transport .............................................. 2-2
2.2.3. Procedure III – Rapid Decompression................................................ 2-2
2.2.4. Procedure IV – Explosive Decompression ......................................... 2-2
2.3. SEQUENCE .............................................................................................. 2-2
2.4. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS........................................................... 2-2
2.4.1. Test Pressure and Temperature ........................................................ 2-3
2.4.2. Altitude Change Rate ......................................................................... 2-3
2.4.3. Rapid Decompression Rate ............................................................... 2-4
2.4.4. Test Duration ...................................................................................... 2-4
CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST
INSTRUCTION ............................................................................... 3-1
CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES .................................... 4-1
4.1. TEST FACILITY ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.2. CONTROLS .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.3. TEST INTERRUPTION ............................................................................. 4-1
4.4. PROCEDURES ......................................................................................... 4-1
4.4.1. Preparation for Test............................................................................ 4-1
4.4.2. Procedure I – Storage/Air Transportation ........................................... 4-1
4.4.3. Procedure II – Operation/Air Carriage ................................................ 4-2
4.4.4. Procedure III – Rapid Decompression................................................ 4-2
4.4.5. Procedure IV – Explosive Decompression ......................................... 4-2
CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS ....................................... 5-1
CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................. 6-1

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 301

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 301

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE

NOTE: METHOD 300, GENERAL GUIDANCE AND REQUIREMENTS,


CONTAINS INFORMATION NECESSARY TO CONDUCT THE TEST
PROCEDURES OF THIS METHOD, AND SHALL BE USED IN COMBINATION
WITH THIS TEST METHOD.

1. SCOPE

1.1. PURPOSE

Low-pressure (altitude) tests are performed to determine if materiel can withstand


and/or operate in a low-pressure environment and/or withstand rapid pressure
changes.

1.2. APPLICATION

Specific applications are to determine if:

a. The materiel can be stored and operated at high ground elevation sites.

b. The materiel can be transported or operated in


pressurized/unpressurized areas of aircraft.

c. The materiel can survive a rapid or explosive decompression and, if not,


to determine if it will damage the aircraft or present a hazard to
personnel.

d. The materiel can withstand external carriage on aircraft.

1.3. LIMITATIONS

This method is not intended to be used to test materiel to be installed in space


vehicles, aircraft, or missiles that fly at altitudes above 30,000 m.

1-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 301

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

1-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 301

CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE

2. TEST GUIDANCE

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8.

2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT

In addition to thermal effects (see Method 303), examples of problems that could occur
as a result of exposure to reduced pressure are shown below. Exposure to high
humidity immediately following flight can draw moisture into items, but if it is necessary
to evaluate such combined effects, other test methods (such as Method 317 of this
AECTP) should be used. The list below is not intended to be all-inclusive and some of
the examples may overlap the categories:

2.1.1. Physical/Chemical

a. Leakage of gases or fluids from gasket-sealed enclosures.

b. Deformation, rupture or explosion of sealed containers.

c. Change in physical and chemical properties of low-density materials.

d. Overheating of materiel due to reduced heat transfer.

e. Evaporation of lubricants.

f. Erratic starting and operation of engines.

g. Failure of hermetic seals.

2.1.2. Electrical

Erratic operation or malfunction of materiel resulting from arcing or corona.

2.2. CHOICE OF TEST PROCEDURE

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8. Four test procedures are included within this
Method: storage, operation, rapid decompression, and explosive decompression.
Based on the test data requirements, determine which of the test procedures or
combination of procedures is applicable.

2-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 301

2.2.1. Procedure I - Storage/Air Transport

Procedure I is appropriate if the materiel is to be stored at high ground elevations or


transported in its shipping/storage configuration.

2.2.2. Procedure II - Operation/Air Carriage

Procedure II is used to determine the performance of the materiel under low pressure
conditions and may be preceded by procedure I, procedure III, procedure IV, or all
three. If there are no low pressure storage, rapid or explosive decompression
requirements, this procedure can stand alone.

2.2.3. Procedure III - Rapid Decompression

Procedure III is used to determine if a rapid decrease in pressure of the surrounding


environment will cause a materiel reaction that would endanger nearby personnel or
the aircraft in which it is being transported. This procedure may be preceded by
either the storage or the operational test.

2.2.4. Procedure IV - Explosive Decompression

Procedure IV is similar to Procedure III except that it involves an "instantaneous"


decrease in the pressure of the surrounding environment.

2.3. SEQUENCE

See Method 300 Chapter 8.

Other testing may contribute significantly to the effects of low pressure on the test item
(see paragraph 2.1), and may have to be conducted before this method. For example:

a. Low-temperature and high-temperature testing may affect seals.

b. Dynamic tests may affect the structural integrity of the test item.

c. Aging of non-metallic components may reduce their strength.

2.4. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS

See Method 300 Chapters 1, 4, and 8.

After the test procedure is chosen, determine the test parameters such as test
pressure and temperature, rate of change of pressure (and temperature if appropriate),
duration of exposure, and test item configuration.

2-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 301

2.4.1. Test Pressure and Temperature

Base determination of the specific test pressures and temperatures on the


anticipated deployment or flight profile of the test item.

a. Ground areas. If measured data are not available, temperatures may be


obtained for appropriate ground elevations and geographical locations
from Leaflet 2311. The highest elevation currently contemplated for
NATO ground military operations (equipment operating and non-
operating) is 4,570 m with an equivalent air pressure of 57 kPa.

b. Transport aircraft cargo compartment pressure conditions. Table I


provides the minimum cargo compartment pressures for various aircraft
used to transport cargo. These pressures can occur as a result of failure
of the automatic pressurization system. Redundant systems prevent
rapid loss of pressure unless explosive decompression occurs. Testing
to the 4,570 m equivalent altitude will assure that the materiel shipped by
air will successfully withstand the low-pressure environment. The range
of temperatures associated with the various low pressure situations is
such that identification of same in this document is impractical. Test
temperatures should be obtained from measured data or from
appropriate national sources.

c. Maximum flight altitude for explosive decompression testing: 12,200 m


(18.84 kPa). When it is known that other altitudes will be encountered,
test the materiel for the known elevation.

2.4.2. Altitude Change Rate

If a specific rate of altitude change (climb/descent rate) is not known or specified in


the requirements document, the following guidance is offered: In general, and with
the exception of the explosive decompression test, the rate of altitude change should
not exceed 10 m/s unless justified by the anticipated deployment platform. In a full
military power takeoff, military transport aircraft normally have an average altitude
change rate of 7.6 m/s.

2-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 301

TABLE I: Minimum normal cargo compartment pressures

Aircraft Minimum Cargo Equivalent Altitude


Compartment Pressure
(kPa) (m)
C-130 56.8 4,570
C-141 59.1 4,270
C-5A 60.1 4,110
DC-8/707/DC-9-80 56.8 4,570
DC-10/747/KC-10 56.8 4,570
L-1011/767 56.8 4,570
C-160 Transall 59.1 4,270
VC-10 79.2 1,980
A-300/C 74.6 2,400

2.4.3. Rapid Decompression Rate

There are several conditions for which the rapid rate of decompression may vary.
These include:

a. Massive damage to the aircraft, but the aircraft survives and


decompression is virtually instantaneous.

b. Relatively small holes caused by foreign objects through which


decompression could occur at a slower rate than above.

c. Relatively gradual loss of pressure due to loosening of aircraft structure


(including seals).

Explosive decompression should be accomplished in 0.1 second or less; rapid


decompression should not take more than 15 seconds.

2.4.4. Test Duration

For Procedure I, the test duration should be representative of the anticipated service
environment but, if this is determined to be extensive, a test duration of at least 1
hour is considered adequate for most materiel. Once the test pressure has been
reached and any required functions performed, Procedures II, III and IV do not
require extended periods at the test pressure.

2-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 301

CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

3. INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

See Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6.

3-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 301

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 301

CHAPTER 4 TEST CONIDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

4. TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

See Method 300 Chapters 3, 4, and 5 for test facility, test conditions and test control
information.

4.1. TEST FACILITY

See Method 300 Chapter 5.

4.2. CONTROLS

Unless otherwise specified, the altitude change rate shall not exceed 10 m/s.

4.3. TEST INTERRUPTION

See Method 300 Chapter 7. To achieve the desired effects, the test item must be
subjected to the full duration of the low pressure test without interruption.

4.4. PROCEDURES

The following test procedures, alone or in combination, provide the bases for collecting
the necessary information concerning the test item in a low-pressure environment.
Unless otherwise specified, the chamber temperature shall be maintained at the
anticipated service environment temperature.

4.4.1. Preparation for Test

Before starting any of the test procedures, determine the information specified in
Method 4 and 6 as well as altitude change rates, and perform the test preparation
procedure specified in Method 300 Chapter 2.

4.4.2. Procedure I - Storage/Air Transportation

Step 1. Place the test item in its storage/transit configuration and position
it in the test chamber.

Step 2. If appropriate, stabilize the test item to the required test


temperature.

Step 3. Adjust the chamber air pressure to the required test altitude, at
an altitude change rate as specified in the test plan.

4-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 301

Step 4. Maintain the conditions for a minimum of 1 hour unless otherwise


specified in the test plan.

Step 5. Adjust the chamber air to standard ambient conditions at the rate
specified in the test plan.

Step 6. Visually examine the test item to the extent possible and conduct
an operational check. Document the results.

4.4.3. Procedure II - Operation/Air Carriage

Step 1. With the test item in its operational configuration, adjust the
chamber air pressure (and temperature if appropriate) to the
required equivalent operational altitude at a rate not to exceed
that specified in the test plan.

Step 2. Conduct an operational check of the test item in accordance with


the requirements documents, and document the results.

Step 3. Adjust the chamber air to standard ambient conditions at the rate
specified in the test plan.

Step 4. Visually examine the test item to the extent possible and conduct
an operational check. Document the results.

4.4.4. Procedure III - Rapid Decompression

Step 1. With the test item in the storage or transit configuration, adjust
the chamber air pressure (and temperature if appropriate) at the
rate specified in the test plan to the maximum equivalent altitude
of the anticipated aircraft (cabin pressure) (from Table 1).

Step 2. Reduce the chamber air pressure to an equivalent altitude of


12,200 m (18.8 kPa), or as otherwise specified in the test plan, in
10 ± 5 seconds. Maintain this stabilized reduced pressure for at
least 10 minutes.

Step 3. Adjust the chamber air to standard ambient conditions at the rate
specified in the test plan.

Step 4. Visually examine the test item to the extent possible and conduct
an operational check. Document the results.

4.4.5. Procedure IV - Explosive Decompression

Step 1. With the test item in the storage or transit configuration, adjust

4-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 301

the chamber air pressure (and temperature if appropriate) at the


rate specified in the test plan to the maximum equivalent altitude
of the anticipated aircraft (cabin pressure).

Step 2. Reduce the chamber air pressure to an equivalent altitude of


12,200 m (18.8 kPa), or as otherwise specified in the test
program, in not more than 0.1 seconds. Maintain this stabilized
reduced pressure for at least 10 minutes.

Step 3. Adjust the chamber air to standard ambient conditions at the rate
specified in the test plan.

Step 4. Visually examine the test item to the extent possible and conduct
an operational check. Document the results.

4-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 301

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

4-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 301

CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

5. EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

See Method 300 Chapter 9. For Procedure IV, the test item fails only if explosive
decompression causes a hazard to the aircraft or to the personnel; the test item need
not show satisfactory post-test performance unless otherwise specified.

5-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 301

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

5-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 301

CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

6. REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

See Method 300 Chapter 10.

a. STANAG 4044, Adoption of a Standard Atmosphere, 10 April 1969,


(ICAO Standard Atmosphere).

6-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 301

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

METHOD 302
HIGH TEMPERATURE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE ............................................................................................... 1-1


1.1. PURPOSE ................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2. APPLICATION........................................................................................... 1-1
1.3. LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................ 1-1
CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE............................................................................... 2-1
2.1 USE OF MEASURED DATA ..................................................................... 2-1
2.2. SEQUENCE .............................................................................................. 2-1
2.3. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT ........................................................ 2-1
2.3.1. Physical .............................................................................................. 2-1
2.3.2. Chemical ............................................................................................ 2-2
2.3.3. Electrical............................................................................................. 2-3
2.4. CHOICE OF TEST PROCEDURE(S) ........................................................ 2-3
2.4.1. Procedure I - High Temperature Storage or Transport ....................... 2-3
2.4.2. Procedure II - High Temperature Operation ....................................... 2-4
2.4.3. Procedure III - High Temperature Tactical Standby to
Operational......................................................................................... 2-4
CHAPTER 3 TEST SEVERITIES ............................................................................ 3-1
3.1. GENERAL ................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2. TEMPERATURE SEVERITIES ................................................................. 3-1
3.2.1. Meteorological Conditions .................................................................. 3-2
3.2.2. Induced Conditions............................................................................. 3-2
3.2.3. Procedure I - High Temperature Storage or Transport ....................... 3-3
3.2.4. Procedure II - High Temperature Operation ....................................... 3-3
3.2.5. Procedure III - High Temperature Tactical Standby to
Operational......................................................................................... 3-3
3.3. TEST DURATION ..................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.1. Procedure I - High Temperature Storage or Transport ....................... 3-4
3.3.2. Procedure II - High Temperature Operation ....................................... 3-4
3.3.3. Procedure III - High Temperature Tactical Standby to
Operational......................................................................................... 3-5
3.4. HUMIDITY ................................................................................................. 3-5
CHAPTER 4 INFORMATION REQUIRED .............................................................. 4-1
4.1. INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTIONS ....... 4-1
4.2. INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR VERIFICATION ................................... 4-2
4.2.1. Pre-Test ............................................................................................. 4-2
4.2.2. During Test......................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.3. Post-Test ............................................................................................ 4-3
CHAPTER 5 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES ........................................ 5-1
5.1. PREPARATION FOR TEST ...................................................................... 5-1
5.2. TEST FACILITY ........................................................................................ 5-1
5.3. INSTALLATION CONDITIONS OF TEST ITEM ........................................ 5-1

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 302

CONTENTS - Continued

5.3.1. Test Item Orientation .......................................................................... 5-1


5.3.2. Test Item Substrate ............................................................................ 5-2
5.3.3. External Loads ................................................................................... 5-2
5.3.4. Instrumentation .................................................................................. 5-2
5.4. TOLERANCES .......................................................................................... 5-2
5.5. CONTROLS .............................................................................................. 5-2
5.5.1. Temperature....................................................................................... 5-3
5.5.2. Airflow ................................................................................................ 5-3
5.6. TEST INTERRUPTIONS ........................................................................... 5-3
5.6.1. Under-test Interruptions...................................................................... 5-3
5.6.2. Over-test Interruptions........................................................................ 5-4
5.6.3. Scheduled Interruptions ..................................................................... 5-4
5.6.4. Interruptions Due to Test Item Failure ................................................ 5-4
5.7. TEST PROCEDURES ............................................................................... 5-4
5.7.1. Pre-Test Standard Ambient Functional Test ...................................... 5-4
5.7.2. Procedure I - High Temperature Storage or Transport ....................... 5-5
5.7.3. Procedure II - High Temperature Operation ....................................... 5-5
5.7.4. Procedure III - High Temperature Tactical Standby to Operational .... 5-7
CHAPTER 6 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS ........................................... 6-1
CHAPTER 7 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS ................................. 7-1
7.1 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS .......................................................... 7.1
ANNEX A HIGH TEMPERATURE DIURNAL CYCLES ........................................... A-1

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 302

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE

NOTE: METHOD 300, GENERAL GUIDANCE AND REQUIREMENTS,


CONTAINS INFORMATION NECESSARY TO CONDUCT THE TEST
PROCEDURES OF THIS METHOD, AND SHALL BE USED IN COMBINATION
WITH THIS TEST METHOD.

1.1. PURPOSE

The purpose of the High Temperature test method is to help evaluate the effects of
high temperature conditions on materiel safety, integrity, and performance.

1.2. APPLICATION

This method is used when the requirements documents state that the materiel is likely
to be stored or operated in areas where high temperatures occur. Further information
on the prevalence of high temperatures is provided in AECTP 230, “Climatic
Conditions”. Although not written for such, this method may be used in conjunction
with the shock and vibration tests in AECTP 400, “Mechanical Environmental Tests”, to
evaluate the effect of dynamic events (e.g., transport, handling, shock) on materiel
exposed to high temperature.

1.3. LIMITATIONS

This method is generally not practical for:

a. Characterizing the response of materiel exposed to significant sources of


thermal radiation. Method 305, “Solar Radiation”, should be used to
evaluate the effects of solar radiation.

b. Evaluating aerodynamic heating. Simulating frictional heating from high


speed airflow requires unique test equipment and procedures not
covered in this method.

c. Evaluating the time-dependent chemical or mechanical degradation


(ageing) of materials from the long-term exposure to high temperatures.
Arrhenius-type accelerated ageing studies require an understanding of
the relevant degradative processes and their chemical kinetics within the
materials under test. The background knowledge and data required to
conduct such studies are beyond the scope of this method.

1-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

1-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE

2.1. USE OF MEASURED DATA

This method provides test severities suitable for use when measured data are not
available. Any derived test cycle that is based upon measured data needs to include
a sufficient safety margin to allow for variations in both environmental conditions and
materiel deployment. Overly specific test cycles may severely limit operational
flexibility as well as life extension potential, particularly if used in safety and suitability
assessments.

2.2. SEQUENCE

Use the anticipated Life-Cycle Environmental Profile (LCEP) as a general guide for test
sequencing (see Method 300, “General Guidance and Requirements”). Consideration
should be given to materials which are likely to be permanently modified in either
their physical or chemical characteristics when exposed to high temperature
environments. For materiel that may be exposed to high induced temperatures
during storage and transport in uncontrolled environments, the High Temperature
Storage or Transport test is usually performed prior to other operational tests, in order
to maximize the likelihood of disclosing synergetic effects from sequential
environmental exposure. As an example, prior high temperature exposure may
significantly impact the results obtained when low pressure testing polymeric seals.

CAUTION: When temperature conditioning, ensure the total test time at


elevated temperatures do not exceed the life expectancy of any safety critical
materials. This is particularly applicable to energetic materials.

2.3. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT

High temperature may either temporarily or permanently impair the performance of


materiel by changing its properties. The following are examples of problems that could
result from high temperature exposure. The list is not intended to be all-inclusive and
some of the examples may overlap categories:

2.3.1. Physical

a. Melting and other phase changes.

b. Dimensional changes and exudation, particularly in extruded solid


propellants.

2-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

c. Distortion, binding, failure of bearings, shafts, and packings.

d. Gaskets and seals deteriorating, developing permanent set.

e. Differential thermal expansion, particularly for non-metallic materials


against metallic (e.g., explosives, propellants in sealed containers, or
casings).

f. Development of internal pressure.

g. Changes in physical properties such as modulus and strength.

h. Lubricants becoming less viscous; joints may seize from the outward flow
of lubricant.

i. Unintentional functioning of thermally activated devices.

j. Failure of insulation protection.

k. Increased occurrence of cavitation.

l. Difficulty in handling.

2.3.2. Chemical

a. Increased rates of diffusion.

b. Increased rates of reaction, including more rapid ageing caused by


reaction with oxygen, water, or other contaminants, leading to failure,
cracking, crazing or discoloring. Increased burning rates of explosives
and propellants.

c. Failure of chemical agent protection.

d. Release of vapors leading to corrosion.

e. Out-gassing of composite materials or coatings (e.g., volatile organic


compounds (VOCs), carbon-monoxide (CO), and phthalates).

CAUTION: Vapors released may present a health hazard to personnel.


Precautions should be taken to minimize exposure to same.

2-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

2.3.3. Electrical

a. Resistors and other components changing in value.

b. Variations in circuit characteristics, electric, electronic, or optical.

c. Failure or reduced life expectancy of electronic components.

d. Altering of operating or release margins of electromechanical devices.

e. Overheating of electrical components during operation.

2.4. CHOICE OF TEST PROCEDURE(S)

The high temperature test procedures in this method should be selected based on the
materiel’s anticipated LCEP. In many cases, one or more of the test procedures will
apply. Consider all high temperature environments anticipated for the materiel during
its LCEP, both in its logistic and operational modes. As a minimum, consider the
potential high temperature environments associated with the following materiel
configurations:

a. Within a storage container, shipping package, or transit case.

b. In stacked or palletized configurations.

c. Unprotected or semi-protected (e.g., under canopy, canvas, etc.) in the


exposed environment.

d. Installed within an enclosure, machinery room, or electronic bay.

e. Installed or transported within a vehicle, aircraft, or ship.

f. In its stand-by and normal operating configurations.

g. Modified with kits for special applications.

There are three types of test procedures included in this method. While all three
procedures involve temperature conditioning, they differ in the temperature load prior to
and during any functional tests.

2.4.1. Procedure I – High Temperature Storage or Transport

This procedure is used to evaluate the effects of high temperature during storage or
transport on subsequent materiel performance. The procedure is intended to evaluate
the effect of short-term storage or transport within uncontrolled environments.

2-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

2.4.2. Procedure II – High Temperature Operation

This procedure is used to evaluate the effects of high temperature on materiel


performance during use.

2.4.3. Procedure III – High Temperature Tactical Standby to Operational

This procedure is used to evaluate the ability of materiel to soak at induced high
temperature conditions and then become operational, within a relatively short period of
time, at meteorological high temperature conditions. This procedure is not a substitute
for the solar radiation testing described in Method 305.

NOTE: The materiel’s LCEP may reveal other high temperature scenarios
that are not specifically addressed by the procedures outlined in this method.
Tailor the procedures as necessary to capture the LCEP variations, but do not
reduce the basic test requirements or severities reflected within this method.

2-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

CHAPTER 3 TEST SEVERITIES

3.1. GENERAL

Having selected this method and the relevant procedure(s), complete the tailoring
process by identifying appropriate test severities for each procedure based on the
materiel’s requirements documents and the materiel’s anticipated LCEP. The test
severities are the air temperature(s) (with low humidity, if applicable) and the exposure
duration at the high temperature(s).

3.2. TEMPERATURE SEVERITIES

1. The temperature severities experienced by materiel will vary according to the


ambient daily and seasonal climatic conditions, the immediate environment
surrounding the materiel (including any external heat sources or restrictions to heat
transfer), and the operating (heat dissipating) characteristics of the materiel. Factors
which may influence a materiel’s thermal environment include:

a. Direct or indirect exposure to solar radiation (see Method 305).

b. Type of shelter or packaging employed (in storage, transport, or


operation).

c. Exposure to, or shelter from, natural wind or other air circulation.

d. Ambient air density.

e. Neighboring equipment such as stacked materiel or equipment racks.

f. Heat-dissipating operations (e.g., mechanical friction, electrical


resistance, or chemical reaction).

g. External heat sources (through conduction, convection, or radiation) such


as heaters, boilers, engines/motors, exhaust plumes, fluid lines,
electronics, lamps, etc.

h. Controlled or semi-controlled temperature environments.

2. The temperature severities should be derived from climatic data documents


such as AECTP 230, national climatic documents, or from other environmental data
banks. Temperature severities may be characterized as either meteorological or
induced conditions. These conditions, in turn, may be either cyclic (such as diurnal
cycles) or constant.

3-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

3.2.1. Meteorological Conditions

1. These conditions represent the air temperature within the natural outdoor
environment. The meteorological temperature is the free air temperature shielded from
the direct influence of solar radiation or any other temperature modifying factors. It is
the temperature obtained from standard weather observation equipment (e.g., a
Stevenson screen) and reported by meteorological agencies.

2. Materiel experience meteorological conditions in the open outdoor environment


or within well-ventilated enclosures, while sheltered from the effects of solar radiation.
Temperature severities that should be considered are provided as "Meteorological
Conditions" for three climatic categories (A1, A2 and A3) in Table A-1 of Annex A.
These data were extracted from AECTP 230.

3.2.2. Induced Conditions

1. All environments which differ from the prevailing meteorological conditions are
considered to be induced conditions. Naturally occurring induced conditions arise
when the heating effects of solar radiation cause the air temperature within less-than-
fully ventilated shelters or enclosures to rise above the prevailing outdoor
meteorological air temperature. Other induced conditions may arise due to heat-
generating sources from neighboring equipment or from within the materiel. Materiel
may experience induced conditions during storage, transport, or operation:

a. Within unventilated enclosures, shipping containers, storage bins, tents,


shelters, or under tarpaulin.

b. Inside vehicles, ships, or aircraft.

c. Near heat-generating sources (engines, radiators, lights, electronics).

2. Induced conditions are difficult to characterize because of the numerous


variables involved (volume of the enclosure, degree of solar intensity, enclosure
surface reflectivity, degree of insulation, heat sources, etc.). These conditions are best
determined through actual measurements. For naturally occurring induced conditions,
caused by solar radiation incident on unventilated enclosures, examples of
temperature severities that may be considered are provided as “Induced Conditions”
for three climatic categories (A1, A2 and A3) in Table A-2 of Annex A. These data
were extracted from AECTP 230.

NOTE: Temperatures exceeding those given in AECTP 230 have been


measured under certain extreme induced conditions. Unventilated
compartments with transparent panels (e.g., cockpits, vehicle cabs, etc.) under
solar radiation may experience induced air temperatures significantly higher than
71 °C.

3-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

3.2.3. Procedure I – High Temperature Storage or Transport

Select either cyclic or constant temperature conditions which represent the most
severe storage or transport conditions within the materiel’s anticipated LCEP. Storage
and transport conditions typically involve induced thermal environments, as such the
guidance on Induced Conditions (paragraph 3.2.2.) should be employed as
appropriate. Unless otherwise justified by the materiel’s requirements documents, the
cyclic (diurnal) temperature profiles in Table A-2 of Annex A should be used, with the
most severe climatic category selected in accordance with the materiel’s anticipated
LCEP.

3.2.4. Procedure II – High Temperature Operation

Select either cyclic or constant temperature conditions which represent the most
severe operating conditions within the materiel’s anticipated LCEP. Operating
conditions typically involve meteorological environments; however, induced thermal
environments are possible for certain materiel installations. The guidance on
Meteorological Conditions (paragraph 3.2.1.) or Induced Conditions (paragraph 3.2.2.)
should be employed as appropriate. Unless otherwise justified by the materiel’s
requirements documents, temperature profiles in Table A-1 or A-2 of Annex A should
be used, with the most severe climatic category selected in accordance with the
materiel’s anticipated LCEP.

3.2.5. Procedure III – High Temperature Tactical Standby to Operational

Select the constant temperature conditions which represent the most severe transition
between stand-by (storage or transport) and the materiel’s operating environment
within the materiel’s anticipated LCEP. Stand-by conditions typically involve induced
thermal environments, while the operating conditions typically involve meteorological
environments. The guidance on both Meteorological Conditions (paragraph 3.2.1.) and
Induced Conditions (paragraph 3.2.2.) should be employed as appropriate.

3.3. TEST DURATION

Determine the duration of exposure that the materiel will experience for each of the
exposure conditions identified in the materiel’s anticipated LCEP. The duration of
exposure to high temperature(s) is as important as the temperature itself.

CAUTION: When temperature conditioning, ensure the total test time at


elevated temperatures do not exceed the life expectancy of any safety critical
materials. This is particularly applicable to energetic materials.

3-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

3.3.1. Procedure I – High Temperature Storage or Transport

During storage or transport testing, it is important to measure the temperature of any


critical sub-systems or components in addition to the parts of the test item with the
longest thermal lag. The total test duration may ultimately depend on the time required
for the test item to reach test temperature stabilization (see Method 300). The test
duration will depend on the choice of the temperature profile chosen:

a. Cyclic (Diurnal) Temperature Exposure. If the 24-hour temperature


cycles from Table A-2 in Annex A are selected, the minimum number of
cycles for the storage test is seven. For other cycles, justification shall
be obtained from the requirements documents, subject to an anticipated
minimum of seven 24-hour cycles.

b. Constant Temperature Exposure. The minimum duration is the time


required for the test item to reach test temperature stabilization, plus two
hours. To provide confidence that an extended exposure can be
survived, longer test exposure periods will be needed. The duration and
temperature chosen will depend on the purpose of the test and should
ensure that all likely failure modes will be evaluated. This typically
requires an understanding of the relevant thermo-chemical degradation
processes within the materials under test, which are often difficult to
ascertain before test. Moreover, constant temperature exposure may
result in failure modes not typically observed during service.

NOTE: For the High Temperature Storage or Transport Test, constant


temperature exposure is not a substitute for situations in which diurnal cycling
is typical in the materiel’s LCEP.

3.3.2. Procedure II – High Temperature Operation

During operational testing, it is important to measure the temperature of any critical


sub-systems or components, any heat dissipating components, and the parts of the
test item with the longest thermal lag. The total test duration may ultimately depend on
the time required for the test item to reach test temperature stabilization (see Method
300), as well as the additional time required to perform any functional tests and to re-
establish steady-state thermal conditions during operation (for heat dissipating
materiel). The test duration will depend on the choice of temperature profile chosen:

a. Cyclic (Diurnal) Temperature Exposure. The minimum number of cycles


is predicated on achieving repeated test item thermal response within
2 °C between successive cycles. Three cycles are normally sufficient for
the test item to reach its maximum response temperature. A maximum
of seven cycles is suggested when repeatable temperature response is

3-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

difficult to obtain. Once repeated thermal response is obtained,


functional tests should be conducted at the test item’s peak response
temperature or at the worse-case operating environment for the materiel
(if known). Additional thermal cycles may be required to complete all
functional tests.

b. Constant Temperature Exposure. The minimum duration is the time


required for the test item to reach temperature stabilization followed by
additional time required to complete any functional tests. The test item
shall be conditioned for a minimum of two hours after it has reached
temperature stabilization, before conducting any functional tests. For
heat dissipating materiel, functional tests should be continued until
steady-state thermal conditions in the test item are re-established and
the test item temperature does not vary by more than 2 °C per hour.

3.3.3. Procedure III – High Temperature Tactical Standby to Operational

During tactical standby to operational testing, it is important to measure the


temperature of any critical sub-systems or components, any heat dissipating
components, and the parts of the test item with the longest thermal lag. The total test
duration may ultimately depend on the time required for the test item to reach test
temperature stabilization at the standby test temperature, as well as the additional time
required to transition to the operational test temperature followed by any functional
tests. The test item shall be held at the standby temperature for a minimum of two
hours after it has reached temperature stabilization, before transitioning to the
operational test temperature. The transition from standby to operational test
temperatures shall be conducted as quickly as possible, but at a rate no less than 2 °C
per minute. Unless otherwise specified in the test plan, functional tests shall be
conducted as soon as the test chamber has reached the operational test temperature.

3.4. HUMIDITY

In certain cases, low relative humidity (less than 10 %) can have a significant effect on
the physical or electrostatic properties of certain types of materials (e.g., electronic
equipment, polymeric composites, and rubber seals). In such instances, controlling the
relative humidity to the values listed in Tables A-1 or A-2 of Annex A should be
conducted for the appropriate climatic category. If the materiel is not sensitive to dry
environments, relative humidity control during the high temperature tests is not
necessary.

3-5 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3-6 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

CHAPTER 4 INFORMATION REQUIRED

4.1. INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTIONS

1. In addition to the information found within Method 300, the following information
is required to conduct the test(s) described in this method and shall be recorded in the
test instructions:

a. The test procedure(s) selected from this method.

b. The test temperature severities (cyclic profiles or steady-state values) for


each test procedure selected.

c. The test duration (time or number of cycles) at high temperature for each
test procedure selected.

d. A description of the test item(s) configuration (storage, transport,


operation and/or standby) including any packaging, stacking, or racking
requirements applicable to each test procedure selected.

e. A list of any heat dissipating components, critical components, and


functional parameters to be measured and recorded during testing.

f. The location(s) on the test item(s) where temperature stabilization will


be evaluated.

g. Any known safety issues related to high temperature (e.g., volatiles,


energetic materials).

2. The following information may be required to conduct the test(s) and shall be
recorded in the test instructions when applicable:

a. Relative humidity control and monitoring requirements.

b. Functional test instructions, including time period(s) of operation and test


item performance requirements for each test procedure selected.

c. Details of any external cooling provisions such as fans or heat sinks, as


applicable to the materiel’s in-service installation.

d. Details of any restrictions to heat transfer, such as thermal isolation


mounts or restrictions to airflow (convection), as applicable to the
materiel’s in-service installation.

4-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

e. Any additional parameters to be measured and recorded.

f. Necessary variations in the basic test procedures to accommodate


environments identified in the materiel’s LCEP.

4.2. INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR VERIFICATION

In addition to the information found within Method 300, the following information is
required to verify the completion of the test(s) described in this method and shall be
recorded in the test report:

4.2.1. Pre-Test

a. General. Information listed in Method 300.

b. Specific to this method.

(1) Description, with photographs, of the test item’s configuration and


orientation within the test chamber for each test procedure.

(2) List of all thermocouple placement locations, with photographs.

(3) Identification of the components/assemblies/structures to be used


for measuring the thermal response and evaluating the
temperature stabilization of the test item(s).

(4) If required, a record of the test item temperature-versus-time


during any pre-test functional tests.

(5) If required, a record of the ambient temperature and humidity


during any pre-test functional test.

(6) Results of any pre-test functional tests.

4.2.2. During Test

a. General. Information listed in Method 300.

b. Specific to this method.

(1) Record of the test chamber temperature-versus-time (including


relative humidity, if controlled) for the entire test duration including
pre-test chamber heating and post-test chamber cooling periods.

(2) Record of the test item temperature-versus-time for the entire test
duration including all pre-test and post-test conditioning periods.

4-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

(3) Documentation of where and when thermal stabilization of the test


item was achieved for the purpose of evaluating the duration of
high temperature exposure.

(4) Any changes to the installation, configuration, or orientation of the


test item within the test chamber during testing.

(5) Documentation of test item operating and non-operating periods


as well as any functional tests completed.

(6) Results of any functional tests.

(7) For Procedure III, a record of the time required for the test item to
become operational following transition to the operational high
temperature.

(8) List of any test interruptions or deviations from the original test
plan.

4.2.3. Post-Test

a. General. Information listed in Method 300.

b. Specific to this method.

(1) Results of any visual inspections and any functional tests


performed.

(2) If required, a record of the test item temperature-versus-time


during any post-test functional tests.

(3) If required, a record of the ambient temperature and humidity


during any post-test functional tests.

4-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

4-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

CHAPTER 5 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

5.1. PREPARATION FOR TEST

In addition to the instructions found within Method 300, determine the information
specified in paragraph 4.1 and ensure that plans are in place to gather the
information required by paragraph 4.2 before starting any test procedure.

5.2. TEST FACILITY

1. The test facility shall have an environmental conditioning chamber, along with
auxiliary equipment, capable of maintaining and monitoring the required conditions of
high temperature (and low humidity, where required) throughout an envelope of air
surrounding the test item(s). The chamber shall have sufficient heating and cooling
capacity to maintain the test temperature(s) during materiel operation (with
consideration given to heat dissipating materiel) as well as when test personnel are
operating within the chamber (as applicable).

2. For test materiel with engines (e.g., vehicles) that are required to operate during
testing, the test facility shall be capable of monitoring and exhausting noxious fumes,
such as carbon-monoxide (CO) and nitrogen oxides (NOx). Similar safety equipment
should be used if testing materials that off-gas volatile organic compounds (VOCs) at
high temperatures.

5.3. INSTALLATION CONDITIONS OF TEST ITEM

See Method 300 and consider the following:

5.3.1. Test Item Orientation

1. The orientation of the test item in the test chamber should, as much as possible,
simulate the actual configuration of the materiel in its storage, transport, or operational
use, as applicable to each test procedure. For heat dissipating materiel, consideration
to the impact of the test item’s orientation on the convective (forced or natural) flow
patterns shall be made to ensure that heat transfer is not being artificially enhanced or
restricted by the test set-up. This is particularly important for materiel with exhaust
plumes, fans, and heat exchangers as well as for stacked materiel.

2. Where heat exchange by radiation is significant, the orientation of the test item
relative to other radiative bodies is critical, along with their surface radiative properties.
The orientation (view factors) may have to be adjusted to simulate actual deployment
conditions (see Method 305 for further guidance on testing where radiative heat
exchange is predominant).

5-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

5.3.2. Test Item Substrate

The test item should be mounted either on raised supports or on a substrate of


specified properties, with a thermal diffusivity representative of actual deployment.
Caution should be given to not artificially create either a heat-sink or insulator that is
not representative of actual deployment.

5.3.3. External Loads

If the materiel is subjected to external forces (such as stacking configurations, or


suspended/cantilever installations) in service, replication or simulation of such loading
during the test may be important. High temperature may affect a materiel’s ability to
withstand loading, particularly for polymeric materials where high temperature may
accelerate creep and stress relief phenomena.

5.3.4. Instrumentation

1. Temperature measuring sensors should be mounted on the test item at


sufficient locations to allow evaluation of the test item’s thermal response to the test
environment. The parts of the test item with the slowest thermal response (longest
thermal lag) should be instrumented in order to establish temperature stabilization
during testing. Temperature stabilization is generally important to ensure reproducible
test conditions. Stabilizing test item elements critical for operational requirements (i.e.,
components, sub-assemblies, etc.) is normally more important than stabilizing
temperatures of structural members, unless they directly influence the materiel’s
operational performance. In some instances, it may not be possible or practical to
directly measure the part(s) of the test item with the longest thermal lag. In such
instances, additional time at the test temperature may be required to ensure complete
stabilization of the test item. Alternatively, a thermal survey of the test item could be
completed before the start of testing to identify suitable temperature monitoring
locations.

2. Heat dissipating components should be measured to evaluate the temperature


rise above ambient during operation. In all instances, sensors and their mounting
configuration should be selected to minimize attenuation of the test item’s response to
the test environment.

5.4. TOLERANCES

See Method 300.

5.5. CONTROLS

In addition to the instructions found within Method 300, consider the following
instructions specific to this method:

5-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

5.5.1. Temperature

Maintain the chamber air temperature as specified in the test plan and within the
specified test tolerances. Keep the air temperature uniform in the immediate vicinity of
the item. To adequately measure the temperature of the air surrounding the test item,
it is recommended to place verification sensors at representative points around the test
item and as close to the test item as possible, while avoiding boundary layer
influences. Unless otherwise specified, use a rate of temperature change no greater
than 3 °C per minute to prevent thermal shock.

5.5.2. Airflow

Ensure sufficient airflow around the test item to maintain a uniform air temperature in
the immediate vicinity of the test item. For heat dissipating materiel that will be
sheltered from sources of external airflow (either enclosed items or items likely to
encounter negligible wind) it is recommended that the test item be likewise sheltered
from airflow during testing in order to accurately evaluate the test item’s peak response
temperature.

5.6. TEST INTERRUPTIONS

Following any test interruption scenario, consider the following instructions specific to
this method in addition to the instructions found within Method 300. All relevant
stakeholder(s) should be consulted following a test interruption and prior to continuing
testing.

5.6.1. Under-test Interruptions

For an unscheduled test-interruption that causes the test conditions to fall out of
allowable tolerances toward standard ambient conditions (i.e., environmental stress
less severe than specified) the test may be resumed as follows:

a. For Cyclic (Diurnal) Temperature Exposure. Re-stabilize the test item


at the required test conditions and continue the test from the end of the
last successfully completed cycle. Extend the test as necessary to
achieve the required number of high temperature cycles specified in the
test plan.

b. For Constant Temperature Exposure. Re-stabilize the test item at the


required test conditions and continue the test from the point when test
conditions fell out of tolerance. Extend the test as necessary to achieve
the required duration at high temperature specified in the test plan.

5-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

5.6.2. Over-test Interruptions

If an over-test conditions occurs (i.e., environmental stress more severe than


specified), follow the instructions provided in Method 300. If, after inspection and
analysis by a failure review team, it is deemed acceptable to continue the high
temperature evaluation of the original test item, follow the test re-starting instructions
in paragraph 5.6.1, as applicable to either Cyclic or Constant Temperature Exposure.

CAUTION: When temperature conditioning, ensure the total test time at


elevated temperatures do not exceed the life expectancy of any safety critical
materials. This is particularly applicable to energetic materials.

5.6.3. Scheduled Interruptions

See Method 300.

5.6.4. Interruptions Due to Test Item Failure

See Method 300.

5.7. TEST PROCEDURES

5.7.1. Pre-test Standard Ambient Functional Test

Conduct a pre-test standard ambient functional test to obtain baseline performance


data. Unless otherwise directed by the test plan, the pre-test standard ambient
functional test shall be conducted before the start of each test procedure as follows:

Step 1. Conduct a visual examination of the test item with special


attention to stress areas, such as corners of molded cases, and
document the results.

Step 2. Prepare the test item in its operating configuration. Install


temperature sensors in, on, and around the test item to evaluate
the test item’s temperature response.

Step 3. Unless otherwise specified in the test plan, conduct a functional


test at standard ambient conditions and record the results. For
test items not requiring a functional test, proceed to Step 1 of the
selected test procedure

Step 4. If the test item operates satisfactorily, proceed to Step 1 of the


selected test procedure. If not, resolve the problems and restart
at Step 1 of the pre-test standard ambient functional test.

5-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

5.7.2. Procedure I - High Temperature Storage or Transport

Step 1. Place the test item in its storage or transport configuration, as


applicable, and install it in the test chamber (see guidance in
paragraph 5.3). Install any additional sensors as required by the
test plan. Document the set up and include photographs (see
instructions in Chapter 4).

Step 2. Adjust the chamber air temperature (and humidity, if applicable) to


the required initial conditions of the high temperature storage or
transport profile specified in the test plan (see Chapter 3 for
guidance on test severities). The rate of temperature change
shall be no greater than 3 °C per minute. Maintain the initial
profile conditions until temperature stabilization of the test item is
achieved.

Step 3. Expose the test item to the high temperature (and low humidity, if
applicable) storage or transport profile specified in the test plan.
Continue the cyclic or constant temperature exposure for the
duration specified in the test plan (see Chapter 3 for guidance on
test severities).

Step 4. Unless otherwise specified in the test plan, at the completion of


Step 3, adjust the chamber air temperature to standard ambient
conditions at a rate not to exceed 3 °C per minute and maintain
the conditions until temperature stabilization of the test item.

Step 5. Visually examine the test item (and packaging if applicable) to the
greatest extent practical to identify any changes from pre-test
conditions. Document the condition of the test item and include
photographs (see instructions in Chapter 4).

Step 6. Unless otherwise specified in the test plan, place the test item in
an operational configuration and conduct a functional test of the
test item to identify any changes from pre-test conditions.
Document the results (see instructions in Chapter 4).

5.7.3. Procedure II - High Temperature Operation

CAUTION: If the test environment is intended to be occupied during exposure


to high temperature, it is recommended that sensors are installed to detect
VOCs, CO, and phthalates from potential out-gassing of materiel.

5-5 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

Step 1. Place the test item in its operational configuration and install it in
the test chamber (see guidance in paragraph 5.3). Unless
otherwise specified in the test plan, the test item should be
physically in an operational configuration, but not operating (i.e.,
powered off). Install any additional sensors to determine test item
stabilization, as well as to evaluate any temperature changes
during operation. Ensure all heat dissipating components are
monitored. Install any additional sensors as required by the test
plan. Document the set up and include photographs (see
instructions in Chapter 4).

Step 2. Adjust the chamber air temperature (and humidity, if applicable) to


the required initial conditions of the high temperature operation
profile specified in the test plan (see Chapter 3 for guidance on
test severities). The rate of temperature change shall be no
greater than 3 °C per minute. Maintain the initial profile
conditions until temperature stabilization of the test item is
achieved.

Step 3. If performing the cyclic temperature exposure, go to Step 4. For


constant temperature exposure, go to Step 5.

Step 4. Cyclic temperature exposure:

a. Expose the test item to the high temperature (and low


humidity, if applicable) operation profile. Continue the
cyclic temperature exposure until repeatability in the test
item’s thermal response is achieved or for the duration
specified in the test plan (see Chapter 3 for guidance on
test severities). Document the maximum test item
response temperature and the time when the maximum
was achieved.

b. Conduct as thorough a visual examination of the test item


as possible considering chamber access limitations, and
document the results for comparison with pre-test data.

c. Unless otherwise specified in the test plan, conduct a


functional test of the test item at the test item’s peak
response temperature or at the worst-case operating
environment for the test item (if known).

d. Repeat temperature cycles and functional tests until


completed or as directed by the test plan. Document the
results for comparison with pre-test data.

5-6 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

e. Proceed directly to Step 6.

Step 5. Constant temperature exposure:

a. Maintain the test item at the operational test temperature


for a minimum of two hours after temperature stabilization
of the test item, or as directed by the test plan.

b. Conduct as thorough a visual examination of the test item


as possible considering chamber access limitations, and
document the results for comparison with pretest data.

c. Unless otherwise specified in the test plan, conduct a


functional test of the test item as specified in the test plan.
For heat dissipating materiel, operate the test item until the
temperature of critical components re-stabilize or as
directed by the test plan. Document the results for
comparison with pre-test data.

Step 6. Adjust the chamber air temperature to standard ambient


conditions at a rate not to exceed 3 °C per minute and maintain
until temperature stabilization of the test item.

Step 7. Visually examine the test item to the greatest extent practical to
identify any changes from pre-test conditions. Document the
condition of the test item and include photographs (see
instructions in Chapter 4).

Step 8. Unless otherwise specified in the test plan, conduct a functional


test of the test item to identify any changes from pre-test
conditions. Document the results (see instructions in Chapter 4).

5.7.4 Procedure III - High Temperature Tactical Standby to Operational

Step 1. Place the test item in its tactical standby, storage, or transport
configuration, as applicable, and install it in the test chamber (see
guidance in paragraph 5.3). Install any additional temperature
sensors to determine test item stabilization as well as to evaluate
any temperature changes during operation. Ensure all heat
dissipating components are monitored. Install any additional
sensors as required by the test plan. Document set up, including
photographs (see instructions in Chapter 4).

Step 2. Adjust the chamber air temperature to the maximum storage or


transport temperature identified in the test plan. The rate of
temperature change shall be no greater than 3 °C per minute.

5-7 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

Maintain the conditions until temperature stabilization of the test


item is achieved plus a minimum of two additional hours.

Step 3. Conduct as thorough a visual examination of the test item as


possible considering chamber access limitations, and document
the results for comparison with pretest data.

Step 4. Adjust the chamber air temperature to the maximum operating


temperature identified in the test plan as quickly as possible (at a
rate no less than 2 °C per minute).

Step 5. Unless otherwise specified in the test plan, as soon as the


chamber air temperature reaches the high operating temperature,
conduct a functional test of the test item. Continue the functional
test until completed or as directed by the test plan. Document the
results for comparison with pre-test data. For multiple exposure
cycles, repeat Steps 2 through 5 as required by the test plan.

Step 6. Adjust the chamber air temperature to standard ambient


conditions at a rate not to exceed 3 °C per minute and maintain
until temperature stabilization of the test item.

Step 7. Visually examine the test item to the greatest extent practical to
identify any changes from pre-test conditions. Document the
condition of the test item, including photographs (see instructions
in Chapter 4).

Step 8. Unless specified otherwise in the test plan, conduct a functional


test of the test item to identify any changes from pre-test
conditions. Document results (see instructions in Chapter 4).

5-8 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

CHAPTER 6 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

See Method 300 Chapter 9.

6-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

CHAPTER 7 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

7.1. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

a. STANAG 4370, AECTP-300, Method 300, General Guidance and


Requirements.

b. STANAG 4370, AECTP 230, Climatic Conditions.

c. STANAG 4370, AECTP-300, Method 305, Solar Radiation.

d. Army Regulation (AR) 70-38, Research, Development, Test and


Evaluation of Materiel for Extreme Climatic Conditions, US Army,
15 Sep 1979.

7-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 302

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

7-2 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 302

ANNEX A HIGH TEMPERATURE DIURNAL CYCLES

Table A-1: Meteorological High Temperature Diurnal Cycles (from AECTP 230)

Meteorological Air Conditions

Time A1 A2 A3
of Relative Relative Relative
Day Air Air Air
Temperature Humidity Temperature Humidity Temperature Humidity
°C (RH) °C (RH) °C (RH)
% % %
01:00 35 6 33 36 30 69
02:00 34 7 32 38 29 72
03:00 34 7 32 43 29 74
04:00 33 8 31 44 28 76
05:00 33 8 30 44 28 78
06:00 32 8 30 44 28 78
07:00 33 8 31 41 29 74
08:00 35 6 34 34 30 67
09:00 38 6 37 29 31 59
10:00 41 5 39 24 34 51
11:00 43 4 41 21 36 47
12:00 44 4 42 18 37 45
13:00 47 3 43 16 38 44
14:00 48 3 44 15 38 43
15:00 48 3 44 14 39 43
16:00 49 3 44 14 39 44
17:00 48 3 43 14 38 46
18:00 48 3 42 15 37 48
19:00 46 3 40 17 35 50
20:00 42 4 38 20 34 53
21:00 41 5 36 22 34 56
22:00 39 6 35 25 32 59
23:00 38 6 34 28 32 63
24:00 37 6 33 33 31 66

A-1 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 302

Table A-2: Induced High Temperature Diurnal Cycles (from AECTP 230)

Induced Air Conditions

Time A1 A2 A3
of Relative
Air Relative Air Air Relative
Day Humidity1
Temperature Humidity1 Temperature Temperature Humidity
°C (RH) °C (RH) °C (RH)
% % %
01:00 35 6 33 36 31
02:00 34 7 32 38 29 See
03:00 34 7 32 41 29 Note 2
04:00 33 8 31 44 28
05:00 33 8 30 44 28
06:00 33 8 31 43 29
07:00 36 8 34 47 31
08:00 40 6 38 30 35
09:00 44 6 42 23 40
10:00 51 5 45 17 44
11:00 56 4 51 14 50
12:00 63 4 57 8 54
13:00 69 3 61 6 56
14:00 70 3 63 6 58
15:00 71 3 63 5 58
16:00 70 3 62 6 56
17:00 67 3 60 6 53
18:00 63 3 57 6 50
19:00 55 3 50 10 46
20:00 48 4 44 14 41
21:00 41 5 38 19 37
22:00 39 6 35 25 34
23:00 37 6 34 28 33
24:00 35 6 33 33 32

1 Relative humidities for the A1 and A2 induced conditions were obtained


from AR 70-38, 15 September 1979.
2 Relative humidities for the A3 induced condition vary too widely between different
situations to be represented by a single set of values.

A-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 303

METHOD 303
LOW TEMPERATURE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE ........................................................................................... 1-1


1.1. PURPOSE ................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2. APPLICATION........................................................................................... 1-1
1.3. LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................ 1-1
1.4. DEFINITION .............................................................................................. 1-2
CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE .......................................................................... 2-1
2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT ........................................................ 2-1
2.1.1. Physical .............................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2. Chemical ............................................................................................ 2-2
2.1.3. Electrical............................................................................................. 2-2
2.2. CHOICE OF TEST PROCEDURE ............................................................ 2-2
2.2.1. Procedure I – Storage Test ................................................................ 2-2
2.2.2. Procedure II – Operational Test ......................................................... 2-2
2.2.3. Procedure III – Manipulation Test ...................................................... 2-3
2.3. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS........................................................... 2-3
2.3.1. Storage Test....................................................................................... 2-3
2.3.2. Operational Test ................................................................................. 2-4
2.3.3. Manipulation Test ............................................................................... 2-4
CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST
INSTRUCTION ............................................................................... 3-1
CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES .................................... 4-1
4.1. TEST FACILITY ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.2. CONTROLS .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.3. TEST INTERRUPTION ............................................................................. 4-1
4.4. PROCEDURES ......................................................................................... 4-1
4.4.1. Preparation for Test............................................................................ 4-1
4.4.2. Procedure I – Storage Test ................................................................ 4-2
4.4.3. Procedure II – Operational Test ......................................................... 4-2
4.4.4. Procedure III – Manipulation Test ...................................................... 4-4
CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS ....................................... 5-1
CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................. 6-1

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 303

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 303

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE

NOTE: METHOD 300, GENERAL GUIDANCE AND REQUIREMENTS,


CONTAINS INFORMATION NECESSARY TO CONDUCT THE TEST
PROCEDURES OF THIS METHOD, AND SHALL BE USED IN
COMBINATION WITH THIS TEST METHOD.

1. SCOPE

1.1. PURPOSE

The main objectives of low temperature tests are to determine if:

a. The safety of the materiel is affected as a result of exposure to low


temperature, or

b. The materiel can be stored, manipulated and operated within the


specified requirements during and after exposure to low temperature
that it is expected to encounter during its service life, or

c. The materiel experiences physical damage during or after its exposure


to low temperature.

1.2. APPLICATION

a. This Method is used when the requirements documents state that the
materiel is likely to be deployed in regions in which the climatic
conditions will induce low temperatures (below standard ambient) within
the materiel. If the effects of low temperature on the materiel are being
determined during other tests for the required extremes and durations
(including manipulation), it is not necessary to perform this test.

b. Although not written for such, this Method may be used in conjunction
with shock and vibration tests (AECTP 400) to evaluate the effects of
dynamic events (e.g., shipping, handling, and shock) on cold, embrittled
materiel.

1.3. LIMITATIONS

a. This Method is not intended to be used to simulate temperature-altitude


effects that will be experienced by aircraft-mounted equipment.

1-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 303

b. This Method does not address temperature cycling through 0 °C.

c. This Method does not address the effects of snow, ice or wind as
encountered during natural low temperature exposure.

d. This Method does not intentionally address the effects of frost, because
this would require a controlled source of moisture.

1.4. DEFINITION

For the purpose of this document, manipulation is defined as the actions necessary
to convert the materiel from a storage to an operational configuration, operate it, and
return it to its storage configuration.

1-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 303

CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE

2. TEST GUIDANCE

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8.

2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Exposure to constant or cyclic (diurnal) low temperatures may either temporarily or


permanently impair the operation of materiel by changing the physical properties or
dimensions of its construction materials. Examples of problems that could occur as a
result of exposure to cold are as follows, but the list is not intended to be all-inclusive
and some of the examples may overlap the categories.

2.1.1. Physical

a. Phase changes (solid/solid, solid/liquid/gas).

b. Dimensional changes.

c. Distortion, binding, failure of bearings, shafts and packings.

d. Failure of seals.

e. Differential thermal contraction, particularly non-metallic against


metallic, e.g., explosives, propellants in cases.

f. Changes in physical properties such as modulus, strength and


elongation (leading particularly to embrittlement).

g. Lubricant failure due to viscosity change.

h. Static fatigue of restrained glass.

i. Freezing (expansion) of water, and condensation of water vapor.

j. Failure of bonding materials.

k. Stiffening of shock and vibration mounts.

l. Difficulty of manipulation.

2-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 303

2.1.2. Chemical

Reduced rates of reaction:

a. Burning rates of explosives and propellants reduced.

b. Igniters failing to operate.

2.1.3. Electrical

a. Resistors and other components changing in value and life expectancy.

b. Variations in circuit characteristics.

c. Altering of operating/release margins of electrochemical devices.

d. Batteries generating insufficient power.

e. Breakdown due to shrinkage of insulation or potting.

f. Changes in performance of transformers.

g. Excessive static electricity.

h. Difficulty in obtaining or maintaining good earthing (grounding).

2.2. CHOICE OF TEST PROCEDURE

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8. There are three test procedures in this method:
storage, operating and manipulating. All three tests can be conducted if appropriate.

2.2.1. Procedure I - Storage Test

This procedure is used to assess the possible effect of storage of the materiel at low
temperatures upon its performance and safety in use. The test can be carried out in
two different ways:

a. Exposure to an essentially constant low temperature.

b. Exposure to cyclic low temperature (change of at least 9 °C as in


category C2 of AECTP 200, Leaflet 2311) below freezing.

2.2.2. Procedure II - Operational Test

This procedure is used to assess the possible effect of exposure to low temperature
upon the operational performance of the materiel and upon safety in use. This test

2-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 303

will, in most cases, be preceded by a storage test, and may also be preceded by or
combined with a manipulation test. The test can be carried out in two different ways
as in paragraph 2.2.1.

2.2.3. Procedure III - Manipulation Test

For this test, the test item is exposed to the same temperatures as for the constant
temperature operating test. This procedure is used to:

a. Test the suitability of the materiel for handling in operation, assembly,


disassembly, and installation by personnel equipped to withstand cold,
and

b. To determine if the materiel can be assembled and disassembled at low


temperatures safely and without damage.

2.3. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS

See Method 300 Chapter 1, 4 and 8.

The most significant parameters used in this test method are temperature and
exposure time. It is also important in this test procedure to specify the operational
configuration of the test item, as well as whether or not the test item is heat
dissipating during operation. Although the natural low temperature environment is
normally cyclic, in some instances it is acceptable to use a constant low temperature
test. In those instances where design assessment suggests that exposure to varying
low temperatures may be important, the appropriate cold cycles from AECTP 200,
Category 230 are recommended. Typical low temperature data extracted from
AECTP 200, Category 230 (for consideration if measured data are not available) are
provided in Table 1. These data should not be used without reference to source
documents (AECTP 200, Category 230 or equivalent national documents) that
provide guidance on their significance. Consideration should be given to the need or
otherwise for operation of materiel at very low temperatures, i.e., below -46 °C.

CAUTION: When temperature conditioning, ensure the total test time at the
most severe temperature does not exceed the life expectancy of any material.
See Method 300 Chapter 4.

2.3.1. Storage Test

Derive the time of materiel exposure to low temperatures from the deployment
requirements, and consider it in conjunction with the materiel characteristics. There
is evidence that prolonged storage of restrained glass and organic plastics may result
in deterioration. Static fatigue of restrained glass, for example, has been

2-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 303

documented1,2 after long periods of low temperature exposure. Data from these
sources suggest that the breaking stress for glass will be reduced by approximately
50% in 72 hours. For such material, a minimum storage test of 72 hours following
stabilization of the test item is recommended. For other materials, there is no
evidence to support deterioration following temperature stabilization. Prolonged
storage testing following stabilization may not be necessary; a 4-hour soak following
stabilization of the test item should be sufficient. If it is considered that
thermo-mechanical stressing may present a significant problem, cyclic temperature
testing may be appropriate. The number of cycles should be sufficient to reproduce
the low temperature response of the previous cycle within 2 °C. Use of a greater
number of cycles may give information on low temperature aging characteristics of
the materiel or, for example, on the effects of leakage around seals between
dissimilar materials.

2.3.2. Operational Test

As a general rule, the operational test will take place after the storage, and during or
after the manipulation test, but this may vary because of life cycle considerations.
Although cyclic temperatures are normal, the application of cyclic testing at low
temperature levels (except near the freezing point of water) rarely provides any
known advantage over steady state testing. However, if the test item is exposed to
temperature cycles, a minimum of three cycles will normally be required to achieve
maximum response of the test item.

2.3.3. Manipulation Test

The conditions for this test will depend upon how the materiel is used and the test
item configuration. The important issue is that the test item is exercised at the low
operating temperature.

1
Glass Engineering Handbook, 2nd Edition, E.B. Shand, 1958, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New -
York.
2 The Properties of Glass, 2nd Edition, G.W. Morey, 1954, Reinhold Publ.Corp.

2-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 303

CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

3. INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

See Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6.

3-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 303

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 303

CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

4. TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

See Method 300 Chapters 3, 4, and 5 for test facility, test conditions and test control
information.

4.1. TEST FACILITY

See Method 300 Chapter 5.

4.2. CONTROLS

See Method 300 Chapters 3 and 4.

4.3. TEST INTERRUPTION

See Method 300 Chapter 7.

4.4. PROCEDURES

The following test procedures, alone or in combination, (see Figure 1) may be used to
determine the performance of the materiel in a cold environment. Conduct the
operational checks after both the storage and manipulation tests for comparison with
pretest data. For situations in which cyclic low temperatures are desired, replace the
steady state steps with the cyclic temperature exposure related to the real life
exposure of the materiel at the low anticipated temperature for either storage or
operation (whichever is appropriate).

NOTE: Unless otherwise specified or required for operation or manipulation,


opening of the chamber door at any point in these test procedures is not
recommended because of possible frost formation and associated problems.

4.4.1. Preparation for Test

Before starting any of the test procedures, determine the information specified in
Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6, and perform the test preparation procedure specified
in Method 300 Chapter 2. Ensure that any fluids included as part of the test item are
those appropriate for the temperature range of the test.

4-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 303

4.4.2. Procedure I - Storage Test

Step 1. Place the test item in its storage configuration and install it in the
test chamber. If appropriate, the configuration may include
loading (actual or simulated) to simulate normal stacking
configurations.

Step 2. Adjust the chamber air temperature to the required initial


temperature for constant or cyclic temperature storage
conditions.

Step 3a. For constant temperature: following temperature stabilization of


the test item, maintain the storage temperature for a period as
specified in the test plan.

Step 3b. For cyclic temperature: perform the required number of


temperature cycles.

Step 4. If required, visually examine the test item to the extent practical,
while at the lowest temperature from step 3.

Step 5. If low temperature operation with no manipulation (no


reconfiguration for operation) is required, proceed to paragraph
4.4.3; if reconfiguration is necessary for low temperature
operation, proceed to paragraph 4.4.4; otherwise, proceed to
step 6 below.

Step 6. Stabilize the test item at standard ambient conditions.

Step 7. Visually examine the test item to the extent practical.

Step 8. If appropriate, conduct an operational check of the test item and


document the results.

4.4.3. Procedure II - Operational Test

4.4.3.1. Procedure IIa - Constant Temperature

Step 1. With the test item in its operating configuration, adjust the
chamber air temperature to the low operating temperature of the
test item as specified in the test plan. Maintain until temperature
stabilization of the test item has been achieved.

Step 2. Visually examine the test item to the extent practical.

4-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 303

Step 3. Conduct an operational check of the test item and document the
results.

Step 4. Stabilize the test item at standard ambient conditions.

Step 5. Visually examine the test item to the extent practical.

Step 6. Conduct an operational check similar to that in Method 300


Chapter 2, and document the results for comparison with the
pretest data.

4.4.3.2. Procedure IIb - Cyclic Temperature

Step 1. With the test item in its operating configuration, adjust the
chamber air temperature to the initial temperature of the
specified cycle and maintain until the test item has stabilized.

Step 2. Expose the test item (non-operating) to the temperature level


specified for the operational cycle for at least three cycles, or as
necessary to obtain repeated test item response within 2 °C.

Step 3. From the exposure data, determine the lowest response


temperature of the test item. This will be the operational
temperature for Step 4.

Step 4. Adjust the chamber air to the operational temperature. Maintain


the chamber in a steady state condition until temperature
stabilization of the test item has been achieved.

Step 5. Visually examine the test item to the extent practical.

Step 6. Conduct an operational check of the test item in accordance with


the approved test plan, and document the results.

Step 7. With the test item not operating, stabilize the test item at
standard ambient conditions.

Step 8. Conduct an operational check similar to that in Method 300


Chapter 2, and document the results for comparison with the
pretest data.

NOTE: During a long sequence of operations, temperature restabilization may


be required at intervals.

4-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 303

4.4.4. Procedure III - Manipulation Test

Step 1. With the test item in the test chamber in its storage configuration,
stabilize the test item at its low operating temperature derived, if
necessary, from paragraph 4.4.3.2.

Step 2. While maintaining the low operating temperature, place the test
item in its normal operating configuration using one of the
following options based on the type of test chamber available:

a. Option 1 - To be used when a "walk-in" type chamber is


available: With personnel clothed and equipped as they
would be in a low-temperature tactical situation, assemble
or install the test item into its operational configuration as
would be done in the field.

b. Option 2 - To be used when non-walk-in chambers are


used: Perform the Option 1 procedure by reaching
through chamber access holes or the open door while
wearing heavy gloves such as would be required in
service. (NOTE - Opening the chamber door is not
recommended because it may cause frost to form on the
test item as well as cause a gradual warming of the test
item.) In order to maintain the test item external
temperature within the required tolerance as specified in
Method 300 Chapter 3, limit the door-open periods by
performing the manipulation in stages.

Step 3. If operation of the test item is required at low temperatures,


perform the checkout and document the results for comparison
with Method 300 Chapter 2.

Step 4. Restabilise the test item at the low operating temperature.

Step 5. With the test item still in the chamber, repeat the options of Step
2 above while disassembling the test item and repacking it in its
normal shipping/storage container(s), transit case, or other mode
and configuration. It is not necessary to replace any stacking
loads.

Step 6. Adjust the chamber air conditions to standard ambient and


stabilize the test item.

Step 7. Visually examine the test item to the extent practical.

4-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 303

Step 8. Conduct an operational check of the test item similar to that in


Method 300 Chapter 2, and document the results for comparison
with pretest data.

NOTE: During a long sequence of operations/manipulations, temperature


restabilization may be required at intervals.

4-5 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 303

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

4-6 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 303

CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

5. EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

See Method 300 Chapter 9.

5-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 303

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

5-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 303

CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

6. REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

See Method 300 Chapter 10.

6-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 303

TABLE 1: Typical Low Temperature Data (from AECTP 200, Category 230)

Climatic Meteorological Induced


Category
(*) Temperature Relative Temperature Relative
(°C) Humidity (%) (°C) Humidity (%)

C0 -6 to -19 Tending -10 to -21 Tending

C1 -21 to -32 toward -25 to -33 toward

C2 -37 to -46 saturation -37 to -46 saturation

C3 -51 -51

C4 -57 -57

(*) These categories are described in AECTP 200, Category 230 and are
comparable to those found in national standards.

6-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 303

YES
manipulation
test ?

NO
PROCEDURE I PROCEDURE II PROCEDURE III

NO
step 1 cyclic ? L.O.T.(1)
step 2 known ?

YES
cyclic temperature ?
NO YES

NO YES Procedure Procedure


step 3a step 3b IIa IIb
step 1
step 1
step 2
step 2
step 3
step 4 step 3
step 4
step 5
YES step 6
operation ? step 1
step 2
step 3
NO step 4
step 4
step 5 step 5
step 6 step 6 step 6
step 7 step 7 step 7
step 8 step 8 step 8

(1) Low Operating Temperature

Figure 1: Low Temperature Procedures

6-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 303

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 304

METHOD 304
AIR TO AIR THERMAL SHOCK

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE ........................................................................................... 1-1


1.1. PURPOSE ................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2. APPLICATION........................................................................................... 1-1
1.3. LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................ 1-2
CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE .......................................................................... 2-1
2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT ........................................................ 2-1
2.1.1. Physical .............................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2. Chemical ............................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.3. Electrical............................................................................................. 2-1
2.2. TEST PROCEDURE ................................................................................. 2-2
2.3. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS........................................................... 2-2
2.3.1. Temperature Levels ........................................................................... 2-2
2.3.2. Transfer Time ..................................................................................... 2-3
2.3.3. Humidity ............................................................................................. 2-3
2.3.4. Stabilization ........................................................................................ 2-3
2.3.5. Number of Shocks .............................................................................. 2-3
2.4. EVALUATION OF EFFECTS .................................................................... 2-3
CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST
INSTRUCTION ............................................................................... 3-1
CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES .................................... 4-1
4.1. TEST FACILITY ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.2. CONTROLS .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.3. TEST INTERRUPTION ............................................................................. 4-1
4.4. PROCEDURES ......................................................................................... 4-1
4.4.1. Preparation for Test............................................................................ 4-1
4.4.2. Procedure I – Shock From Constant Extreme Temperatures ............. 4-1
4.4.3. Procedure II – Shock to/from Cyclic High Temperatures.................... 4-2
CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS ....................................... 5-1
CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................. 6-1

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 304

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 304

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE

NOTE: METHOD 300, GENERAL GUIDANCE AND REQUIREMENTS,


CONTAINS INFORMATION NECESSARY TO CONDUCT THE TEST
PROCEDURES OF THIS METHOD, AND SHALL BE USED IN COMBINATION
WITH THIS TEST METHOD.

1. SCOPE

1.1. PURPOSE

The main objectives of the thermal shock test are to determine if:

a. The safety of the materiel is affected as a result of exposure to sudden,


extreme changes of temperature.

b. The materiel can be handled and operated within the specified


requirements during and after sudden temperature changes (greater than
10 °C per minute) likely to be associated with actual service conditions.

c. The materiel experiences physical damage during or after experiencing


temperature shock.

1.2. APPLICATION

This test method is used when the requirements documents specify that the materiel is
likely to be deployed where sudden significant changes of air temperature may be
experienced (see paragraph 2.3.1). This Method is only intended to evaluate the
effects of sudden temperature changes of the outer surfaces of materiel, items
mounted on the outer surfaces, or internal items situated near the external surfaces.
Typically, this addresses:

a. The transfer of materiel between heated areas and low temperature


environments.

b. Ascent from a high temperature ground environment to high altitude via a


high performance vehicle (hot to cold only).

c. Air drop at high altitude/low temperature from aircraft enclosures when


only the external material (packaging or materiel surface) is to be tested.

1-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 304

This method may also be used to reveal safety problems and potential flaws in materiel
normally exposed to less extreme conditions, as long as the design limitations of the
materiel are not exceeded.

1.3. LIMITATIONS

a. This Method is not intended for materiel that will not experience sudden
extreme air temperature changes because of its packaging, installed
location, or other such configurations that would shield the materiel from
significant temperature changes.

b. This Method is inappropriate if the actual transfer time in a service


environment will not produce a significant thermal shock. Additionally, it
is not to be used to assess performance characteristics after lengthy
exposure to extreme temperatures, as are the low and high temperature
methods.

c. This Method has not been designed to address the temperature shock
experienced by materiel that is transferred between air and liquid or
between two liquids, materiel that is exposed to rain following solar
heating, or materiel that is exposed to heat from a fire and then cooled
with water.

d. This Method does not address the thermal shocks produced by the
internal generation of heat.

e. This Method does not address the thermal shock caused by rapid warm-
up by engine compressor bleed air.

f. This Method does not address aerodynamic heating or cooling due to


wind.

1-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 304

CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE

2. TEST GUIDANCE

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8.

2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Sudden temperature changes may either temporarily or permanently impair the


performance of the materiel by changing the physical properties or dimensions of its
construction materials. Examples of problems that could occur as a result of exposure
to thermal shock are shown below, but the examples are not intended to be
comprehensive.

2.1.1. Physical

a. Shattering of glass vials and optical equipment.

b. Binding or slackening of moving parts.

c. Cracking of solid pellets or grains in explosives.

d. Differential contraction or expansion of dissimilar materials.

e. Deformation or fracture of components.

f. Cracking of surface coatings.

g. Leakage from sealed compartments.

h. Failure of insulation.

2.1.2. Chemical

a. Separation of constituents.

b. Failure of chemical agent protection.

2.1.3. Electrical

a. Changes in electrical and electronic components.

b. Electronic or mechanical failures due to rapid water or frost formation.

2-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 304

c. Excessive static electricity.

2.2. TEST PROCEDURE

1. See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8. There are two procedures. Procedure I
employs constant temperature at each of the extreme shock conditions because, in
many instances, the thermal shock itself so outweighs the other thermal effects that the
test may be performed using two constant temperatures. This is particularly the case
when more severe shocks are desired, such as for evaluation of safety or initial design
and when extreme values will be used. When a careful simulation of a real
environment is required, Procedure II can be used because the upper temperature
follows part of an appropriate diurnal cycle. The test conditions that are used during
either procedure are determined from:

a. The expected exposure temperatures in service.

b. The materiel's logistic or deployment configuration.

2. The function (operational requirement) to be achieved by the materiel and a


definition of the circumstances responsible for the thermal shock should be determined
from the requirements documents.

2.3. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS

See Method 300 Chapters 1, 4, and 8. The test conditions as presented in this
procedure are intended to be in general agreement with other extremes described in
this document. The primary purpose in establishing these levels is to provide realistic
conditions for the transfer between the two temperature extremes. The temperature of
the test item before transfer must be the most realistic extreme that would be
encountered during the specific operation. Response temperatures achieved when
materiel is exposed to the conditions of the various climatic categories may be
obtained from the test results of high temperature exposure for either the operational or
storage configuration (see Method 302). The latter assumption must consider the
induced effects of solar radiation during storage and transit in various climates.

2.3.1. Temperature Levels

Both the total temperature change expected in service and the materials involved must
be evaluated to determine the need to perform this test. The temperature levels are
determined in relation to the use of materiel that has been previously defined. They
may be obtained from special measurements (response temperatures from the High
and Low Temperature operational tests), or extracted or derived from AECTP 200,
Leaflet 2311 or equivalent national standards. For safety or design evaluation,
temperature levels may have more extreme values than these.

2-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 304

2.3.2. Transfer Time

The transfer time must reflect the time associated with the actual thermal shock in the
life cycle profile. If the transfer takes more than one minute, the extra time must be
justified.

2.3.3. Humidity

For most test programs, relative humidity is not controlled. Relative humidity may have
a significant influence on some materiel (e.g., cellulosic materials that are typically
porous, into which moisture can migrate and then expand upon freezing) during the
thermal shock test. This must be considered and special measurements (if available)
or the data of AECTP 200, Leaflet 2311 should be used as a basis.

2.3.4. Stabilization

Since this method is intended to evaluate those portions of materiel that can respond
rapidly to external temperature changes, expose the test item to the temperature
extremes for a duration representative primarily of the realistic worst case (life cycle
profile), but also taking into account the time taken to achieve thermal stabilization of
the areas on or near the external surfaces of the test item.

2.3.5. Number of Shocks

For a test item that is likely to be exposed only rarely to thermal shock, one shock is
recommended for each appropriate condition. There is little available data to
substantiate a specific number of shocks when more frequent exposure is expected.
In lieu of better information, a minimum of three shocks should be applied at each
condition, the number depending primarily on the anticipated service events.

2.4. EVALUATION OF EFFECTS

The nature of this test precludes extensive performance evaluation while thermal
shock conditions exist. Operational evaluation will, in most cases, be limited to
irreversible effects or simple "go/no go" performance indications that can be quickly
observed.

2-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 304

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

2-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 304

CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

3. INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST iNSTRUCTION

In addition to that specified in Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6, document the actual
transfer times from the time that the chamber door is opened, to the time that the door
of the second test section is closed.

3-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 304

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 304

CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITION AND PROCEDURES

4. TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

See Method 300 Chapters 3, 4, and 5 for test conditions, test facility, and test control
information.

4.1. TEST FACILITY

See Method 300 Chapter 5.

Unless otherwise specified or impractical due to the thermal mass of the test item, the
chamber(s) or compartments to be used must be equipped so that after transfer of the
test item, the desired test air temperature within the chamber can be achieved within 5
minutes. Chamber airflows of up to 6 m/s may be required in order to optimize heat
transfer rates.

4.2. CONTROLS

See Method 300 Chapters 3 and 4.

4.3. TEST INTERRUPTION

See Method 300 Chapter 7.

If an interruption occurs during the transfer, the test item must be re-stabilized at the
previous temperature and then transferred.

4.4. PROCEDURES

The procedures depicted in Figures 1 and 2 arbitrarily begin with the lower
temperature, but could be reversed to begin with the higher temperature if it is more
realistic. Specific points in Figures 1 and 2 (in parentheses) are referenced in the
following text.

4.4.1. Preparation for Test

Before starting either of the test procedures, determine the information specified in
Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6, and perform the test preparation procedure specified in
Method 300 Chapter 2.

4.4.2. Procedure I - Shock From Constant Extreme Temperatures (See Figure 1)

Step 1. With the test item in the chamber, adjust the chamber air
temperature to the low temperature extreme specified in the test

4-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 304

plan (a) at a rate not exceeding 3 °C per minute. Maintain this


temperature for a period as determined in the test plan (a-b).

Step 2. Transfer the test item in no more than one minute (b-c) to an
atmosphere at temperature T2 that will produce the thermal shock
specified in the test plan, and maintain this temperature as
specified in the test plan (c-e).

Step 3. If required in the test plan, evaluate the effects of the thermal
shock on the test item to the extent practical (see paragraph 2.4).

Step 4. If other cycles in reversed directions are required, transfer the test
item to the T1 environment in no more than one minute (e-f) and
stabilize as required in the test plan (f-b), evaluate the thermal
shock effects (if required), and continue as in steps 2 and 3
above. If other one-way shocks are required, return the test item
to the T1 environment at a rate not exceeding 3 °C per minute and
repeat steps 1-3. If no other shocks are required, go to Step 5.

Step 5. Return the test item to standard ambient conditions.

Step 6. Examine the test item and, if appropriate, operate. Record the
results for comparison with pretest data.

4.4.3. Procedure II - Shock to/from Cyclic High Temperatures (See Figure 2)

Step 1. With the test item in the chamber, adjust the chamber air
temperature to the low temperature extreme specified in the test
plan (a). Maintain this temperature for a period as determined in
the test plan (a-b).

Step 2. Transfer the test item to the maximum air temperature of the high
temperature cycle (c) (as specified in the test plan) in no more
than one minute. As soon as the chamber door is closed and the
high temperature is restored, cycle the chamber through part of
the appropriate diurnal cycle until the chamber reaches the test
item response temperature (d) (obtained according to Method
302, paragraph 2.3.2). Maintain this temperature as specified in
the test plan (d-e).

Step 3. If no other cycles are required, return the test item to standard
ambient conditions and proceed to step 7; otherwise proceed to
step 4.

4-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 304

Step 4. Transfer the test item to the lower temperature environment (f) in
no more than one minute and stabilize as required in the test plan
(f-h). If other cycles are required, proceed to step 6.

Step 5. If no other cycles are required, return the test item to standard
ambient conditions, and proceed to step 7.

NOTE: Unless the requirements documents indicate otherwise, if the test


procedure is interrupted because of work schedules, etc., maintaining the test
item at the test temperature for the period of the interruption will facilitate
resumption of the test. If the temperature is changed, before continuing the test
restabilise the test item at the temperature of the last successfully completed
period before the interruption.

Step 6. Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 as specified in the test plan.

Step 7. Examine the test item and, if appropriate, operate. Record the
results for comparison with pretest data.

4-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 304

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

4-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 304

CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

5. EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

See Method 300 Chapter 9.

5-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 304

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

5-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 304

CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

6. REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

See Method 300 Chapter 10.

6-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 304

Temperature

c e
T2

<3 °C/min

Standard
ambient

<3°C/min Time
< 3 °C/min

a b f g
T1

1 minute max.

Figure 1: Shocks From Constant Extreme Temperature (Procedure I)

6-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 304

c
Test item
response e

d
< 3 °C/min

Standard
ambient

Time
< 3 °C/min < 3 °C/min

a b f g
T1

1 minute max.

Figure 2: Shocks From Cyclic High Temperature (Procedure II)

6-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 304

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 305

METHOD 305
SOLAR RADIATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1. SCOPE............................................................................................... 1-1
1.1. PURPOSE ................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2. APPLICATION........................................................................................... 1-1
1.3. LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................ 1-1
CHAPTER 2. TEST GUIDANCE .............................................................................. 2-1
2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT ........................................................ 2-1
2.1.1. Actinic Effects ..................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2. Heating Effects ................................................................................... 2-1
2.2. CHOICE OF TEST PROCEDURE ............................................................ 2-2
2.2.1. Procedure I - Cycling (Thermal Effects) ............................................. 2-3
2.2.2. Procedure II - Steady State (Actinic Effects) ...................................... 2-3
2.3. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS........................................................... 2-3
2.3.1. Temperature Levels ........................................................................... 2-3
2.3.2. Test Duration ...................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.3. Test Item Orientation .......................................................................... 2-4
2.3.4. Substrate ............................................................................................ 2-4
2.3.5. Solar Irradiance .................................................................................. 2-5
2.4. SPECTRAL DISTRIBUTION - SEA LEVEL v
HIGH GROUND ELEVATIONS ................................................................. 2-5
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN
THE TEST iNSTRUCTION ................................................................. 3-1
CHAPTER 4. TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES ........................................ 4-1
4.1. TEST FACILITY ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.2. CONTROLS .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.1. Temperature Measurement ................................................................ 4-1
4.2.2. Measurement of Solar Radiation ........................................................ 4-1
4.2.3. Surface Contamination ....................................................................... 4-2
4.2.4. Air Velocity ......................................................................................... 4-3
4.3. TEST INTERRUPTIONS ........................................................................... 4-3
4.3.1. Undertest Interruptions ....................................................................... 4-3
4.4. PROCEDURES ......................................................................................... 4-3
4.4.1. Preparation for Test............................................................................ 4-3
4.4.2. Procedure I - Cycling. (Figure 1) ....................................................... 4-4
4.4.3. Procedure II - Steady State. (Figure 2).............................................. 4-4
CHAPTER 5. EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS ........................................... 5-1
CHAPTER 6. REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS ................................. 6-1
ANNEX A DETAILED GUIDANCE ON SOLAR RADIATION TESTING ............. A-1
A.1. INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................... A-1
A.2. IRRADIANCE AND SPECTRAL DISTRIBUTION...................................... A-1
A.2.1. Irradiance ........................................................................................... A-1
A.2.2. Spectral Distribution - Sea Level Versus High Altitude ....................... A-1
A.3. OTHER ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS TO BE CONSIDERED ............... A-1

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 305

A.4. RADIATION SOURCES ............................................................................ A-2


A.4.1. General .............................................................................................. A-2
A.4.2. Tungsten Filament Lamps .................................................................. A-2
A.4.3. Xenon Lamps ..................................................................................... A-2
A.4.4. Metal Halide (HMI) Lamps.................................................................. A-2
A.4.5. Filters ................................................................................................. A-3
A.4.6. Uniformity of Irradiance ...................................................................... A-3
A.5. INSTRUMENTATION ................................................................................ A-4
A.5.1. Measurement of Irradiance ................................................................ A-4
A.5.2. Measurement of Spectral Distribution ................................................ A-4
A.5.3. Measurement of Temperature ............................................................ A-5
A.6. PREPARATION OF TEST FACILITY AND MATERIEL UNDER TEST ..... A-5
A.6.1. Test Facility ........................................................................................ A-5
A.6.2. Materiel Under Test ............................................................................ A-5
A.7. INTERPRETATION OF RESULTS............................................................ A-6
A.7.1. Comparison with Field Experience ..................................................... A-6
A.7.2. Thermal Effects .................................................................................. A-6
A.7.3. Degradation of Materials .................................................................... A-7
A.8. HAZARDS AND PERSONNEL SAFETY ................................................... A-7
A.8.1. General .............................................................................................. A-7
A.8.2. Ultraviolet Radiation ........................................................................... A-8
A.8.3. Ozone and Harmful Fumes ................................................................ A-8
A.8.4. Risk of Lamp Explosions .................................................................... A-8
A.8.5. Electric Shock .................................................................................... A-9
A.9. REFERENCES ........................................................................................ A-11

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 305

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE

NOTE: METHOD 300, GENERAL GUIDANCE AND REQUIREMENTS,


CONTAINS INFORMATION NECESSARY TO CONDUCT THE TEST
PROCEDURES OF THIS METHOD, AND SHALL BE USED IN COMBINATION
WITH THIS TEST METHOD.

1. SCOPE

1.1. PURPOSE

The main objective of this solar radiation test is to determine the actinic
(photodegradation) and heating effects of solar radiation on materiel when it is exposed
to sunshine during operation or during unsheltered storage at ground level.

1.2. APPLICATION

This Method is applicable to materiel likely to be directly exposed to solar radiation.


This Method is for use when close simulation of the spectral distribution of radiation is
required such as for assessment of materiel degradation or a combination of
degradation and/or thermal response. In certain cases where, for example, paint
finishes with unusual characteristics have been applied, it may be necessary to use
this Method to establish realistic response temperature cycles on a single item for
application in high temperature tests of multiple copies. Once the temperatures have
been measured, heating effects of solar radiation may be determined through the High
Temperature test (Method 302). Further guidance on high temperature application is
provided in Method 300 Chapter 8. Because of lamp deterioration, this test is more
expensive to perform than a high temperature test but may be necessary for
determining the initial thermal response characteristics.

1.3. LIMITATIONS

This Method does not represent the heating that occurs in enclosed area storage. This
test method does not consider all of the effects related to the natural environment (see
Annex A, paragraph 7.2) and, therefore, it is preferable to test materiel at appropriate
natural sites. This Method shall be used when the spectrum of the lamp bank has
been measured and conforms to the spectrum identified in Table 1. Deviations from
Table 1 may be justified if the test requirements are based on the tailoring process, or if
a specific frequency band is of concern. Any deviation shall be detailed and justified.

1-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 305

NOTE: This is a very specialized, potentially hazardous set of tests (see Annex
A, paragraph 8). Experts in this area shall be consulted to define the test
specifications. In particular the spectral distribution of light sources needs to be
carefully considered with respect to spectral differences between different
sources and their impact on specific materiel.

1-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 305

CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE

2. TEST GUIDANCE

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8.

2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Solar radiation has two significant types of effects on materiel: actinic and thermal.

2.1.1. Actinic Effects

Certain portions of the solar spectrum are known to cause degradation of materials.
The full spectrum must be used to simulate adequately these actinic effects of solar
radiation. Some examples of deterioration caused by actinic effects are:

a. Deterioration of natural and synthetic elastomers and polymers through


photochemical reactions initiated by shorter wavelength radiation. High
strength polymers such as Kevlar are noticeably affected by the visible
spectrum.

b. Fading of fabric color.

c. Checking, chalking and fading of paints.

2.1.2. Heating Effects

The heating effects of solar radiation differ from those of high air temperature alone in
that the amount of heat absorbed or reflected depends on the roughness and color of
the surface on which the radiation is incident. In addition to the differential expansion
between dissimilar materials, changes in the intensity of solar radiation may cause
components to expand or contract at different rates that can lead to severe stresses
and loss of structural integrity. Other examples of heating effects include but are not
limited to:

a. Jamming or loosening of moving parts.

b. Weakening of solder joints and glued parts.

c. Change in strength and elasticity.

d. Loss of calibration or malfunction of linkage devices.

e. Loss of seal integrity.

2-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 305

f. Changes in electrical or electronic components.

g. Premature actuation of electrical contacts.

h. Fading of component color codes.

i. Change in the properties of elastomers and polymers.

j. Blistering and scaling of paints and other finishes.

k. Softening of plastic materials.

l. Pressure variations.

m. Sweating of composite materials and explosives.

n. Difficulty in handling.

Table 1: Test Spectral Distribution

SPECTRAL REGION

CHARACTERISTICS ULTRAVIOLET VISIBLE VISIBLE/IR* INFRARED

Bandwidth 0,28 m 0,32 m 0,40 m 0,64 m 0,78 m

to to to to to

0,32 m 0,40 m 0,64 m 0,78 m 3,00 m

Irradiance 5 W/m² 63 W/m² 386 W/m² 174 W/m² 492 W/m²

Tolerance ± 35% ± 25% ± 10% ± 10% ± 20 %

* Note: This bandwidth may apply to either the visible or the Infrared spectrum.

2.2. CHOICE OF TEST PROCEDURE

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8. Two test procedures are proposed: cycling and
steady state. Either procedure may be used to determine actinic effects but
Procedure II reduces the test duration.

2-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 305

2.2.1. Procedure I - Cycling (Thermal Effects)

This procedure is primarily used to determine realistic response temperature cycles


when the materiel is expected to withstand the heat of exposure in the open in hot
climates and still be able to perform without degradation due to thermal effects both
during and after exposure. Limited evaluation of actinic effects is possible. The solar
radiation test (as opposed to the high temperature test) should be used when the
materiel could be affected by differential heating or when the heating caused by solar
radiation is unknown. After the induced temperatures have been determined, the high
temperature test (with or without directional heating) could (for economic reasons) be
substituted for this solar radiation procedure provided that actinic or thermal gradient
effects are not important.

2.2.2. Procedure II - Steady State (Actinic Effects)

This procedure is used when the principal concern is the possibility that long periods of
exposure to sunshine will result in detrimental actinic effects. When using this
procedure, it is important that the temperature of the test item is representative that
which it would experience under natural conditions (as simulated by the cyclic test of
Procedure I). If necessary, a preliminary test should be carried out in accordance with
Procedure I to determine the maximum response temperature of the materiel. The
4-hour “lights-off” period of each 24-hour cycle allows for test item conditions (chemical
and physical) to return toward “normal” and provide some degree off thermal stress
exercising. (See Annex A, reference 25, p 84 for a more detailed explanation).

2.3. CHOICE OF TEST PRAMETERS

2.3.1. Temperature Levels

1. After having selected the most suitable test type for the desired objective, the
maximum test temperature is defined. Three values are proposed for each type of
test. They correspond to the maximum meteorological temperatures in the three
climatic categories (A1, A2, and A3) of AECTP 200, Leaflet 2311. Figure 1 shows the
daily cycle temperature and radiation variations corresponding to these three
categories for Procedure 1. The maximum air temperature for the chamber shall be
chosen according to the planned climatic categories of use of the materiel:

a. + 49 °C when the materiel must be used and must operate correctly


anywhere in the world.

b. + 44 °C when the materiel is expected to be used in only categories A2


and A3 as defined by AECTP 200, Leaflet 2311.

c. + 39 °C when the materiel is only to be used in the A3 category as


defined by AECTP 200, Leaflet 2311.

2-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 305

2. Figure 2 shows the corresponding temperature and radiation levels for


Procedure II.

2.3.2. Test Duration

The test durations are expressed in numbers of 24 hour cycles in both types of tests.

2.3.2.1. Procedure I (Figure 1)

A minimum of 3 cycles of Figure 1 is recommended. The variation in solar energy may


be applied continuously or incrementally, with a minimum of 4 levels (preferably 8
levels) for each side of the cycle, provided that the total energy of the cycle is
maintained. This number of cycles will usually produce a maximum response
temperature in materiel. However, the test should be continued until the maximum
temperature reached by the test item during one cycle and the subsequent cycle differs
by less than 2 °C. If this procedure is used for evaluating actinic effects, each cycle
represents one day of exposure to full sun, in mid-summer, in the appropriate climatic
category. In the cooler, cloudier parts of each category, ten cycles might, for example,
represent up to one summer of natural exposure. If more exact simulation is required,
meteorological data for the particular areas under consideration should be consulted.
This may include adjustment of solar energy, if appropriate, to account for latitude,
altitude, month of anticipated exposure, or other factors (for example, a product
exclusively used in northern areas, or exclusively used in winter months). Any
deviation from the standard conditions must be detailed and justified.

2.3.2.2. Procedure II (Figure 2)

It is normally recommended to use 10 cycles of Figure 2 for materiel occasionally used


outside (such as portable equipment). For materiel used permanently outside, use a
test of 56 cycles or more. Procedure II will give an acceleration factor of approximately
2.5 as far as the total energy received by the test item is concerned. Eight hours of
exposure to 1120 W/m2, as in the steady-state test, is approximately equal to 24 hours
of the cycling test (20 hours of light and 4 hours of no light per cycle).

2.3.3. Test Item Orientation

The orientation of the test item relative to the direction of radiation will have a
significant impact on the heating effects. In cases where several test item components
are known to be sensitive to solar effects, the relative test item-solar source orientation
may have to be adjusted to simulate a diurnal cycle. The direction of the radiation will
also be dependent on the latitude of the expected location of the materiel.

2.3.4. Substrate

The test item should be mounted either on raised supports or on a substrate of


specified properties, e.g., a layer of concrete of specified thickness or a sand bed of a

2-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 305

conductivity and reflectivity representative of actual deployment, as provided in the


requirements documents.

2.3.5. Solar Irradiance

Increasing the irradiance above the specified level is not recommended because of the
danger of overheating and excessive degradation, and there is presently no indication
that attempting to accelerate the test in this way gives results that correlate with
equipment response under natural solar radiation conditions. See Annex A,
paragraphs 2.1 and 2.2.

2.4. SPECTRAL DISTRIBUTION – SEA LEVEL v HIGH GROUND ELEVATIONS

At high ground elevations solar radiation contains a greater proportion of damaging UV


radiation than at sea level. Although the internationally agreed spectrum shown in
Table 1 is recommended for general testing, it is a closer representation of the real
environment at 4-5 km above sea level. This standard spectrum may be used (unless
other data are available) for both sea level and high ground elevation. If testing for sea
level conditions using the data in Table 1, degradation during the test may be expected
to proceed at a faster rate than if using the appropriate spectrum for sea level, and thus
laboratory test exposure can be modified if there is adequate knowledge of the ground
level spectrum.

2-5 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 305

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

2-6 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 305

CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

3. INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

In addition to Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6, the following information is required:

a. Orientation of the test item with respect to the solar source.

b. Position of the temperature sensors on/in the test item.

c. Test Item Temperature

d. Substrate characteristics.

3-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 305

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 305

CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

4. TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

4.1. TEST FACILITY

See Method 300 Chapter 5. The radiation sources consist of lamps reproducing the
solar spectrum with irradiances and tolerances as indicated in Table 1 or as indicated
in the test plan. Traditional sources are described in Annex A although the spectrum
produced can only comply with the spectrum specified in Table 1 by the use of filters.
This list is not intended to exclude new lamps made available by advanced technology.

4.2. CONTROLS

See Method 300 Chapters 3 and 4 and consider the following:

4.2.1. Temperature Measurement

In order to adequately identify the temperature of the air surrounding the test item, it
should be measured as close as possible to the test item making adequate provision
for shielding from the effects of radiant heat, both from the lamps and from the test
item. (See Annex A, paragraph 5.3 for more explanations).

4.2.2. Measurement of Solar Radiation

4.2.2.1. Instrumentation

Measurement of the total radiated energy can be made using a pyranometer or a


pyrheliometer. The spectral distribution of the radiation may be measured
approximately by using filters together with a pyranometer. Precise measurement of
the radiation spectrum requires the use of a spectroradiometer that is more delicate to
employ. (More details on the use of these instruments are given in Annex A,
paragraphs 5.1 and 5.2). Any other measuring instrument satisfying the required
specifications may be used.

4.2.2.2. Measurement Accuracy

The required measurement accuracy of these different instruments is given in Table 2.

4-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 305

Table 2: Instrument Accuracy

MEASUREMENT INSTRUMENT PARAMETER ACCURACY


MEASURED
Pyranometer/Pyrheliometer Total radiation ± 47 W/m2
(Direct & diffuse)
Spectroradiometer/Pyranometer Spectral distribution ± 5% of the
& filters reading

4.2.2.3. Energy Distribution

Periodic inspection of the radiation produced by the test facility is imperative since the
characteristics of radiation sources are numerous and change with time. Thorough
checking of the spectral distribution, the intensity and uniformity shall be conducted as
frequently as possible but at not more than 500-hour intervals. A check of the overall
intensity and uniformity (that is much easier) shall be conducted before and after every
test.

4.2.2.4. Long Wave Radiation

The value of 1120 W/m2 measured between 0.28 m and 3 m shall include any
radiation reflected from the test chamber walls and received by the equipment under
test, but it should not include long-wave IR radiation greater than 3 m.

4.2.2.5. Direction of Radiation

Where it could have a significant effect on the final heat balance, the
equipment/radiation source shall be progressively adjusted to simulate the angular
movement of the sun (i.e., 180 degrees in 12 hours). It should be noted that intensity
measurements in AECTP 200, Leaflet 2311 refer to a flat horizontal surface, and this
should be taken into account when the sun's angular movement is being simulated.

4.2.3. Surface Contamination

Dust and other surface contamination may significantly change the absorption
characteristics of irradiated surfaces. Unless otherwise required, specimens should be
clean when they are tested. However, if effects of surface contamination are to be
assessed, the relevant specifications should include the necessary information on
preparation of surfaces.

4-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 305

4.2.4. Air Velocity

The air velocity inside the enclosure must be between 0.25 m/s and 1.5 m/s to avoid
unrealistic test item temperature reduction but still maintain the required air
temperatures. Test chambers providing cooling air may be used to prevent
unrepresentative temperatures from being produced, but the guidance in paragraph 3
of Annex A should be strictly observed.

4.3. TEST INTERRUPTIONS

See Method 300 Chapter 7 and consider the following:

4.3.1. Undertest Interruptions

a. Procedure I (Cycling).

(1) If an interruption occurs before 19 hours of the last cycle of


procedure 1, the test item shall be restabilised at the conditions
existing immediately before the point of interruption. Only when
these conditions are met should the test timing be restarted.

(2) If an interruption occurs after 19 hours of the last cycle of


procedure I, the test shall be considered complete. (At least 92%
of the test would have been completed and the probability of a
failure is low during the remaining reduced levels of temperature
and solar radiation).

b. Procedure II (Steady state). The test rationale is based on the total


cumulative effect of the solar environment. Any undertest interruption
should be followed by restabilization at the specified conditions and
continuation of the test from the point of the interruption.

4.4. PROCEDURES

See Method 300 Chapter 3.

4.4.1. Preparation for Test

Before starting any of the test procedures, determine the information specified in
Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6, and perform the test preparation procedure specified in
Method 300 Chapter 2. For eventual comparison between pre- and post-test items,
photographs of the test item and material samples should be taken.

4-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 305

4.4.2. Procedure I - Cycling. (Figure 1)

Step 1. Bring the air temperature in the enclosure to the minimum value
of the temperature cycle at which radiation is non-existent.
Measure the test item temperature.
Step 2. If necessary, create the initial relative humidity conditions
specified by the test program.

Step 3. Conduct the required number of cycles during which temperature


and solar radiation levels are changed in accordance with the
schedule followed.

Step 4. Perform the operational checks on the test item at the times called
for in the test program.

Step 5. At the end of the last cycle, allow the chamber to return to
standard ambient conditions.

Step 6. Allow the test item to return to thermal equilibrium.

Step 7. Visually examine the test item to the extent practicable.

4.4.3. Procedure II - Steady State. (Figure 2)

Step 1. Bring the temperature in the enclosure up to the value specified in


the test program. Measure the test item temperature.

Step 2. Adjust the solar radiation value to the value specified in the test
program.

Step 3. Maintain these conditions for 20 hours.

Step 4. Stop the radiation for 4 hours while maintaining the temperature in
the enclosure at the specified level.

Step 5. Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 for the number of cycles specified in the
test program.

Step 6. If applicable, perform operational tests on the test item at the


times called for in the test program.

Step 7. At the end of the last radiation period, allow the test item to return
to standard ambient conditions.

Step 8. Conduct a thorough visual inspection and operational check, and


document the results for comparison with pretest data.

4-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 305

CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

5. EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

See Method 300 Chapter 9.

5-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 305

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

5-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 305

CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

6. REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

See Method 300 Chapter 10.

6-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 305

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 305

VALUES ARE FROM AECTP 200, Category 230 - Temperatures of categories A1, A2 and A3 in °C, solar radiation in W/m²

Time 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
(hr)
A1 35 34 34 33 33 32 33 35 38 41 43 44 47 48 48 49 48 48 46 42 41 39 38 37
A2 33 32 32 31 30 30 31 34 37 39 41 42 43 44 44 44 43 42 40 38 36 35 34 33
A3 30 29 29 28 28 28 29 30 31 34 36 37 38 38 39 39 38 37 35 34 34 32 32 31
W 0 0 0 0 0 55 270 505 730 915 1040 1120 1120 1040 915 730 505 270 55 0 0 0 0 0
°C W/m ²
55 1200

50
960

45
A1
720
A2
40
A3
W 480
35

240
30

25 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 21 23 24 25 26 27 28

Hours

Figure 1: Procedure 1: Cycling Test


Temperatures in °C, Solar Radiation in W/m²

6-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 305

Time 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
(hr)
A1 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49
A2 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44
A3 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39
W 0 0 1120 0 0 0
°C W/m ²
55 1200

50
960

45
A1
720
A2
A3 40
W
480
35

240
30

25 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 21 23 24 25

Hours

Figure 2: Procedure 2: Steady State Test


Temperatures in °C, Solar Radiation in W/m²

6-4 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 305

ANNEX A DETAILED GUIDANCE ON SOLAR RADIATION TESTING

A.1. INTRODUCTION

This Annex describes methods of simulation designed to examine the effects of solar
radiation on equipment. The main quantities to be simulated are the spectral energy
distribution of the sun as observed at the Earth's surface and the intensity of received
energy, in combination with controlled temperature conditions. However, it may be
necessary to consider a combination of solar radiation - including sky radiation - with
other environments, e.g., humidity, air velocity, etc.

A.2. IRRADIANCE AND SPECTRAL DISTRIBUTION

The effect of radiation on the materiel will depend mainly on the level of irradiance and
its spectral distribution.

A.2.1. Irradiance

The irradiance by the sun on a plane perpendicular to the incident radiation outside the
Earth's atmosphere at the mean Earth-sun distance is known as the solar constant 'I0'
(reference l). The irradiance at the surface of the Earth is influenced by the solar
constant and the attenuation and scattering of radiation in the atmosphere. For test
purposes, a maximum intensity of 1120 W/m2 is specified to simulate the global (total)
radiation at the surface of the Earth from the sun and the sky with the sun at zenith,
based on a solar constant I0 = 1350 W/m2 (reference v). The true solar constant is
thought to be about 1365-1370 W/m2.

A.2.2. Spectral Distribution - Sea Level Versus High Altitude

At high altitude, solar radiation contains a greater proportion of damaging UV radiation


than at sea level. The internationally agreed spectrum (see Table A-1) recommended
for general testing is a closer representation of the real environment at 4-5 km. This
standard spectrum is recommended for use at both sea level and at high altitude.

A.3. OTHER ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS TO BE CONSIDERED

Attention is drawn to the possible cooling effects of airflow over materiel. This can also
result in misleading errors in open-type thermopiles used to monitor radiation intensity;
ventilation of pyranometers may be necessary to keep the glass dome cool. An airflow
of as little as one metre per second can effect a reduction in temperature rise of over
20%. In practice, high solar radiation conditions are rarely accompanied by complete
absence of wind. It may be necessary, therefore, to assess the effect of different air
velocities over materiel under test. The materiel specification should state any special
requirements in this respect. It is essential, therefore, to measure and control the rate
of airflow in order to maintain the required air temperature at the test item.

A-1 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 305

A.4. RADIATION SOURCES

A.4.1. General

The radiation source may comprise one or more lamps and their associated optical
components, e.g., reflectors, filters, etc., to provide the required spectral distribution
and irradiance. The high-pressure xenon arc lamp with filters can provide a good
spectral match (reference a). Mercury vapor and xenon-mercury lamps have
considerable deficiencies in matching that would lead to error (references b, c and f). If
not already covered in test method characteristics of these sources, features of filters,
optical arrangements, etc., are covered in the following paragraphs. Further
information can also be found in reference b.

A.4.2. Tungsten filament lamps

Because of their deficiency of ultraviolet radiation, tungsten lamps are unsuitable for
tests for degradation purposes. Serious discrepancies can also occur in results
obtained in tests for thermal effects, unless the considerable difference in spectral
energy distribution compared with natural solar radiation is taken into account. The
major part of the radiant energy from the tungsten lamp is in the infrared range, with
maximum intensity at about 1.0 m, whereas approximately 50% of solar energy is in
the visible and ultraviolet bands, i.e., at wavelengths less than 0.7 m. The quartz
halogen-type of tungsten lamp has an improved consistency of performance during its
life (reference d).

A.4.3. Xenon lamps

The configuration and size of the lamp(s) used will depend on the test required. The
relative spectral distribution of the xenon arc radiation has been found to be
substantially independent of lamp power (Annex A, reference c). However, variation
of lamp power will change the temperature of the electrodes and hence the spectral
distribution of the electrode radiation. With long arc lamps, it is relatively simple to
mask off the electrode radiation. The form of construction of the short arc lamp leads
to considerably wider manufacturing variation compared with the long arc, a point
particularly important when replacement becomes necessary. Routine replacement
of either type of lamp will be needed, since the emission will change continuously
with life, and there may be wide variations of the life characteristic from lamp to lamp.

A.4.4. Metal halide (HMI) lamps

Although this lamp imparts more energy in the ultraviolet range and low visible range
than specified in Table A-1, it provides a good source for tests requiring attention to
thermal effects, since the additional UV energy represents less than one per cent of
the total energy, and tests for heating effects are generally sufficiently short in
duration that actinic degradation will not be a concern. For testing actinic effects, the
energy level in the heating range will be lower than specified, as the UV levels will be

A-2 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 305

adjusted to Table A-1 levels. Since the energy level between 0.32 and 0.40 m
increases sharply as the lamp power level is reduced, power cannot be used to
adjust overall energy levels once the desired distribution has been obtained.

A.4.5. Filters

Liquid filters have certain disadvantages such as the possibility of boiling, the
temperature coefficient of spectral transmission, and long term drift in spectral
character (reference g). The present preference is for glass filters to be used, although
the characteristics of glass filters are not as accurately reproduced as those of a
chemical solution filter. Some trial and error may be necessary to compensate for
different optical densities by using different plate thicknesses (reference h). Glass
filters are proprietary articles and manufacturers should be consulted concerning the
choice of filters suitable for particular purposes. The choice will depend on the source
and its methods of use. For example, a xenon source may be test-compensated by a
combination of infrared and ultraviolet absorbing filters (reference h). Some glass
infrared filters may be prone to rapid changes in spectral characteristics when exposed
to excessive ultraviolet radiation. This deterioration may be largely prevented by
interposing the ultraviolet filter between the source and the infrared filter. Interference
type filters, that function by reflecting instead of absorbing the unwanted radiation,
(thus resulting in reduced heating of the glass), are generally more stable than
absorption filters.

A.4.6. Uniformity of Irradiance

Owing to the distance of the sun from the Earth, solar radiation appears at the Earth's
surface as an essentially parallel beam. Artificial sources are relatively close to the
working surface and means of directing and focusing the beam must be provided with
the aim of achieving a uniform irradiance at the measurement plane within specification
limits (i.e., 1120 W/m2 (+10, -0 W/m²)). This is difficult to achieve with a short-arc
xenon lamp with a parabolic reflector because of shadows from the lamp electrodes
and supports. Also, the incandescence of the anode can produce considerable
radiation at a much lower color temperature, slightly displaced from the main beam, if
only the arc itself is at the focus of the reflector. Uniform irradiation is more readily
achieved with a long arc lamp mounted in a parabolic 'trough' type reflector. However,
by employing very elaborate mounting techniques, it is possible to irradiate, with some
degree of uniformity, a large surface by a number of short arc xenon lamps (references
f and i). It is generally advisable to locate radiation source(s) outside the test enclosure
or chamber. This avoids possible degradation of the optical components, e.g., by high
humidity conditions, and contamination of test items by ozone that has been generated
by xenon and other types of arc lamps. Precise collimation of the radiation beam is not
normally required except for testing special materiel such as solar cells, solar tracking
devices, etc. However, some of the simulation techniques developed for space
research purposes could be adapted for Earth-surface solar radiation studies
(reference j).

A-3 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 305

A.5. INSTRUMENTATION

A.5.1. Measurement of Irradiance

The type of instrument considered most suitable for monitoring the irradiance is a
pyranometer as used for measuring global (combined solar and sky) radiation on a
horizontal plane. Two types are suitable for measuring radiation from a simulated solar
source. Each depends for its operation on thermojunctions.

A.5.1.1. Moll-Gorczinski Pyranometer

The Moll-Gorczinski pyranometer consists of 14 constantan-manganin strips (10 x 1 x


0.005 mm) arranged so that their 'hot' junctions lie on a plane and are formed into a
horizontal surface by means of a black varnish of low thermal conductivity. The 'cold'
junction ends are bent down to make good thermal connections with a copper plate of
large thermal capacity. The sensitive area is surmounted by two concentric glass
hemispheres.

A.5.1.2. Eppley Precision Spectral Pyranometer

1. The sensor is a circular 50-junction wire wound plated (copper-constantan)


thermopile, enclosed in concentric, clear-glass hemispheres, 30 mm and 50 mm
diameter. The outer hemisphere is interchangeable with another, either of glass
absorbing in particular wavelength bands, or with a deposited interference type filter,
allowing the separation of radiation into well-defined wavelength intervals (see
reference y).

2. Neither of these instruments is significantly affected by long-wave IR radiation


emitted by the specimen or the test enclosure. A modification of the Moll-Gorczinski
pyranometer, commonly known as the Kipp solarimeter, is the instrument used by
meteorological services in many countries. The Eppley pyranometer is the one most
widely used in the United States. The glass covers used in both these instruments will
cut off radiation at wavelengths greater than about 3 µm; this is significant when
unfiltered lamps are used and a correction factor would then be necessary. A useful
survey of calibration techniques for solar pyranometers is given in reference k, (see
also reference z). Further information will also be found in references l and m.

A.5.2. MEASUREMENT OF SPECTRAL DISTRIBUTION

Total intensity checks are readily made, but detailed checks on spectral characteristics
are more difficult. Major spectral changes can be checked by inexpensive routine
measurements, using a pyranometer in conjunction with selective filters (reference n).
For checking the detailed spectral distribution characteristics of the facility, it would be
necessary to employ sophisticated spectroradiometric instrumentation. However, there
seems to be no practical instrumentation obstacle to prevent this calibration being done
either as a service by the facility manufacturer or by a visit from a national calibration

A-4 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 305

center. Correlation should be achieved between the filter/pyranometer and


spectroradiometric methods at regular intervals (references o and u). Changes in the
spectral characteristics of lamps, slectors and filters may occur over a period of time
that could result in the spectral distribution being seriously outside the permitted
tolerances. Manufacturing tolerances may mean that lamp replacement could result in
unacceptable changes in both the level of irradiation and spectral distribution
compared with that initially set up. Regular monitoring is therefore essential, but
monitoring of the detailed spectral distribution within the test facility may not be
possible while equipment is undergoing test. A method of measuring the intensity of
radiation below 320 nm based on the exposure of polysulphone film and that would
permit the monitoring of this wavelength range within the test facility is now established
(reference w). (The technique is currently being considered as an ISO test method.)

A.5.3. Measurement of Temperature

Because of the high level of radiation, it is essential that temperature sensors are
adequately shielded from radiant heating effects. This applies both to measuring air
temperatures within the test enclosure and also to monitoring test item temperatures.
For air temperature measurements, it is obviously impracticable to use the standard
'Stevenson' screen used for meteorological measurements of 'shade temperatures'
since this is too cumbersome. A suitable alternative is a thermocouple freely mounted
in a radiation shield comprising a vertical cupro-nickel tube (approximately 1.5 cm
diameter by 7 cm long), surmounted by a spaced metal hood, polished on the inside
surface and painted white on the outside. When monitoring test item temperatures,
sensors, e.g., thermocouples, should be located on the inside surfaces of the external
case and not be attached to the outside surfaces. Temperature-indicating paints and
waxes are unsuitable for monitoring the temperature of irradiated surfaces, as their
absorption characteristics will not be the same.

A.6. PREPARATION OF TEST FACILITY AND MATERIEL UNDER TEST

A.6.1. Test Facility

It must be ensured that the optical parts of the facility, lamps, reflectors, and filters, etc.
are clean. The level of irradiation over the specified measurement plane must be
measured immediately prior to each test. Any ancillary environmental conditions, e.g.,
ambient temperature, as well as air velocity and other parameters if specified, should
be monitored continuously throughout the test.

A.6.2. Materiel Under Test

The method of mounting and the orientation of the test item relative to the direction of
radiation will have marked influences on the heating effects. The test item will probably
be required to be mounted either on raised supports or on a substrate of specified
properties, e.g., a layer of concrete of specified thickness or a sand-bed of certain
conductivity. All this and the attitude of the test item should be specified in the relevant

A-5 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 305

specification. Special attention must be paid to the surface conditions of the test item
to see that its finish is clean or in accordance with the relevant requirements. The
heating effect on the test item will be largely affected by the condition of its external
surfaces. Care must therefore be exercised in handling the test item, especially in
avoiding oil films and in ensuring that the surface finish and its underlay are fully
representative of production standards. Temperature sensors should be attached to
the test item as required (but see also paragraph 5.3).

A.7. INTERPRETATION OF RESULTS

The test item specification should indicate the permitted changes in the external
conditions and/or performance of the item under test after exposure to the required
level of irradiation for certain durations. In addition to such mandatory requirements,
the following aspects of interpretation may be considered:

A.7.1. Comparison with Field Experience

The effects of exposing material to solar radiation are well documented (references p
and q) (see also paragraphs 7.2 and 7.3). Any marked differences between the
expected effects and the behavior under test conditions should be investigated and the
basic cause established, i.e., whether caused by the test equipment or procedure, or
by some peculiarity in the test item.

A.7.2. Thermal Effects

The maximum surface and internal temperatures attained by materiel will depend on:

a. the temperature of the ambient air.

b. the intensity of radiation.

c. the air velocity.

d. the duration of exposure.

e. the thermal properties of the materiel itself, e.g., surface reflectance, size
and shape, thermal conductance, and specific heat.

Materiel can attain temperatures in excess of 60 °C if fully exposed to solar radiation in


an ambient temperature as low as 35 to 40 °C. The surface reflectance of an object
affects its temperature rise from solar heating to a major extent; changing the finish
from a dark color, for example, to a gloss white will effect a considerable reduction in
temperature. Conversely, a pristine finish designed to reduce temperature can be
expected to deteriorate in time resulting in an increase in temperature (reference r).
Most materials are selective reflectors, i.e., their spectral reflectance changes with
wavelength. For instance, paints, in general, are poor infrared reflectors although they

A-6 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 305

may be very efficient in the visible region. Furthermore, the spectral reflectance of
many materials changes sharply in the visible (producing a color sensation to the
human eye) and in the near infrared. It is important, therefore, that the spectral energy
distribution of the radiation source(s) used in any simulated test should closely
duplicate that of natural radiation.

A.7.3. Degradation of Materials

The combined effects of solar radiation, atmospheric gases, temperature, humidity


changes, etc., are often collectively termed 'weathering,' and result in the 'ageing' and
ultimate destruction of most organic materials (e.g., plastics, rubbers, paints, timber,
etc.). Many materials that give satisfactory service in temperate regions have been
found to be completely unsuitable for use under the more adverse conditions of the
tropics. Typical effects are the rapid deterioration and breakdown of paints, the
cracking and disintegration of cable sheathing, and the fading of pigments. The
breakdown of a material under weathering usually results not from a single reaction,
but from several individual reactions of different types occurring simultaneously, often
with interacting effects (reference s and x). Although solar radiation, principally the
ultraviolet, resulting in photo-degradation is often the major factor, its effects can
seldom be separated in practice from those of other weathering factors. An example is
the effect of ultraviolet radiation on polyvinyl chloride, where the apparent effects of
ultraviolet radiation alone are small, but its susceptibility to thermal breakdown, in
which oxygen probably plays a major role, is markedly increased. Unfortunately,
artificial tests occasionally produce abnormal defects that do not occur under
weathering. This can be often attributed to one or more of the following causes:

a. Many laboratory sources of ultraviolet radiation differ considerably from


natural solar radiation in spectral energy distribution. In some cases (e.g.
fluorescent lamps) the infrared energy of the source is significantly less
than that of true solar radiation, resulting in a surface temperature during
the test that is much lower than it would be in outdoor conditions.

b. When the intensity of ultraviolet, temperature, humidity, etc. are


increased to obtain accelerated effects, the rate of the individual
reactions (that occur under normal exposure conditions), are not
necessarily increased to the same extent.

c. The artificial tests, in general, do not simulate all the natural weathering
factors.

A.8. HAZARDS AND PERSONNEL SAFETY

A.8.1. General

The complex equipment employed for solar radiation testing purposes will necessarily
call for operation and maintenance by a skilled test staff, not only to ensure the

A-7 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 305

prescribed performance of the test, but also because of the various health and safety
hazards that have to be considered.

A.8.2. Ultraviolet Radiation

The most obvious dangers that have to be guarded against are those associated with
the harmful effects of high intensity radiation in the near ultraviolet region. In natural
sunlight, the eyes are protected in two ways; the brightness of the sun makes it almost
impossible to look directly at it, and the ultraviolet radiation is considerably attenuated
by the atmosphere. These protections may not apply to artificial sources. The eyes
must be protected by filtered goggles or viewing apertures, particularly when setting up
the equipment (due to the point source and high UV component of these sources,
sunglasses may increase the danger). All testing personnel should be warned that
severe eye damage can result from only short exposure to unfiltered radiation from arc-
type lamps. Serious erythema (sunburn) of exposed skin will also occur. Koller
(reference d) states the ultraviolet radiation of sunlight is a major causal factor in
cancer of the skin in the white population of the USA (see also reference aa). The use
of suitable protective clothing including protection of the head and hands is therefore
highly recommended, even when working in test enclosures irradiated by filtered
sources.

A.8.3. Ozone and Harmful Fumes

Another serious health hazard arising from the use of xenon and other arc lamps is
the possible buildup of local toxic concentrations of ozone during the testing period.
However, the maximum production of ozone occurs at the initial switching on of the
lamp, and thereafter the hot envelope of the lamp tends to degrade the ozone back to
oxygen. Where forced-air cooling is employed, this cooling air should be sucked out
and removed from the building and not blown into the lamp housing. In this way, the
ozone hazard can be largely eliminated. Suitable detecting and measuring
equipment is commercially available (reference t). The combined effects of heat and
ultraviolet radiation on certain plastics (e.g., melamine laminates) may also produce
toxic fumes. Particular care should therefore be taken in the choice of materials used
in the construction of a test facility.

A.8.4. Risk of Lamp Explosions

The use of high-pressure xenon discharge lamps as the primary radiation source can
also result in serious accidents unless a well-planned code of practice for the handling
of these arc discharge tubes has been specified and is adhered to. All such lamps
(whether hot or cold, used or new) have a liability to explode violently by reason of the
considerable internal pressure (two to three atmospheres when cold, but up to twenty
atmospheres when hot). There should be no visible dirt or oil on the envelope, so
regular cleaning with detergent and alcohol is necessary using cotton gloves and face
protection during such cleaning. When cold lamps are to be stored, the effects of
explosion may be limited by two layers of 0.25 mm thick polycarbonate sheet.

A-8 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 305

Particular care must be taken to limit the spread of chain reaction breakdowns in
multi-lamp equipments. It is possible to use armor plate glass for the dual purpose of
protection against lamp explosions and as a corrective filter. Individual lamp records
should be kept as a matter of routine so as to be able to detect abnormal
voltage/current behavior.

A.8.5. Electric Shock

Normal electric shock preventive measures must, of course, be adopted, particularly in


the case of the high voltage igniter systems used with arc lamps. In some xenon
lamps, the arc ignition pulse exceeds 60 kV, and an interlock system is therefore
essential.

A-9 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 305

TABLE A-1: Detailed spectral distribution of global radiation

SPECTRAL BANDWIDTH IRRADIANCE IRRADIANCE


REGION (m) (W/m2) (%)
Ultra-violet* 0.28 - 0.36 32 2.9
0.36 - 0.40 36 3.2
0.40 - 0.44 56 5.0
0.44 - 0.48 73 6.5
0.48 - 0.52 71 6.3
Visible
0.52 - 0.56 65 5.8
0.56 - 0.64 121 10.8
** 0.64 - 0.68 55 4.9
0.68 - 0.72 52 4.6
0.72 - 0.78 67 6.0
.78 - 1.0 176 15.7
1.0 - 1.2 108 9.7
1.2 - 1.4 65 5.8
Infra-red 1.4 - 1.6 44 3.9
1.6 - 1.8 29 2.6
1.8 - 2.0 20 1.8
2.0 - 2.5 35 3.1
2.5 - 3.0 15 1.4
Totals 1120 100.0

* Note: Radiation shorter than 0.30 m reaching the Earth's surface is insignificant.

** This bandwidth may apply to either the visible or IR spectrum.

A-10 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 305

A.9. REFERENCES

a. Hirt, R.C., Schmitt, R.G., Searle, N.D., Sullivan, A.P., “Ultraviolet


Spectral Energy Distribution of Natural Sunlight and Accelerated Test
Light Sources”, Journal of the Optical Society of America, July 1960,
Vol. 50, p. 706.

b. Gibson, D.W., Weinard, J., “Studies of Spectral Energy Distribution of


Different Light Sources in Connection with Solar Simulation”, Institute of
Environmental Sciences, Illinois, 1962 Proceedings, p. 453.

c. Smolkin, M.N., Berdikov, N.B., Zeyster, L. F., Gilevish, G., “The Spectral
Radiant Intensity of the Light of the DXeSh-10C0B and DXeR-6000
Xenon Lamps”, Soviet Journal of Optical Technology, 1968 ISS.3, p. 11.

d. Koller, L.R., Ultraviolet Radiation, Wiley, 2nd Edition, 1965.

e. Prideaux, G.F., “An Artificial Sunshine Solarium”, Illuminating


Engineering, 1946, Vol. 12, p.762.

f. Kruger, R., “Project Assess - a Report of a Long Term Solar Simulation


Test”, Institution of Environment Sciences, 1966 Proceedings, p. 271.

g. Judd, D.B., MacAdam, D.L., Wyszecki, G., “Spectral Distribution of


Typical Daylight as a Function of Correlated Color Temperature”, Journal
of the Optical Society of America, August 1964, vol. 54, p. 1031.

h. Boettner, E.A., Miedler, L.H., “Simulating the Solar Spectrum with a


Filtered High-pressure Xenon Lamp”, Applied Optics, 1963, vol. 2,
p. 105.

i. Castle, J.A., “Modular Xenon Solar Simulation of Large Area Application”


Institution of Environmental Sciences, Illinois, USA 1967 Proceedings,
p. 687.

j. Harmon, R.N., “Four-foot Solar Simulation System”, Institute of


Environmental Sciences, 1966 Proceedings, p. 531.

k. “Standardized Procedures in the North American Continent for the


Calibration of Solar Pyranometers”, Solar Energy, Oct-Dec 1966, Vol. 10,
p. 182.

l. Robinson, N. (Ed), Solar Radiation, Elsevier Press, 1966

m. Radiation Instruments and Measurements, International Geophysical


Year Manual, Part VI, 1958, Pergamon Press.

A-11 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 305

n. Drummond, A.S., Hickey, J.R., “Measurement of the Total Flux and its
Spectral Components in Solar Simulation Systems with Special
reference to the Extra-terrestrial Radiation”, Solar Energy, 1967, Vol. 11,
No. 1.

o. Hickey, J.R., “Correlation of Monochromator and Filter Radiometry


Determinations of the Spectral Distribution in Large Solar Simulators”,
Institute of Environmental Sciences and American Society of Testing and
Materials, International Symposium on Solar Radiation Proceedings,
p. 95-105.

p. Greathouse, G.A., Wassel, C.J., Deterioration of Materials, Reinhold,


New York, 1954.

q. Folie, M., ‘‘Contribution a l'etude du Vieillissement des Materiaux


Macromoleculaires Synthetiques EDF’’, Bulletin de la Direction des
Etudes et Recherches, Serie B, Reseaux Electriques Materiels
Electriques No 2, 1969, p. 115-152.

r. Baker, P.W., “'The Simulation of Solar Radiant Energy”, Environmental


Engineering Quarterly, June 1963, p. 17-19 and Sept 1963, p. 14-17.

s. Langshaw, H.J.M., “The Weathering of High Polymers” Plastics,


Jan 1960, Vol. 25, p. 40-45.

t. Wartburg, A.F., Brewer, A.W., Lodge Jr, J.P., “Evaluation of a


Coulometric Ozone Sensor” Paper presented at 138th Meeting of
American Chemical Society (Sept 1960)

u. Arveson, J., “Measurement of Spectral Irradiance”, Handbook of Solar


Simulation for Thermal Vacuum Testing, Section 9B Institution of
Environmental Sciences, Illinois, 1968.

v. Thekaekara, M.P., “The Solar Constant and the Solar Spectrum


Measured from a Research Aircraft”, NASA TR R-351, Washington, DC,
Oct 1970.

w. Davis, A., Gardiner, D., Polymer Deg. and Stab. 1982 4, 145.

x. Davis, A., Sims, D., Weathering of Polymers, Elsevier 1983.

y. “Measurement of Sunshine and Solar and Terrestrial Radiation (Met 0


919f)”, London, Meteorological Office, Handbook of Meteorological
Instruments, 2nd Edition, Vol. 6, 1982.

A-12 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 305

z. “Guide to Meteorological Instruments and Methods of Observation”,


Geneva, World Meteorological Organization (WMO), 8th Edition, 1983.

aa. Urbach, F. (Ed), The Biological Effects of Ultraviolet Radiation,


Pergamon Press, 1969.

A-13 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 305

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

A-14 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 306

METHOD 306
HUMID HEAT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE ........................................................................................... 1-1


1.1. PURPOSE ................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2. APPLICATION........................................................................................... 1-1
1.3. LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................ 1-1
CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE .......................................................................... 2-1
2.1. EFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT ........................................................... 2-1
2.2. DISCUSSION ............................................................................................ 2-1
2.2.1. Synergism .......................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.2. Exposure duration .............................................................................. 2-2
2.2.3. Test time compression ....................................................................... 2-2
2.3. TEST TYPES ............................................................................................ 2-2
2.3.1. Test type 1 - Cyclic ............................................................................. 2-2
2.3.2. Test type 2 - Steady State .................................................................. 2-3
2.3.3. Choice of test type.............................................................................. 2-3
2.4. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS........................................................... 2-3
2.4.1. Temperature-humidity ........................................................................ 2-3
2.4.2. Test duration ...................................................................................... 2-4
CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST
INSTRUCTION ............................................................................... 3-1
CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES .................................... 4-1
4.1. TEST FACILITY ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.2. CONTROLS .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.3. TEST INTERRUPTIONS ........................................................................... 4-1
4.4. TEST PROCEDURE ................................................................................. 4-1
4.4.1. Preparation for test. ............................................................................ 4-2
4.4.2. Procedure I - Cycling .......................................................................... 4-2
4.4.3. Procedure II - Steady State ................................................................ 4-2
CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF the TEST RESULTS ......................................... 5-1
CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................. 6-1
ANNEX A Physical Phenomena Associated With Humidity .................................. A-1
A.1. CONDENSATION ........................................................................................ A-1
A.2. ADSORPTION .............................................................................................. A-1
A.3. ABSORPTION .............................................................................................. A-1
A.4. DIFFUSION .................................................................................................. A-2
A.5. BREATHING................................................................................................. A-2

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 306

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 306

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE

NOTE: METHOD 300, GENERAL GUIDANCE AND REQUIREMENTS,


CONTAINS INFORMATION NECESSARY TO CONDUCT THE TEST
PROCEDURES OF THIS METHOD, AND SHALL BE USED IN COMBINATION
WITH THIS TEST METHOD.

1. SCOPE

1.1. PURPOSE

The high humidity tests are used to determine the effects of high humidity and
temperature on materiel in storage or use.

1.2. APPLICATION

This Method is applicable to materiel likely to be stored or used wherever high levels of
relative humidity can exist, or to provide an indication of potential problems associated
with humidity. Further information on high temperatures and humidity is provided in
AECTP 200, Category 230.

1.3. LIMITATIONS

This Method does not consider all of the effects related to the natural environment and,
therefore, it is preferable to test materiel at appropriate natural sites. Not all of the
"aggravated" test procedures necessarily simulate any naturally-occurring climatic
condition, but may have a relationship to high temperature and humidity conditions
anticipated in enclosed areas. The relationship of the procedures in this Method to the
effects on non-metallic materials has not been evaluated. This document does not
address condensation resulting from changes of altitude for airborne equipment.
Additionally, it does not include the synergistic effects of high humidity combined with
biological and chemical contaminants, nor does it consider situations in which liquid
water may be trapped within packages and retained for substantial periods.

1-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 306

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

1-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 306

CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE

2. TEST GUIDANCE

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8.

2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT

1. Humidity has physical and chemical effects on materiel; the temperature and
humidity variations can also trigger condensation inside the materiel. Typical effects of
humid heat include:

a. Swelling or deterioration of materials due to water absorption.

b. Drop in mechanical strength.

c. Change in thermal and electrical characteristics of insulating materials.

d. Electrical short circuits due to condensation.

e. Seizing of moving parts due to corrosion and contamination of lubricants.

f. Galvanic corrosion of metals.

g. Micro-environments caused by trapped moisture.

h. Loss of elasticity.

i. Acceleration of chemical reactions.

j. Acceleration of biological actions.

k. Deterioration of electrical and electronic components.

2. Some of these effects can only be observed after a sufficient lapse of time or
are simply initiated by humid heat.

2.2. DISCUSSION

All of the procedures in this Method include a degree of compromise as explained


below. It may be that a complete understanding of the test item in the service
environment may only be possible by exposure to the actual service environment.

2-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 306

2.2.1. Synergism

The naturally-occurring, highly complex environment associated with the tropic and
sub-tropic areas of the world and other areas in which combinations of high
temperature and relative humidity are found, cannot be duplicated in a laboratory
chamber. Bacteria, fungus, chemical contaminants, etc., combine to form an
environment that is unique to warm, humid climates. Exaggerated synergistic effects
can also exist within closed containers/spaces, and may include contamination from
various sources.

2.2.2. Exposure duration

Two test duration approaches are included. The first is to expose the test item to
realistic combinations of temperature and humidity for periods of time directly
corresponding to the service exposure. While this has the advantage giving some
correlation between laboratory and service results, test durations may become
prohibitively long. The next alternative is to expose the test item to exaggerated
temperature and humidity conditions for a relatively short test duration. This approach
using test time compression has the disadvantage of not being able to determine if
laboratory test results correspond to actual service exposure.

2.2.3. Test Time Compression

In some situations, equipment will be exposed to highly humid environments,


occasionally or periodically rather than constantly. In these situations, a period of
laboratory exposure may be equivalent to a greater period of service. Based on the life
cycle environmental profile, the degree of time compression should be estimated in
order to establish a realistic perspective for the laboratory test results.

2.3. TEST TYPES

See Method 300 Chapter 1.

Two types of testing are available for this Method:

2.3.1. Test Type 1 - Cyclic

This test simulates the temperature and humidity variations for the number of 24-hour
cycles specified in the test program. It represents the storage and transit cycles of the
B2 (wet-hot) and B3 (humid-hot coastal desert) climatic areas detailed in AECTP 200,
Leaflet 2311. The cycles proposed for conducting this test are the so-called "induced"
conditions when the materiel is used or stored in these regions in places having little or
no ventilation (closed light-duty shelter, for example), but are influenced by diurnal
variations. Another cycle that is more severe than the induced cycles is also proposed.
It is used when it is necessary to detect quickly the potential weak points in the
materiel. The cyclic test is more suitable for revealing the effects of condensation and
breathing (see Annex A).

2-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 306

2.3.2. Test Type 2 - Steady State

This test simulates the relatively stable temperature and humidity conditions of the
natural environment observed in some warm tropical, wooded, and very rainy areas
characteristic of the B1 (wet-warm) climatic area detailed in AECTP 200, Category
230. It is also used to simulate the conditions encountered inside certain poorly
ventilated enclosed spaces. Steady state testing is more suitable for revealing the
effects of absorption and adsorption phenomena (see Annex A).

2.3.3. Choice of Test Type

The choice of the test type and its associated parameters can be made based on the
environmental requirements for the materiel, the zone and the expected use
circumstances, the safety and criteria for acceptability of the materiel to be tested, and
the expected duration of the exposure to humid heat. Test type 1 should be selected if
the materiel is exposed to a cyclic thermal environment, and test type 2 when the
thermal environment is essentially unchanging.

NOTE: When making this choice it is important to review all the foreseeable
cases of use of the materiel in order to select only the most severe
environments/tests.

2.4. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS

See Method 300 Chapters 1, 4, and 8.

2.4.1. Temperature-humidity

2.4.1.1. Cycling test

a. For the hot, humid climatic regions of the world, the cycle should be
chosen from Table 1 for category B2 (cycle 1) and B3 (cycle 2), that
represent diurnal temperature and humidity conditions encountered when
the thermal effects of the sun must be considered, when humidity is high,
and when ventilation is inadequate.

b. The aggravated cycle (cycle 3) is shown in Figure 1. This cycle does not
attempt to simulate the meteorological cycle. It yields information more
quickly on the effects of humid heat on materiel. The temperature and
associated humidity levels are generally higher than those encountered
in nature, and the duration of exposure to high humidity is longer in each
cycle. This cycle helps to identify the parts of the materiel having
potential weaknesses.

2-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 306

Table 1: Diurnal cycles for category "B" environmental conditions

Transit and Storage Conditions


B2 (Cycle 1) B3 (Cycle 2)
Induced Air RH (%) Induced Air RH (%)
Temperature (°C) Temperature (°C)
33 69 35 67
32 70 34 72
32 71 34 75
31 72 34 77
30 74 33 79
31 75 33 80
34 64 36 70
38 54 40 54
42 43 44 42
45 36 51 31
51 29 57 24
57 22 62 17
61 21 66 16
63 20 69 15
63 19 71 14
62 20 69 16
60 21 66 18
57 22 63 21
50 32 58 29
44 43 50 41
38 54 41 53
35 59 39 58
34 63 37 62
33 58 35 63

2.4.1.2. Constant Temperature and Humidity Test

Relatively constant warm or hot highly humid conditions occur both naturally and as a
result of inadequate ventilation in enclosed areas where cyclic solar loading is not a
factor. For enclosed spaces, measured parameters should be used. For tests when
measured data may not be available, the following parameters (from IEC Publication
68, Part 2.1, Test Ca) are recommended: Temperature: 55 °C, Relative humidity:
95%. These parameters do not necessarily simulate any real environment, but will
create a relatively severe environment that may be used to reveal potential problem
areas.

2.4.2. Test Duration

1. Two methods for the determination of test duration are given. The first
(preferred) method (paragraphs 2.4.2.a & b) requires knowledge of chemistry together
with some expertise in the type of materiel under consideration. The second method
(paragraph 2.4.2.c) involves an arbitrary choice of test duration from a table for which

2-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 306

some guidance is given. It is recommended that the second method be used only if
the relevant knowledge and/or expertise are not available, or it is not necessary to
assess the life of the materiel.

NOTE: For materiel that is expected to be used often, frequent test item checks
are recommended (especially during long duration tests) for the early
identification of problems, so that testing may be stopped without wasted test
time. This approach is not recommended for materiel likely to be subjected to
long, dormant periods.

a. Materiel failures normally arise as a result of a chemical reaction or


sequence of reactions sometimes associated with mechanical stress.
In such a sequence, one chemical step is likely to determine the rate of
the overall sequence. Where these criteria apply, the test duration
should be derived as follows:

(1) Establish the likely failure modes.

(2) Determine the activation energies for the rate-determining


chemical steps in these failure modes. (The activation energy
controls the way in which a reaction rate varies with
temperature.)

(3) Apply the lowest of these activation energies in the Arrhenius


equation below:

k1 E 1 1
Acceleration factor = = e- R  T 1 - T 2 
k2

Where:
E = activation energy (J mol-1)
R = universal gas constant (8.314 J mol-1 K-1)
T1 = test temperature (K)
T2 = average storage temperature (K)
k1 = rate of reaction at temperature T1
k2 = rate of reaction at temperature T2

Acceleration factor = ratio of required storage life to test duration

2. If moisture penetration is assessed as being the rate-determining step and


no measured activation energy is available for that particular system, a value for E of
70,000 J mol-1 is recommended. As written, this equation requires constant test and
storage temperatures. Storage temperatures, however, may be averaged with little

2-5 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 306

loss of accuracy, and a short computer program may be used to solve the Arrhenius
equation where T varies cyclically.

b. In most cases, the test cycle conditions compare with the worst natural
conditions. They can, therefore, only be considered an accelerated test
when compared with average year-round conditions for the same
climatic area. In such cases, acceleration factors of 2 to 5 are
appropriate, the actual factor depending on the likely failure mode(s)
(see above together with probability data given in AECTP 200,
Category 230). Where all or most of the storage is to be in significantly
less severe conditions than those of the test, higher acceleration factors
are appropriate.

c. For cycle 3 (Figure 1: aggravated) - used primarily where insufficient


information is available to carry out the analysis in paragraph 2.4.2a
above, or where it is not necessary to assess the life of the materiel,
arbitrary numbers of cycles are given in Table 2. Selection from these
should consider the consequences of failure and the anticipated
duration of exposure.

Table 2: Durations

Severity No. of Cycles


A 6
B 12
C 21
D 56

(1) Time severity "A" is intended to demonstrate the short-term


effects of a humid environment, including those arising from
condensed surface moisture. It is, therefore, applicable to
materiel that is normally protected, whether in a fully conditioned
building or by a fully desiccated container, but that may be
subjected to occasional exposure to high humidities outside their
normal protected environment.

(2) Test severity "B" should be applied to equipment that is used in


semi-protected conditions but that may occasionally be exposed
to a humid atmosphere for longer periods of time. Severity "C"
should be applied to materiel that is in exposed locations or
subject to a humid atmosphere in its normal use location, e.g.,
field equipment, equipment mounted in unconditioned cabins,
armored vehicle equipment, etc.

2-6 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 306

(3) Severity "D" is applicable mainly to package testing or materiel


prepared for long-term storage, but the test duration may be
extended to a period approaching real (life) time requirements
derived as in paragraph 2.4.2.a above.

d If it is determined that the test item may become unsafe on exposure to


high temperature and relative humidity conditions, consideration should
be given to extending the length of the test and/or increasing the
number of items to be tested.

2-7 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 306

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

2-8 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 306

CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

3. INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

See Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6.

3-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 306

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 306

CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

4. TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

4.1. TEST FACILITY

See Method 300 Chapter 5. The inside of the enclosure must be designed in such a
way as to prevent condensation from falling on the test item from the ceiling or walls.
The enclosure must be vented to the atmosphere to prevent pressure buildup inside
the enclosure.

4.2. CONTROLS

See Method 300 Chapters 3 and 4, and:

a. Monitoring and control of the humidity inside the test enclosure must be
accomplished by using psychrometric systems or with sensors that are
not affected by condensation.

b. The speed of the air across the psychrometric sensors must be at least
4.5 m/s in order to achieve the required evaporation and sensor
response. (Diffusers can be used to obtain this speed in the vicinity of
the probe.) Deflectors or screens can be installed around the test item
if necessary. In order to prevent heating of the psychrometer sensors,
the sensors shall be either installed upstream of any fan used to create
the air velocity, or far enough downstream to not be affected by fan
heat.

c. The humidity and temperature recordings shall be made from sensors


separate from hose used to control the chamber environment.

d. Water used for both generating humidity and for wet bulb socks must be
essentially free of contaminants. Follow the guidance provided in
Method 300 Chapters 3 and 4.

4.3. TEST INTERRUPTIONS

See Method 300 Chapter 7.

4.4. TEST PROCEDURE

See Method 300 Chapter 3.

4-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 306

4.4.1. Preparation for Test.

Before beginning the test, determine the information specified in Method 300
Chapters 4 and 6, and conduct the test preparation procedure specified in Method 300
Chapter 2.

4.4.2. Procedure I - Cycling

This test consists of a 24-hour conditioning period (to ensure all items at any intended
climatic location will start with the same conditions), followed by a repeating 24-hour
temperature and humidity cycle for the number of cycles specified in the test plan.

Step 1. With the test item installed in the test chamber in its required
configuration, adjust the temperature to 23 ± 2 °C and
50 ± 5% RH, and maintain for 24 hours.

NOTE: This step may be omitted if the number of cycles to be carried out during
the test is sufficient to make the conditioning irrelevant.

Step 2. Adjust the temperature and relative humidity conditions to those


specified for the minimum temperature of the appropriate cycle.

Step 3. Perform the required temperature and humidity cycle for the
number of cycles specified in the test plan.

Step 4. Conduct test item performance checks as required by the test


plan and at the specified temperature-humidity conditions, and
record the results.

Step 5. At the end of the required number of cycles, adjust the


temperature and humidity conditions to standard ambient
conditions.

Step 6. Conduct an operational check and record the results for


comparison with pretest data.

4.4.3. Procedure II - Steady State

This test consists of a 24-hour conditioning period (to ensure all items at any intended
climatic location will start with the same conditions), followed by subjecting the test item
to stabilized temperature and humidity conditions for a given period of time.

Step 1. With the test item installed in the test chamber in its required
configuration, adjust the temperature to 23 ± 2 °C and
50 ± 5% RH, and maintain for 24 hours.

4-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 306

Step 2. Adjust the temperature and humidity levels to those specified.

Step 3. Maintain the required test conditions for the time specified in the
test plan.

Step 4. If required, operate the test item and record the results.

Step 5. Stabilize the temperature and humidity at standard ambient


conditions.

Step 6. Conduct an operational check and record the results for


comparison with pretest data.

4-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 306

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

4-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 306

CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

5. EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

See Method 300 Chapter 9.

5-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 306

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

5-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 306

CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

6. REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

See Method 300 Chapter 10.

6-1 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 306

70

65

60

55

50
Temp C

45

40

35

30

25

20
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52
Time (hrs)

NOTE: Maintain the relative humidity at 95  4% at all times except that during
the descending temperature periods the relative humidity may drop to as low
as 85%.

FIGURE 1: Aggravated Cycle (cycle 3)

6-2 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 306

ANNEX A PHYSICAL PHENOMENA ASSOCIATED WITH HUMIDITY

A.1. CONDENSATION

Condensation is precipitation of water vapor on a surface whose temperature is lower


than the dew point of the ambient air. As a consequence, the water is transformed
from the vapor state to the liquid state.

a. The dew point depends on the quantity of water vapor in the air. The
dew point, the absolute humidity and the vapor pressure are directly
interdependent.

b. Condensation occurs on a test item when the temperature at the surface


of the item placed in the test chamber is lower than the dew point of the
air in the chamber. As a result, the item may need to be preheated to
prevent condensation.

c. If the test item has a low thermal constant, condensation can only occur if
the air temperature increases abruptly, or if the relative humidity is close
to 100%.

d. Slight condensation may be observed on the inside surface of box


structures resulting from a decrease in the ambient temperature.

e. Generally speaking, condensation can only be detected with certainty by


visual inspection. This, however, is not always possible, particularly with
small objects having a rough surface.

A.2. ADSORPTION

Adsorption is adherence of water vapor molecules to a surface whose temperature is


higher than the dew point. The quantity of moisture that can adhere to the surface
depends on the type of material, its surface condition, and the vapor pressure. An
estimation of the effects due solely to adsorption is not an easy matter because the
effects of absorption, which occurs at the same time, are generally more pronounced.

A.3. ABSORPTION

Absorption is the accumulation of water molecules within a material. The quantity of


water absorbed depends in part on the water content of the ambient air. The process
of absorption occurs continuously until equilibrium is reached. The penetration speed
of the molecules in the water increases with temperature.

A-1 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 306

A.4. DIFFUSION

Diffusion is the movement of water molecules through a material caused by a


difference in partial pressures. An example of diffusion often encountered in
electronics is the penetration of water vapor through organic coatings such as those on
capacitors or semiconductors, or through the sealing compound in the box.

A.5. BREATHING

Breathing is air exchange between a hollow space and its surroundings caused by
temperature variations. This commonly induces condensation inside the hollow space.

A-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 307

METHOD 307
IMMERSION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE ........................................................................................... 1-1


1.1. PURPOSE ................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2. APPLICATION........................................................................................... 1-1
1.3. LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................ 1-1
CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE .......................................................................... 2-1
2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT ........................................................ 2-1
2.2. GENERAL ................................................................................................. 2-1
2.3. SEQUENCE .............................................................................................. 2-1
2.4. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS........................................................... 2-1
2.4.1. Conditioning ....................................................................................... 2-2
2.4.2. Depth of Immersion ............................................................................ 2-2
2.4.3. Depth of Fording ................................................................................ 2-3
2.4.4. Materiel Fording ................................................................................. 2-3
2.4.5. Duration of Immersion or Exposure .................................................... 2-4
2.4.6. Temperature....................................................................................... 2-4
CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST
INSTRUCTION ............................................................................... 3-1
CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES .................................... 4-1
4.1. TEST FACILITY ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.2. CONTROLS .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.3. TEST INTERRUPTION ............................................................................. 4-1
4.4. TEST PROCEDURE ................................................................................. 4-1
4.4.1. Preparation for Test............................................................................ 4-2
4.4.2. Procedure I - Immersion ..................................................................... 4-2
4.4.3. Procedure II - Fording ........................................................................ 4-3
CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF TEST RESULTS ............................................... 5-1
CHAPTER 6 REFERENCEs AND RELATED DOCUMENTS .............................. 6-1

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 307

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 307

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE

NOTE: METHOD 300, GENERAL GUIDANCE AND REQUIREMENTS,


CONTAINS INFORMATION NECESSARY TO CONDUCT THE TEST
PROCEDURES OF THIS METHOD, AND SHALL BE USED IN COMBINATION
WITH THIS TEST METHOD.

1. SCOPE

1.1. PURPOSE

Immersion or fording tests are conducted to determine if materiel can withstand


immersion or partial immersion in water and operate as required during or following
immersion.

1.2. APPLICATION

This method is applicable to materiel that may be exposed to partial or complete


immersion, with or without operation. The immersion test has traditionally been
considered to be more severe than the rain test (Method 310) for determining the
penetrability of materiel. The immersion test may, in some cases, be used to verify
watertightness in lieu of a rain test provided that the materiel configuration would be
the same for both situations and the method of water ingress is well understood.
However, there are documented situations in which the impact of rain causes
pumping of water across seals during the rain test that does not occur during the
immersion test, as seals are held tight against the backing plate by static pressure.
Therefore in most cases both tests should be carried out.

1.3. LIMITATIONS

Immersion tests are not intended to be used for buoyant items unless the life cycle
profile identifies specific applications where restraints (including stacking) could hold
the materiel under water.

1-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 307

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

1-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 307

CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE

2. TEST GUIDANCE

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8.

2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Penetration of water into materiel or packaging enclosures can result in problems


such as:

a. Fouling of lubricants between moving parts.

b. Formation of electrically conductive paths that may cause electrical or


electronic equipment to malfunction or become unsafe to operate.

c. Corrosion due to direct exposure to the water or to the relatively high


humidity levels caused by the water.

d. Impairment of the burning qualities of explosives, propellants, fuels, etc.

e. Failure of vehicle engines to operate.

2.2. GENERAL

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8.

2.3. SEQUENCE

See Method 300 Chapter 8. Performing the immersion test before and after
structural tests such as shock and vibration will aid in determining the test item's
resistance to dynamic tests.

2.4. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS

See Method 300 Chapters 1, 4, and 8. This method incorporates the following
variable parameters to be used as appropriate:

a. Conditioning temperature.

b. Depth of immersion or fording.

c. Duration of immersion.

d. Water temperature with respect to the test item temperature.

2-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 307

2.4.1. Conditioning

This test usually includes heating of the test item to establish a pressure differential
(on cooling) to determine whether the seals or gaskets leak under relatively low
pressure differential, and to induce expansion/contraction of materials.

a. Three options are provided for the conditioning of the test item:

(1) 27 C above the water temperature to represent exposure to solar


heating immediately prior to immersion.

(2) 10 C above the water temperature to represent a typical


temperature difference between materiel and water.

(3) Equal to the water temperature to represent situations in which


little or no temperature differential exists. This may also be used
for items for which large enough conditioning facilities are not
available provided that the depth of immersion is adjusted to result
in the same pressure differential.

b. It is recommended that the duration of conditioning immediately prior to


immersion be at least two hours following temperature stabilization of the
test item.

2.4.2. Depth of Immersion

2.4.2.1. Complete Immersion

For testing the integrity of a test item, a 1 m representative covering depth should be
chosen, or an equivalent pressure be applied. The relevant depth/pressure equation
follows:
P = 9.8d

Where d = depth of the water in metres, and

P = pressure in kPa.

NOTE: The equivalent head of seawater is 0.975 times the head of fresh water
for the same pressure difference.

2.4.2.2. Partial Immersion

Where materiel is unlikely to be completely immersed either due to anticipated water


depths or to its ability to float, and being unlikely to be restrained, a partial immersion

2-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 307

test may be appropriate. In this case, depths should be specified as being measured
from the base of the materiel rather than from the top as in paragraph 2.4.2.1.

2.4.3. Depth of Fording

The fording test may also be used to cover the requirements of STANAG 2805,
"Minimum Fordability and Floatation Requirements for Tactical Vehicles and Guns,
and Minimum Immersion Requirements for Combat Equipment Normally Installed or
Carried in Open Vehicles or Trailers" in which the following depths are prescribed

2.4.3.1. Shallow Fording

a. Tanks and armored cars.

(1) Light tanks and armored cars – 1 m.

(2) Other tanks (slightly more ground compression) - 1.05 m.

b. Vehicles under 2 ton payload - 0.5 m.

c. Other vehicles - 0.75 m.

2.4.3.2. Deep Fording

It is essential that all tactical vehicles and guns, either with built-in waterproofing or by
the use of waterproofing kits, should be able to deep ford six (6) minutes in fresh or
salt water, to the depths indicated below (the depth to take into account ramp angle
as well as wave height):

a. Fully enclosed armored vehicles should be able to deep ford to the top of
the turret. (Alternatively, these vehicles to be fitted with flotation
equipment.)

b. All other prime movers or self-propelled guns, except trailed loads,


should be able to deep ford 1.5 m.

c. All trailers or towed guns should be capable of complete immersion.


(Alternatively, these equipments should be capable of flotation.)

2.4.4. Materiel Fording

Materiel designed to be transported on open vehicles and trailers (such as equipment


trailers) should be capable of withstanding partial immersion as anticipated during
fording exercises. Examples of fording depths for this type of materiel are as follow:

2-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 307

a. S-280 shelter: 53 cm

b. S-250 shelter: 76 cm

2.4.5. Duration of Immersion or Exposure

The duration of immersion should typify that anticipated during use. If this duration is
unknown, a 30-minute immersion period is considered adequate to develop leakage
if it is to occur. Fording durations (other than as specified in paragraph 2.4.3.2)
should be a minimum of one hour, and may be extended if justified by the anticipated
life cycle profile.

2.4.6. Temperature

Experience has shown that a temperature differential between the test item and the
water can affect the outcome (leakage) of an immersion test. Increasing the test item
temperature above the water temperature may be more realistic and will give a more
reliable verification of its watertightness. Establishing a specific temperature
differential for fording tests is often impractical due to the size of the materiel.

2-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 307

CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

3. INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

In addition to the information specified in Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6, the water
and test item temperatures are required, as well as fording/immersion depths and
durations.

3-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 307

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 307

CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

4. TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

See Method 300 Chapters 3, 4, and 5 for test facility, test conditions and test control
information.

4.1. TEST FACILITY

In addition to that specified in Method 300 Chapter 5, the following apply:

a. For immersion tests, in addition to a chamber or cabinet capable of


conditioning the test item to the required temperature, the required test
apparatus should include a water container that can achieve a covering
depth of 1 m (or other required depth) of water over the uppermost point
of the test item and maintain the test item at that depth. To represent
greater depths, it may be necessary to apply air pressure to the surface
of the water.

b. For fording tests, the facility should be equipped with a tie-down


capability to prevent buoyant test items from floating.

c. A water soluble dye such as fluorescein may be added to the water to aid
in locating water leaks.

4.2. CONTROLS

See Method 300 Chapters 3 and 4.

4.3. TEST INTERRUPTION

See Method 306 Chapter 7. Treat an interruption that results in less severe
conditions than specified as a "no test." The test item should be dried and the entire
test procedure repeated from the beginning. Any failure discovered during an
undertest condition should be treated as a failure. If more severe conditions than
intended are applied and a failure results, the test shall be repeated, if possible, on a
replacement item. If no failure occurs, the test need not be repeated.

4.4. TEST PROCEDURE

See Method 300 Chapter 6.

4-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 307

4.4.1. Preparation for Test

Before starting the test procedure, determine the information specified in Method 300
Chapters 4 and 6, and perform the test preparation procedure specified in Method
300 Chapter 2.

NOTE: No sealing, taping, caulking, etc., shall be used except as required in


the design specification for the test item.

a. When testing a shipping/storage container or transit case without the test


items enclosed, if possible, remove all dunnage, packing, padding
material, etc., that may absorb water, before the test so that leakage can
be detected. This option may not provide an adequate test of the
container if the seals are not representatively stressed because of the
absence of the contents.

b. Items that may experience immersion when mounted on or secured to a


carrying platform should be secured representatively. If representative of
the real life situation, stacking is an acceptable method of restraining
items under water.

4.4.2. Procedure I – Immersion

Step 1. If weight gain is likely to be an acceptable method of determining


leakage, weigh the test item.

Step 2. Three times immediately before the test, open and close (or
remove and replace) any doors, covers, etc., that would be
opened during normal use to ensure that any seals are functioning
properly and are not adhering to the sealing surfaces.

Step 3. Measure and record the immersion water temperature.

Step 4. Condition the test item as in paragraph 2.4.1 and record the
conditioning temperature and duration. The test item's sealed
areas (where appropriate) shall remain open throughout the
conditioning cycle. Also, materiel occasionally incorporates valves
or venting devices that may or may not be opened in normal
service use. If the test item incorporates such devices, open them
throughout the conditioning portion of the test.

Step 5. Close all sealed areas and valves; assemble the test item in its
test configuration and, as quickly as possible, immerse the test
item in water so that the uppermost point of the test item is

4-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 307

1 ± 0.1 m below the surface of the water, or as otherwise required


by the test plan. The orientation of the test item should represent
that of its expected in-service orientation. If several orientations
are possible, the most vulnerable shall be selected for this test.

Step 6. Following a 30-minute immersion period (or as otherwise specified


in the test plan), remove the test item from the water, wipe the
exterior surfaces dry (giving special attention to areas around
seals and relief valves) and, if applicable, equalize the air
pressure inside by activating any manual valves.

Step 7. If appropriate, re-weigh the test item.

Step 8. Open the test item and examine the interior and contents for
evidence of and quantity of leakage, and for probable areas where
the leakage occurred.

Step 9. If appropriate, conduct an operational check of the test item.

4.4.3. Procedure II - Fording

1. The fording test may be conducted in one of two ways: by towing or driving
the test item through water at the appropriate depth, or by securing the test item in a
tank and flooding the tank to the required depth.

Step 1. If weight gain is likely to be an acceptable method of determining


leakage, weigh the test item

Step 2. With the test item in its fording configuration, ensure that any drain
plugs or apparatus are closed, and either:

a. tow or drive the test item into the water at the required
depth or,

b. secure the test item in a watertight tank.

2. In either case, the orientation of the test item should represent that of its
expected in-service orientation, including the angle of entry and exit during fording. If
several orientations are possible, the worst case shall be selected for this test.

Step 3. If using the tank method, flood the tank to the required height
above the bottom of the test item.

Step 4. Maintain the test item in the water for a duration as determined in
paragraph 2.4.4.

4-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 307

Step 5. Either remove the test item from the water or drain the water from
the facility, and inspect the interior of the test item for evidence of
free water.

Step 6. Measure and record the amount of free water, and the probable
point(s) of entry. If appropriate, re-weigh the test item.

4-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 307

CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

5. EVALUATION OF TEST RESULTS

In addition to that specified in Method 300 Chapter 9, any evidence of water


penetration into the test item following this test must be assessed for its short and
long term effects. Consideration should be given to the effects of free water as well
as to the increase of relative humidity in closed containers following the evaporation
of any free water.

5-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 307

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

5-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 307

CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

6. REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

See Method 300 Chapter 10.

a. STANAG 2805, Minimum Fordability and Floatation Requirements for


Tactical Vehicles and Guns, and Minimum Immersion Requirements for
Combat Equipment Normally Installed or Carried in Open Vehicles or
Trailers for Mobile Equipment.

6-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 307

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

METHOD 308
MOULD GROWTH

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE ........................................................................................... 1-1


1.1. PURPOSE ................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2. APPLICATION........................................................................................... 1-1
1.3. LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................ 1-2
CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE .......................................................................... 2-1
2.1. EFFECTS OF MOULD GROWTH ............................................................. 2-1
2.1.1. Detrimental Effects ............................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2. Physical Interference .......................................................................... 2-2
2.1.3. Health and Aesthetic Factors ............................................................. 2-2
2.2. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS........................................................... 2-2
2.2.1. Temperature and Humidity ................................................................. 2-3
2.2.2. Test Duration ...................................................................................... 2-3
2.3. CHOICE OF TEST MOULD ...................................................................... 2-3
CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST
INSTRUCTION ............................................................................... 3-1
CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES .................................... 4-1
4.1. TEST FACILITY ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.2. CONTROLS .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.1. Humidity ............................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.2. Air Circulation ..................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.3. Steam Injection .................................................................................. 4-2
4.2.4. Chemicals .......................................................................................... 4-2
4.3. TEST INTERRUPTION ............................................................................. 4-2
4.4. TEST PROCEDURE ................................................................................. 4-4
4.4.1. Cleaning ............................................................................................. 4-4
4.4.2. Water Purity ....................................................................................... 4-4
4.4.3. Miscellaneous .................................................................................... 4-4
4.4.4. Test Preparation ................................................................................. 4-5
4.4.5. Control Items ...................................................................................... 4-7
4.4.6. Test Performance ............................................................................... 4-9
4.4.7. Inspection ......................................................................................... 4-10
4.4.8. Operation/Use .................................................................................. 4-10
4.4.9. Decontamination .............................................................................. 4-10
CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS ....................................... 5-1
CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................. 6-1
ANNEX A DECONTAMINATION OF TEST EQUIPMENT AND TEST ITEMS
AFTER EXPOSURE TO FUNGUS..................................................... A-1

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 308

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 308

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE

NOTE: METHOD 300, GENERAL GUIDANCE AND REQUIREMENTS,


CONTAINS INFORMATION NECESSARY TO CONDUCT THE TEST
PROCEDURES OF THIS METHOD, AND SHALL BE USED IN
COMBINATION WITH THIS TEST METHOD.

1. SCOPE

1.1. PURPOSE

The purpose of this mould growth test is to assess the extent to which the materiel
will support mould growth or how the mould growth may affect performance or use of
the materiel. The term "mould" as used throughout this document is synonymous
with "fungus". The primary objectives of the mould growth test are to determine:

a. If the materials comprising the materiel, or the assembled combination


of same, will support mould growth and, if so, what species. (See
Table 1 for the types of moulds.)

b. How rapidly moulds will grow on the materiel.

c. How any mould growth affects the materiel, its mission, and its safety for
use following the growth of mould on the materiel.

d. If the materiel can be stored effectively in a field environment.

e. If there are simple reversal processes, e.g., wiping off mould growth.

1.2. APPLICATION

Since microbial deterioration is a function of temperature and humidity and is an


inseparable condition of hot-humid tropics and the mid-latitudes, it must be
considered in the design of all standard, general-purpose materiel. This method is
used to determine if mould growth will occur and, if so, how it may degrade/impact
the use of the materiel.

NOTE 1: This test procedure and the accompanying preparation and post-test
analysis involve highly specialized techniques and potentially hazardous
organisms. Only technically qualified personnel (e.g., microbiologists) should
perform the test.

1-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

NOTE 2: Although the basic (documented) resistance of materials to mould


growth is helpful in the design of new equipment, the combination of materials,
the physical structure of combined materials, and the possible contamination of
resistant materials can result in the growth of fungus on materiel that would
otherwise be considered resistant. Care must therefore be exercised when
using documented evidence to justify waiving laboratory or natural environment
tests.

1.3. LIMITATIONS

This test is designed to obtain data on the susceptibility of materiel. It should not be
used for testing of basic materials since various other test procedures, including soil
burial, pure culture, mixed culture, and plate testing are available.

1-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

CHAPTER 2 GUIDANCE/REQUIREMENTS

2. GUIDANCE /REQUIREMENTS

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8.

2.1. EFFECTS OF MOULD GROWTH

Mould growth impairs the functioning or use of equipment by changing its physical
properties.

2.1.1. Detrimental Effects

The detrimental effects of mould growth are summarized as follows:

2.1.1.1. Direct Attack on Materials

Nonresistant materials are susceptible to direct attack as the moulds break the
materials down and use them as nutrients. This results in deterioration affecting the
physical properties of the material. Examples of nonresistant materials are:

a. Natural material. Products of natural origin are most susceptible to this


attack.

(1) Cellulosic materials (e.g., Wood, paper, natural fiber textiles, and
cordage).

(2) Animal-based and vegetable-based adhesives.

(3) Grease, oils, and many hydrocarbons.

(4) Leather.

b. Synthetic materials:

(1) PVC formulations (e.g., those plasticized with fatty acid esters).

(2) Certain polymers (e.g., polyesters, polyurethane and some


polyethers).

(3) Plastics that contain organic laminating materials or fillers.

(4) Paints and varnishes that contain susceptible constituents.

2-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

2.1.1.2. Indirect Attack on Materials

Damage to mould-resistant materials results from indirect attack when:

a. Mould growth on surface deposits of dust, grease, perspiration, and other


contaminants (that find their way onto materiel during manufacture or
accumulate during service) causes damage to the underlying material,
even though that material may be resistant to direct attack.

b. Metabolic waste products (i.e., organic acids) excreted by mould cause


corrosion of metals, etching of glass, or staining or degrading of plastics
and other materials.

c. The products of mould growth on adjacent materials that are


susceptible to direct attack come in contact with the resistant materials.

2.1.2. Physical Interference

Physical interference can occur as follows:

a. Electrical or electronic systems. Damage to electrical or electronic


systems may result from either direct or indirect attack. Mould growth
can form undesirable electrical conducting paths across insulating
materials, for example, or may adversely affect the electrical
characteristics of critically adjusted electronic circuits.

b. Optical systems. Damage to optical systems results primarily from


indirect attack. The mould growth can adversely affect light
transmission through the optical system, block delicate moving parts,
and change non-wetting surfaces to wetting surfaces with resulting loss
in performance.

2.1.3. Health and Aesthetic Factors

Mould growth on materiel can cause physiological problems (e.g., allergies) or be so


aesthetically unpleasant that the users will be reluctant to use the materiel.

2.2. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS

See Method 300 Chapters 1, 4, and 8.

The essential parameters for defining the test include temperature and humidity, test
duration, and test item configuration.

2-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

2.2.1. Temperature and Humidity

Since the combination of temperature and humidity is critical to microbial growth, it is


essential that these be maintained as specified in the procedure.

2.2.2. Test Duration

Twenty-eight days is the minimum test period to allow for mould germination,
breakdown of carbon-containing molecules, and degradation of material. Since
indirect effects and physical interference are not likely to occur in the relatively short
time frame of the mould test, extension of the exposure period to 84 days should be
considered if a greater degree of certainty (less risk) is required in determining the
existence or effect of mould growth.

2.3. CHOICE OF TEST MOULD

1. Two groups of moulds (U.S. and European) are commonly used and are listed
in Table 1. One group or the other should be used in toto, and adjusted, if
necessary, as in paragraph 2.3.b. The U.S.' five species of test moulds are included
in the U.S. National standard on environmental testing, MIL-STD-810, and seven in
the European standards. These organisms were selected because of their ability to
degrade materials, their worldwide distribution, and their stability. To aid in selection
of a species to supplement the selected group, the organisms have, where possible,
been identified with respect to the materials to which they are known to attack, and
must be selected accordingly.

a. Because the test item is not sterile before testing, other microorganisms
will be present on the surfaces. When the test item is inoculated with the
selected group of moulds, both these and the other organisms will
compete for available nutrients. It is not surprising to see organisms
other than the test moulds growing on the test item at the end of the test.

b. Additional species of moulds may be added to those required in this test


method. However, if additional moulds are used, their selection shall be
based on prior knowledge of specific material deterioration. For
example, penicillium funiculosum can be employed because of its
known specificity for degrading textiles.

2. In addition to the sequence guidance provided in Method 300 Chapter 8, the


following is applicable: This method should not be conducted after a salt fog (Method
309) test or a sand and dust test (Method 313). A heavy concentration of salt may
affect the germinating mould growth, and sand and dust can provide nutrients, thus
leading to a false indication of the biosusceptibility of the test item.

2-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

Table 1: Test Moulds

Mould Mould Sources Standard Materials Affected


Identification no.
USDA(1) ATCC(2)

Aspergillus niger QM 458 ATCC 6275 Eur. textiles, vinyl, etc.


Resistant to tanning
salts

Aspergillus terreus QM 82j ATCC 10690 Eur. haversack,


paperboard, paper

Paecilomyces varioti IAM 5001 Eur. plastics, leather

Penicillium funiculosum IAM 7013(3) Eur. textiles

Penicillium ochro-chloron QM 477 ATCC 9112 Eur. plastics, textiles

Scopulariopsis IAM 5146 Eur. rubber


brevicaulis

Trichoderme viride IAM 5061 Eur. plastics, textiles

Aspergillus flavus QM 380 ATCC 9643 U.S. leathers, textiles

Aspergillus versicolor QM 432 ATCC 11730 U.S. leather

Penicillium funiculosum QM 474 ATCC 11797 U.S. plastics, cotton fabric.

Chaetomium globosum QM 459 ATCC 6205 U.S. cellulose

Aspergillus niger QM 386 ATCC 9642 U.S. conformal coatings


and insulation

1/ U.S. Department of Agriculture Collection 2/ American Type Culture


Northern Regional Research Center 2301 Parklawn Drive
ARS Culture Collection Rockville, Maryland 20852
1815 North University Street
Peoria, Illinois 61604 3/ Institute of Applied Microbiology
University of Tokyo
(The mould may be distributed in a Tokyo, Japan
lyophilized state or on agar slants.)

2-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

3. INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

In addition to that specified in Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6, record the following
information:

a. Evidence of mould growth on the control cotton strips at the 7-day check
and at the end of the test (see paragraph 4.4.7).

b. Location of mould.

c. Narrative description of growth, including colors, areas covered, growth


patterns, and density of growth (and photographs, if necessary). See
Table 2.

d. Effect of moulds on performance or use:

(1) As received from chamber.

(2) After removal of mould, if appropriate.

e. Physiological or aesthetic considerations.

f. Types of moulds used.

3-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

CHAPTER 4 TEST PROCEDURES

4. TEST PROCEDURES

See Method 300 Chapters 3, 4, and 5.

4.1. TEST FACILITY

See Method 300 Chapter 5. Also see Annex A of this method for pre-test and post-
test decontamination guidance. In addition to the standard requirements for test
chambers, the following apply to chambers to be used for mould tests:

a. Construct the chamber and accessories in such a manner as to prevent


condensation from dripping on the test item.

b. Filter-vent the chamber to the atmosphere to prevent the buildup of


pressure and release of spores into the atmosphere.

c. Monitoring and control of the humidity inside the test enclosure must be
accomplished with psychrometric systems or with sensors that are not
affected by condensation.

d. The speed of the air across the psychrometric sensors must be at least
4.5 m/s in order to achieve the required evaporation and sensor
response. (Diffusers may be used to obtain this speed in the vicinity of
the probe.) Deflectors or screens can be installed around the test item if
necessary. In order to prevent heating of the psychrometer sensors, the
sensors shall either be installed upstream of any fan used to create the
air velocity or far enough downstream not to be affected by fan motor
heat.

e. The humidity and temperature recordings shall be made from sensors


separate from those used to control the chamber environment

4.2. CONTROLS

(See also paragraph 4.4.)

In addition to that provided in Method 300 Chapters 3 and 4, the following controls
apply to this test:

4.2.1. Humidity

In addition to the requirements appropriate for Method 506, humid heat, determine

4-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

the relative humidity by employing either solid-state sensors whose calibration is not
affected by water condensation or by an approved equivalent method such as
fast-reacting wet-bulb/dry-bulb sensors. Lithium chloride sensors are not
recommended because of their sensitivity to condensation.

a. When the wet-bulb control method is used, clean the wet-bulb assembly
and install a new wick for each test.

b. In order to produce the evaporation necessary for sensor measurement


of wet bulb temperature, the air velocity across the wet bulb shall not be
less than 4.5 metres per second.

c. Because heat from fan motors may affect temperature readings, do not
install wet- and dry-bulb sensors close to the discharge side of any local
fan or blower used to create the requirement of paragraph 4.2.1.b.

4.2.2. Air Circulation

Maintain free circulation of air around the test item and keep the contact area of
fixtures supporting the test item to a minimum.

4.2.3. Steam Injection

Do not inject steam directly into the test chamber working space where it may have
an adverse effect on the test item and microbial activity.

4.2.4. Chemicals

Unless otherwise specified:

a. All reagents shall conform to the specifications of the committee on


analytical reagents of the American Chemical Society, where such
specifications are available.

b. References to water shall be understood to mean water essentially free


of contaminants. Follow the guidance in Method 300 Chapters 3 and 4.

4.3. TEST INTERRUPTION

See Method 300 Chapter 7.

1. The mould test, unlike other environmental tests, involves living organisms. If
the test is interrupted, the fact that live organisms are involved must be considered.

4-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

a. If the interruption occurs during the first ten days of the test, the test
should be restarted from the beginning with either a new or cleaned test
item.

b. If the interruption occurs late in the test cycle, examine the test item for
evidence of mould growth. If the test item is biosusceptible, there is no
need for a retest. If the controls exhibit viable growth but there is no
evidence of mould growth on the test item, follow the guidance given
below.

(1) Lowered temperature. A lowering of the test chamber


temperature generally will retard mould growth. If the relative
humidity has been maintained, reestablish the test conditions
and continue the test from the point where the temperature fell
below the prescribed tolerances. If not, see (3) below.

(2) Elevated temperature. Elevated temperatures may have a


drastic effect on mould growth. A complete re-initiation of the
test is required if:

(a) The temperature exceeds 40 C, or

(b) The temperature exceeds 31 C for 4 hours or more, or

(c) There is evidence of deterioration of the mould growth on


the control strips.

2. Otherwise, reestablish test conditions and continue the test from the point of
interruption.

(3) Lowered humidity. A complete retest is required if:

(a) The relative humidity drops below 50%, or

(b) The relative humidity drops below 70% for 4 hours or


more, or

(c) There is evidence of deterioration of the mould colonies


on the control strips.

3. Otherwise, re-establish test conditions and continue the test from the point of
interruption.

4-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

4.4. TEST PROCEDURE

4.4.1. Cleaning

Although it is preferable to use a new test item, the same test item as used in other
tests may be used. If cleaning is required, conduct the cleaning at least 72 hours
before test initiation in order to allow evaporation of any volatile materials. Cleaning
should follow typical production cleaning methods. The test item shall be prepared in
accordance with paragraph 4.4.6.1. Place new cotton control strips in the test
chamber and inoculate both the test item and the controls with the test moulds.

4.4.2. Water Purity

Water used for generating humidity and for wet bulb socks must be essentially free of
contaminants. Follow guidance provided in Method 300 Chapters 3 and 4.

4.4.3. Miscellaneous

a. This method is designed to provide optimal climatic conditions and all of


the basic inorganic minerals needed for growth of the mould species
used in the test. The group of mould species was chosen for its ability
to attack a wide variety of materials commonly used in the construction
of military materiel. Optional species may be added to the inoculum if
required (see paragraph 2.3.b).

b. This test must be performed by trained personnel at laboratories specially


equipped for microbiological work.

c. The presence of moisture is essential for spore germination and growth.


Generally, germination and growth will start when the relative humidity of
the ambient air exceeds 70%. Development will become progressively
more rapid as the humidity rises above this value, reaching a maximum
in the 90 to 100% relative humidity range.

d. The specified temperature of 30 ± 1 C, is most conducive to the growth


of the test moulds.

e. Control items specified in paragraph 4.4.5 are designed to:

(1) Verify the viability of the mould spores used in the inoculum.

(2) Establish the suitability of the chamber environment to support


mould growth.

f. Although this procedure can provide information on the susceptibility of


materials to mould growth, the testing of materials and piece parts will

4-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

not reveal potential mould growth situations. These can result due to
the complexities involved in assemblages. Examples are induced
conditions created by coatings and protective wrappings, deterioration
of protective coatings due to bimetallic reactions, and other situations
that would not be encountered with the testing of components.

4.4.4. Test Preparation

a. Preparation of mineral salts solution.

(1) Using clean apparatus, prepare the mineral salts solution to


contain the following:

Potassium dihydrogen orthophosphate (KH2PO4)........... 0.7 g

Potassium monohydrogen orthophosphate (K2HPO4)..... 0.7 g

Magnesium sulphate heptahydrate (MgSO4.7H2O)......... 0.7 g

Ammonium nitrate (NH4NO3)........................................... 1.0 g

Sodium chloride (NaCl)................................................. 0.005 g

Ferrous sulphate heptahydrate (FeSO4.7H2O).............. 0.002 g

Zinc sulphate heptahydrate (ZnSO4.7H2O)................... 0.002 g

Manganous sulphate monohydrate (MnSO4.H2O)........ 0.001 g

Distilled water............................................................... 1000 ml

(2) The pH of the mineral salts solution must be between 6.0 and
6.5.

b. Preparation of mixed spore suspension.

Note - Precautions: Although the exact strains of moulds specified for this test are
not normally considered to present a serious hazard to humans, certain people may
develop allergies or other reactions. Therefore, standing operating procedures for
safety should be employed. Also, the tests should be conducted by personnel
trained in microbiological techniques.

(1) Use aseptic techniques to prepare the spore suspension


containing at least the test moulds determined from
paragraph 2.3.

4-5 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

(2) Maintain pure cultures of these moulds separately on an


appropriate medium such as potato dextrose agar, but culture
chaetomium globosum on strips of filter paper overlaid on the
surface of mineral salts agar. Prepare the mineral salts agar by
dissolving 15.0 g of agar in a liter of the mineral salts solution
described in paragraph 4.4.5.2.a.

NOTE: Do not keep the stock cultures for more than 4 months at 6 ± 4 C after
that time, prepare subcultures and use them for the new stocks.

(3) Verify the purity of mould cultures before the test.

(4) Make subcultures from the pure stock cultures and incubate
them at 30 ± 1 C for 10 to 21 days.

Most moulds will develop within 10 to 14 days and may show signs of deterioration
after longer incubation. Some moulds such as chaetomium globosum require 21
days or longer to develop.

(5) Prepare a spore suspension of each of the required test moulds


by pouring into one subculture of each mould 10 ml of an
aqueous solution containing 0.05 g per liter of a nontoxic wetting
agent such as sodium dioctyl sulphosuccinate (sulfosuccinate) or
sodium lauryl sulphate (sulfate).

(6) Use a rounded glass rod or a sterilized platinum or nickel chrome


wire to gently scrape the surface growth from the culture of the
test organisms.

(7) Pour the spore charge into a 125 ml capped erlenmeyer flask
containing 45 ml of water and 50 to 75 solid glass beads, 5 mm
in diameter.

(8) Shake the flask vigorously to liberate the spores from the fruiting
bodies and to break the spore clumps.

(9) Filter the dispersed mould spore suspension into a flask through
a 6 mm layer of glass wool contained in a glass funnel.

NOTE: This process should remove large mycelial fragments and clumps of
agar.

(10) Centrifuge the filtered spore suspension and discard the


supernatant liquid.

4-6 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

(11) Re-suspend the residue in 50 ml of water and centrifuge. Wash


the spores obtained from each of the moulds in this manner at
least three times (until the supernatant is clear).

(12) Dilute the final washed residue with mineral salts solution in such
a manner that the resultant spore suspension shall contain
1,000,000 ± 20% spores per milliliter as determined with a
counting chamber.

(13) Repeat this operation for each organism used in the test.

(14) Perform a viability check for each organism in accordance with


paragraph 4.4.5.1.

(15) Blend equal volumes of the resultant spore suspension to obtain


the final mixed spore suspension.

NOTE: The spore suspension should be prepared fresh. If not freshly


prepared, it must be held at 6 ± 4 C for not more than 14 days.

4.4.5. Control Items

Two types of control tests are required. Using the procedure of paragraph 4.4.5.1,
verify the viability of the spore suspension and its preparation. Using the procedure
of paragraph 4.4.5.2, verify the suitability of the chamber environment.

4.4.5.1. Viability of Spore Suspension

a. Before preparing the composite spore suspension, inoculate sterile


potato dextrose or another nutrient agar plates with 0.2 to 0.3 ml of the
spore suspension of each of the individual mould species. Use
separate agar plates for each species.

b. Distribute the inoculum over the entire surface of the plate.

c. Incubate the inoculated potato dextrose agar plate at 30 ± 1 C for 7 to


10 days.

d. After the incubation period, check the mould growth.

NOTE: The absence of copious growth of any of the test organisms over the
entire surface in each container will invalidate the results of any tests using
these spores.

4-7 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

4.4.5.2. Test Chamber Environment

a. Prepare the following solution:

(1) 10.0 g glycerol.

(2) 0.1 g potassium dihydrogen orthophosphate (KH2PO4).

(3) 0.1 g ammonium nitrate (NH4NO3).

(4) 0.025 g magnesium sulphate (sulfate) heptahydrate


(MgSO4.7H2O).

(5) 0.05 g yeast extract.

(6) Distilled water to a total volume of 100 ml.

(7) 0.005 g of a nontoxic wetting agent such as sodium dioctyl


sulphosuccinate (sulfosuccinate) or sodium lauryl sulphate
(sulfate).

(8) HCl and NaOH to adjust the final solution pH to 5.3.

b. Prepare control strips from unbleached, plain weave, 100% cotton cloth
that has been cut or torn into strips about 3 cm wide. The strips shall be
devoid of fungicides, water repellents, and sizing additives. To aid in
removing any possible treatment materials, boiling in distilled water is
recommended. Dip the strips into the above solution. After dipping,
remove the excess liquid from the strips and hang them to dry before
placing them in the chamber and inoculating. Ensure that the strips have
been thoroughly wetted.

c. Within the chamber, place the strips vertically close to and bracketing the
test items so that the test strips and test items experience the same test
environment. The length of the strips shall be at least the height of the
test item.

d. These strips are installed and inoculated along with the test item to
ensure that proper conditions are present in the incubation chamber to
promote mould growth.

4-8 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

4.4.6. Test Performance

4.4.6.1. Preparation for Incubation

Step 1. Assure that the condition of the test items is similar to their
condition as delivered by the manufacturer or customer for use, or
as otherwise specified. Any cleaning of the test item shall be
accomplished at least 72 hours before the beginning of the mould
test to allow for evaporation of volatile materials.

Step 2. Install the test item in the chamber or cabinet on suitable fixtures,
or suspended them from hangers.

Step 3. Hold the test item in the operating chamber (at 30 ± 1 C and a
RH of greater than 90% but less than 100%) for at least 4 hours
immediately before inoculation.

Step 4. Inoculate the test item and the cotton fabric chamber control items
with the mixed mould spore suspension by spraying the
suspension on the control items and on and into the test item(s) (if
not permanently or hermetically sealed) in the form of a fine mist
from an atomizer or nebulizer. Personnel with appropriate
knowledge of the test item should be available to aid in exposing
its interior surfaces for inoculation.

NOTE: In spraying the test and control items with composite spore
suspension, take care to cover all external and internal surfaces that are
exposed during use or maintenance. If the surfaces are non-wetting, spray
until drops begin to form on them.

Step 5. In order for air to penetrate, replace the covers of the test items
without tightening the fasteners.

Step 6. Start incubation immediately following the inoculation.

4.4.6.2. Incubation of the test item

Step 1. Except as noted in Step 9 below, incubate the test items at


constant temperature and humidity conditions of 30  1 °C and a
relative humidity above 90% but below 100% for the test duration
(28 days, minimum).

Step 2. After 7 days, inspect the growth on the control cotton strips
(paragraph 4.4.5.2.b) to verify the environmental conditions in
the chamber are suitable for growth. At this time at least 90

4-9 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

percent of the part of the surface area of each test strip located
at the level of the test item should be covered by fungus. If it is
not, repeat the entire test with the adjustments of the chamber
required to produce conditions suitable for growth. Leave the
control strips in the chamber for the duration of the test.

Step 3. If the cotton strips show satisfactory fungus growth after 7 days,
continue the test for the required period from the time of
inoculation as specified in the test plan. If there is no increase in
fungus growth on the cotton strips at the end of the test as
compared to the 7-day results, the test is invalid.

4.4.7. Inspection

At the end of the incubation period, inspect the test item immediately. If possible,
inspect the item within the chamber. If the inspection is conducted outside of the
chamber and is not completed in 8 hours, return the test item to the test chamber or
to a similar humid environment for a minimum of 12 hours. Except for hermetically
sealed materiel, open the test item enclosure and examine both the interior and
exterior of the test item. Record the results of the inspection.

4.4.8. Operation/Use (To be conducted only if required)

If operation of the test item is required (e.g., electrical materiel), conduct the
operation during the inspection period specified in paragraph 4.4.7. Ensure
personnel with appropriate knowledge of the test item are available to aid in exposing
its interior surfaces for inspection and in making operation and use decisions.
Disturbance of any fungus growth must be kept to a minimum during the operational
checkout.

WARNING: Because of the potential hazardous nature of this test, operation/use by


personnel with appropriate knowledge of the test item will be performed under the
guidance of technically qualified personnel (e.g., microbiologists). Appropriate
personal protective equipment (PPE) must be worn.

4.4.9. Decontamination

Because of the potentially hazardous nature of this test, extreme caution must be
taken to ensure that the test item, the PPE and the test facility are properly
decontaminated. Annex A provides guidance on a procedure for decontamination.

4-10 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

5. EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

In addition to Method 300 Chapter 9 the following information is provided to assist in


the evaluation of the test results.

a. Any mould growth on the test item must be analyzed to determine if the
growth is on the test item material(s) or on contaminants.

b. Any mould growth on the test item material(s), whether from the
inoculum or other sources, must be evaluated by qualified personnel
for:

(1) The extent of growth on susceptible components or materials.


Use table II as a guide for this evaluation but any growth must be
completely described.

(2) The immediate effect that the growth has on the physical
characteristics of the materiel.

(3) The long-range effect that the growth could have on the materiel.

(4) The specific material (nutrient(s)) supporting the growth.

c. Evaluate human factors effects (including health risks).

5-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

5-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

6. REFERENCE AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

a. MIL-STD-810, Test Method Standard for Environmental Engineering


Considerations and Laboratory Tests.

6-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 308

TABLE 2: Evaluation Scheme for Visible Effects1

Amount of Rating Comments


Growth

None 0 Substrate is devoid of microbial growth.

Trace 1 Scattered, sparse or very restricted microbial growth.

Light 2 Intermittent infestations or loosely spread microbial


colonies on substrate surface. Includes continuous
filamentous growth extending over the entire surface, but
underlying surfaces are still visible.

Medium 3 Substantial amount of microbial growth. Substrate may


exhibit visible structural change.

Heavy 4 Massive microbial growth.

1Use this scheme as a guide, but exceptions may occur that require a more specific
description

6-2 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 308

ANNEX A DECONTAMINATION OF TEST EQUIPMENT AND TEST ITEMS


AFTER EXPOSURE TO FUNGUS

Decontamination of test equipment, materials, and test items that have been
subjected to a fungus test is paramount when the test items are to be sent back to
the users, manufacturer, or material management office for further evaluation or
reuse. Many test items are too expensive to scrap and must be decontaminated.

a. Decontamination and disinfection of the test chamber.

(1) Initially, good housekeeping procedures should be followed for


all testing, especially those tests involving live cultures.

(2) Prior to any testing, the climatic chamber should be thoroughly


cleaned inside with a hot, soapy water (or Lysol®-type cleaner)
solution.

(3) With no items in chamber, high heat (at least 60 C / 140 F) is
applied for at least 2 hours (no humidity required). Cool the
chamber to ambient prior to placing the test items in the chamber
for fungus testing.

(4) After testing is complete and the items have been


examined/pictures taken, the items and the chamber can be
initially sterilized with high heat as above and at least 90%
relative humidity for at least 2 hours. The humidity keeps the
surfaces wet until the spores are destroyed. (NOTE: The items
must be able to withstand the high temperature chosen for initial
sterilization without damage. Check the test item user’s manual
for the storage temperature before proceeding). After heat
sterilization, the chamber can be washed with a sodium or
calcium hypochlorite solution at 5000 ppm concentration (wear
appropriate personal protective equipment [PPE] when using any
chemical solutions). A phenolic disinfectant spray can also be
used. Copious flushing with water to rinse the chamber is
needed to limit the chlorine contact on the metals surfaces.

(5) If the test items are washable, follow the instructions for each
item and launder in a machine, if possible.

(6) If the items cannot be washed with a solution, wipe with a damp
cloth that has been sprayed with a phenolic solution (disinfectant
spray) and label the items appropriately with precautions on
handling items that have been subjected to fungus testing.

A-1 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 308

Personnel trained in microbiological techniques and who conduct


these tests should have general operating procedures in place
for handling fungus cultures and test items after exposure.

A-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 309

METHOD 309
SALT FOG

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE ........................................................................................... 1-1


1.1. PURPOSE ................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2. APPLICATION .......................................................................................... 1-1
1.3. LIMITATIONS ........................................................................................... 1-1
CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE .......................................................................... 2-1
2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT ........................................................ 2-1
2.1.1. Physical .............................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2. Chemical ............................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.3. Electrical............................................................................................. 2-1
2.2. TEST PROCEDURE ................................................................................. 2-2
2.3. SEQUENCE .............................................................................................. 2-2
2.4. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS .......................................................... 2-2
2.4.1. Salt Composition ................................................................................ 2-2
2.4.2. Salt Concentration .............................................................................. 2-2
2.4.3. Cycling ............................................................................................... 2-2
2.4.4. Salt Solution pH ................................................................................. 2-2
2.5. TEST ITEM CONFIGURATION. ............................................................... 2-3
CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST
INSTRUCTION ............................................................................... 3-1
CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES .................................... 4-1
4.1. TEST FACILITY ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.2. CONTROLS .............................................................................................. 4-2
4.3. TEST INTERRUPTION ............................................................................. 4-3
4.4. PROCEDURE ........................................................................................... 4-3
4.4.1. Pretest Information ............................................................................. 4-3
4.4.2. Preparation of Salt Solution................................................................ 4-3
4.4.3. Preparation for Test............................................................................ 4-3
4.4.4. Test Conduct ...................................................................................... 4-4
CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS ....................................... 5-1
CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................. 6-1

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 309

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 309

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE

NOTE: METHOD 300, GENERAL GUIDANCE AND REQUIREMENTS,


CONTAINS INFORMATION NECESSARY TO CONDUCT THE TEST
PROCEDURES OF THIS METHOD, AND SHALL BE USED IN COMBINATION
WITH THIS TEST METHOD.

1. SCOPE

1.1. PURPOSE

This salt fog test is designed to give a set of repeatable conditions to determine the
relative resistance of materiel to the effects of an aqueous salt atmosphere.

1.2. APPLICATION

All military materiel will be exposed to some form of salt during its life cycle that may
affect its performance. The primary value of the proposed test procedure lies in testing
coatings and finishes on materiel. Additionally, it can be used to locate potential
design problems such as incompatible materials.

1.3. LIMITATIONS

a. It should be noted that the test has limitations regarding the simulation
of real life conditions and successful compliance with the test does not
guarantee that particular items of materiel will satisfactorily resist all
saline conditions to which they may be subjected in service. In
particular the procedure does not duplicate all the effects of a marine
atmosphere and it has not been demonstrated that a direct relationship
exists between the salt fog test corrosion and corrosion occurring in the
natural environment. There is no quantitative relationship between time
spent in the chamber and time in the field, so the test has proven to be
generally unreliable for predicting the service life of different materials
or coatings.

b. This test is not a substitute for evaluating corrosion caused by humidity


and fungus because their effects differ from salt fog effects and this test
is not intended for testing piece parts such as bolts, wires, transistors
and integrated circuits, and material coupons.

1-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 309

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

1-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 309

CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE

2. TEST GUIDANCE

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8.

Salt is one of the most pervasive chemical compounds in the world. It is found in the
oceans, the atmosphere, ground surfaces, and lakes and rivers. It is impossible to
avoid exposure to salt. In coastal regions, this exposure is intensified; in a marine
environment the exposure reaches a maximum. The procedure can be used in a
relatively short period of time to locate potential problem areas, design flaws,
incompatibility of materials, etc., that are exacerbated by exposure to a salt
atmosphere.

2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT

The effects of exposure of materiel to an environment in which salt is present can be


divided into three broad categories: physical effects, chemical effects, and electrical
effects. The following examples of problems that could occur as a result of exposure to
such an environment are not intended to be all-inclusive, and some of the examples
may overlap the categories. They do indicate the importance of the test item
adequately simulating the system (i.e. the materiel in its intended service role) such
that the important effects of exposure are tested.

2.1.1. Physical

a. Clogging or binding of moving parts of mechanical components and


assemblies.

b. Blistering of paint as a result of electrolysis.

2.1.2. Chemical

a. Corrosion due to electrochemical reaction.

b. Accelerated stress corrosion.

c. Formation of acidic/alkaline solutions following salt ionization in water.

2.1.3. Electrical

a. Impairment of electrical equipment due to salt deposits.

b. Production of conductive coatings.

2-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 309

c. Attack of insulating materials and metals.

2.2. TEST PROCEDURE

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8.

2.3. SEQUENCE

See Method 300 Chapter 8. Sand and dust testing should not precede salt fog testing
because dust deposits may inhibit salt corrosion. Salt fog testing should not come
before mould (fungus) or humidity testing because salt deposits may inhibit mould
growth, nor should it precede humidity tests because residual salt deposits could
accelerate chemical reactions.

2.4. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS

See Method 300 Chapters 1, 4, and 8. Variations for the test procedure are limited to
the salt concentration, test duration, the cycling of exposure and drying periods, and
the salt composition. Test item configuration is also an important factor to consider.

2.4.1. Salt Composition

Studies have shown that, for the purpose of evaluating corrosion, a sodium chloride
solution provides as realistic effect as any synthetic seawater solution (reference a.,
paragraph 7). Do not use sodium chloride containing anti-caking agents because such
agents may act as corrosion inhibitors.

2.4.2. Salt Concentration

Concentrations exceeding 20% are known to occur. However the testing community
have standardised on a 5 ± 1% solution because test results have shown this to be an
effective test concentration to demonstrate the ability of material to resist corrosion
(reference b).

2.4.3. Cycling

Experience has shown that alternating periods of salt fog exposure and drying
conditions provides a more realistic exposure and a higher damage potential than does
continuous exposure to a salt atmosphere. Because the rate of corrosion is much
higher during the transition from the wet to dry, it is critical to closely control the rate of
drying if corrosion levels from test to test are to be compared. The test item should be
dried for at least 24 hours unless there is clear (and documented) evidence that the
materiel is dry in less time. For large or complex items this drying time may need to be
longer than 24 hours. The number of cycles may be increased to provide a higher
degree of confidence in the ability of the materials involved to withstand a corrosive
environment.

2-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 309

2.4.4. Salt Solution pH

Temperature affects the pH of a salt solution that has been made from water
saturated with carbon dioxide at room temperature. If the pH of the solution is
adjusted at room temperature and then the solution atomised at 35 °C, the pH of the
collected solution will be higher due to loss of carbon dioxide. Therefore pH
adjustment should be by one of the following methods.

a. Take a 50 ml sample of the salt solution and boil for 30 seconds. Cool
the sample and determine the pH. When the pH of the salt solution is
adjusted to 6.6 to 7.2 by this procedure, the pH of the atomised and
collected solution at 35 °C will come within this range.

b. Heat the salt solution to boiling and then cool to 35 °C and hold at this
temperature for 48 hours. Adjust the pH of the solution and it will not
materially change when atomised at 35 °C.

c. Heat the water from which the salt solution will be made to 35 °C or
above to expel the carbon dioxide. Adjust the pH of the solution and it
will not materially change when atomised at 35 °C.

2.5. TEST ITEM CONFIGURATION

The configuration and orientation of the test item during the exposure period of the
salt fog test is an important factor in determining the effect of the environment on the
test item. Unless otherwise specified, configure the test item and orient it as would
be expected during its storage, shipment, or use. The listing below offers the most
likely configurations that materiel would assume when exposed to a corrosive
atmosphere. For test purposes, choose the most severe/critical configuration.

a. In a shipping/storage container or transit case.

b. Outside of its shipping/storage container but provided with an effective


environmental control system that partly excludes the salt fog
environment.

c. Outside of its shipping/storage container and set up in its normal


operating mode.

d. Modified with kits for special applications or to compensate for mating


components that are normally present, but are not used for this specific
test.

2-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 309

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

2-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 309

CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

In addition to that specified in Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6, measure the salt solution
fallout rate (ml/cm2/h), pH and specific gravity.

3-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 309

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 309

CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

4. TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

See Method 300 Chapters 3, 4, and 5 for test facility, test conditions and test control
information.

4.1. TEST FACILITY

See Method 300 Chapter 5.

The apparatus used in performing the salt fog test in this method is described as
follows:

a. A test chamber with:

(1) Supporting racks designed and constructed so that they will not
affect the characteristics of the salt fog. Construct all parts of the
test chamber and the supporting racks that come into contact with
the test item with material that will not cause electrolytic corrosion.
Do not allow condensation to drip on the test item. No liquid that
comes in contact with either the exposure chamber or the test
item shall return to the salt solution reservoir. Vent the exposure
chamber to prevent pressure buildup.

(2) The capability to maintain temperatures in the exposure zone at


35 °C. This temperature shall be controlled continuously during
the test. The use of immersion heaters within the chamber
exposure area for the purpose of maintaining the temperature
within the exposure zone is prohibited. The temperature of 35 °C
has been historically used and was selected as a standard to
enable operation of a salt fog test chamber in almost any part of
the country with a simple heating setup. It also eliminates the
need for cooling (refrigeration) (reference c).

(3) A salt solution reservoir and dispenser made of material that is


nonreactive with the salt solution, e.g., glass, hard rubber, or
plastic, and that will not influence the pH. The reservoir provides
a continuous supply to a tank normally (but not necessarily)
situated inside the test section in which the salt solution level is
held reasonably constant. The atomizers are connected to this
tank.

(4) A means for injecting the salt fog into the test chamber and an
input air humidifier to minimize clogging of the nozzles. Atomizers
used shall be of such design and construction as to produce a

4-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 309

finely divided, wet, dense fog. Atomizing nozzles and the piping
system shall be made of material that is nonreactive to the salt
solution. The facility must be designed to provide the required
atomization distribution and fallout.

(5) A minimum of 2 salt fog collection receptacles. One is to be at the


perimeter of the test item nearest to the nozzle, and the other also
at the perimeter of the test item but at the farthest point from the
nozzle. If multiple nozzles are used, the same principles apply.
Receptacles shall be placed so that they are not shielded by the
test item and will not collect drops of solution from the test item or
other sources.

(6) A compressed air supply that will maintain constant air pressure
for the continuous, uniform atomization of the salt solution.

b. A salt fog fallout such that each receptacle collects from 1 to 3 ml of


solution per hour for each 80 cm2 of horizontal collecting area (10 cm
diameter).

NOTE: The apparatus described in IEC Publication 68, test Ka is among those
that satisfy these requirements.

4.2. CONTROLS

In addition to that specified in Method 300 Chapters 3 and 4, the following controls
apply to this test:

a. Compressed air: The oil and dirt-free compressed air used to produce
the atomized solution shall be preheated (to offset the cooling effects of
expansion to atmospheric pressure) (see Table 1).

Table 1: Temperature and Pressure Requirements for Operation at 35 °C

Air Pressure (kPa) 83 96 110 124


Preheat temperature (°C)
46 47 48 49
(before atomizing)

b. The salt solution is to be heated to within ± 6 °C of the test section


temperature before injection into the test section.

c. Test section air circulation: Air velocity in the test chambers shall be
minimal (essentially zero).

4-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 309

d. Chamber operation verification: Immediately before the test, and with the
exposure chamber empty, all test parameters shall be adjusted to those
required for the test. These conditions shall be maintained for at least
one 24-hour period (or until proper operation and salt fog collection can
be verified). The fallout rate and pH must be measured at the end of this
initial period. Monitor and record the temperature immediately prior to
testing, and at least every two hours thereafter.

e. Water used for this test must be essentially free of contaminants. Follow
the guidance provided in Method 300 Chapters 3 and 4.

4.3. TEST INTERRUPTION

See Method 300 Chapter 7.

4.4. PROCEDURE

4.4.1. Pretest information

See Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6.

4.4.2. Preparation of Salt Solution

Prepare the required solution by dissolving 5 parts by weight of salt in 95 parts by


weight of water. In the anhydrous state, the sodium chloride should not contain more
than 0.5% of total impurities nor more than 0.1% of sodium iodide. It should contain
essentially no nickel or copper. Maintain the solution within the required specific
gravity range by using the measured temperature and density of the salt solution
(Figure 1). Maintain the pH of the salt solution, as collected as fallout in the exposure
chamber, between 6.5 and 7.2 with the solution temperature at +35 °C. Only diluted
chemically pure hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide shall be used to adjust the pH.
Make the pH measurement electrometrically or colorimetrically. Sodium tetraborate
(borax) may be added to the salt solution as a pH stabilization agent in a ratio not to
exceed 0.7 g sodium tetraborate to 75 liters of salt solution.

4.4.3. Preparation for Test

Perform the pretest standard ambient check as specified in Method 300 Chapter 2.
Handle the test item as little as possible, particularly on the significant surfaces, and
prepare it for test immediately before exposure. Unless otherwise specified, test items
shall be free of surface contamination such as oil, grease, or dirt that could cause
dewetting. Do not include the use of corrosive solvents, solvents that deposit either
corrosive or protective films, or abrasives other than a paste of pure magnesium oxide
in the cleaning methods.

4-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 309

4.4.4. Test conduct

Step 1. With the test item installed in the test chamber in its specified
configuration (or as otherwise specified in the requirements
documents), adjust the test chamber temperature to 35 °C and
condition the test item for at least 2 hours before introducing the
salt fog.

Step 2. Continuously atomize the required salt solution into the test
chamber for a period of 24 hours or as specified in the test plan.
Measure and document the salt fog fallout throughout each
24-hour atomization period. The fallout shall be as specified in
paragraph 4.1.b. The frequency of sampling should be sufficient
to ensure that the fallout is maintained but the rate of corrosion will
accelerate if the sample is allowed to dry significantly while the
spray is off. If fallout quantity requirements are not met, that
interval must be repeated. Measure the pH at least once during
each spraying period. Care should be taken to ensure that there
is consistency in this activity if comparative tests are to be
conducted.

Step 3. Dry the test item at standard ambient temperatures and a relative
humidity of 50 ± 5% for 24 hours or as otherwise specified in the
test item specification (see paragraph 2.4.3). Minimize handling
the test item or adjusting any mechanical features during the
drying period.

Step 4. Repeat steps 1-3 once or as otherwise required to reach the


cycles specified in the test plan.

Step 5. At the end of the drying period, unless otherwise specified,


operate the test item and document the results for comparison
with pretest data.

Step 6. Visually inspect3 the test item for any changes (see paragraph
2.1) to the extent practical. To aid in examination, a gentle wash
in running water (38 °C maximum) may be used.

Step 7. Complete any further inspections or operational checks and


document the results for comparison with pretest data.

3 Visual examination of the test item should consider high stress areas; contact of dissimilar metals;
electrical/electronic components; metallic surfaces; enclosed volumes where condensation may occur;
components provided with corrosion protection coatings; cathodic protection systems, and mechanical
systems subject to malfunction if clogged or coated with salt deposits.

4-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 309

CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

5. EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

In addition to Method 300 Chapter 9, any corrosion must be analyzed for its immediate
or potential effect on the proper functioning of the test item. Satisfactory operation
following this test is not the sole criterion for pass/fail.

5-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 309

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

5-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 309

CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

6. REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

See Method 300 Chapter 10.

a. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), Publication 68, Basic


Environmental Testing Procedures for Electronic Components and
Electronic Equipment, 1974.

b. Methodology Investigation on Evaluation of Test Procedures Used for


Salt Fog Tests, U.S. Army Test and Evaluation Command Project No.
7-CO-PB7-AP1-018, July 1979.

c. Junker, V.J., The Evolution of USAF Environmental Testing, AFFDL-TR-


65-197, October 1965.

Temp. (°C) NaCl CONCENTRATION


Temp.(°F)
4% 5% 6%l
40 104

35 95

30 86

25 77

68
20
1.015 1.020 1.025 1.030 1.035 1.040 1.045
SPECIFIC GRAVITY (kg/dm3)

Figure 1: Salt Solution Specific Gravity Range

6-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 309

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

METHOD 310
RAIN AND WATERTIGHTNESS
TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE ........................................................................................... 1-1


1.1. PURPOSE ................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2. APPLICATION........................................................................................... 1-1
1.3. LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................ 1-2
CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE .......................................................................... 2-1
2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT ........................................................ 2-1
2.2. CHOICE OF TEST PROCEDURE ............................................................ 2-2
2.2.1. Procedure I – Rain and Blowing/Driving Rain .................................... 2-2
2.2.2. Procedure II – Exaggerated Rain ....................................................... 2-2
2.2.3. Procedure III – Drip ............................................................................ 2-2
2.3. SEQUENCE .............................................................................................. 2-2
2.4. CHOICE OF TEST SEVERITIES .............................................................. 2-3
2.4.1. Rainfall Rate....................................................................................... 2-3
2.4.2. Exposure Duration.............................................................................. 2-4
2.4.3. Droplet Size ........................................................................................ 2-4
2.4.4. Wind Velocity ..................................................................................... 2-4
2.4.5. Test Item Exposure Surface(s) (orientation)....................................... 2-5
2.4.6. Temperature....................................................................................... 2-5
CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST
INSTRUCTION ............................................................................... 3-1
CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES .................................... 4-1
4.1. TEST FACILITES ...................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1. Procedure I - Rain and Blowing/Driving Rain ..................................... 4-1
4.1.2. Procedure II – Exaggerated Rain........................................................... 4-1
4.1.3. Procedure III - Drip ................................................................................. 4-2
4.2. CONTROLS .............................................................................................. 4-2
4.3. TEST INTERRUPTION ............................................................................. 4-2
4.4. TEST PROCEDURES ............................................................................... 4-2
4.4.1. Test Preparation ................................................................................. 4-2
4.4.2. Procedure I – Rain and Blowing/Driving Rain .................................... 4-3
4.4.3. Procedure II – Exaggerated Rain ....................................................... 4-4
4.4.4. Procedure III – Drip ............................................................................ 4-4
CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS ....................................... 5-1
CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................. 6-1
ANNEX A DETAILED GUIDANCE FOR TAILORING RAIN ............................ A-1
A.1. INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................... A-1
A.2. INTENSITY VS DURATION ...................................................................... A-1
A.2.1. Types of Rain ..................................................................................... A-1
A.2.1.1. Orographic Rain ................................................................................. A-1
A.2.1.2. Cyclonic Rain ..................................................................................... A-1
A.2.1.3. Convective Rain ................................................................................. A-2

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 310

CONTENTS - Continued

A.2.2. Measuring Rainfall Intensity ............................................................... A-2


A.2.3. Intensity-Frequency-Duration (IFD) Curves........................................ A-3
A.3. RISK ASSESSMENT ................................................................................ A-4
A.3.1. Return Period ..................................................................................... A-4
A.3.2. Percentage Frequency of Occurrence................................................ A-4
A.4. RECORD INTENSITIES ............................................................................ A-5
A.5. DROP SIZE ............................................................................................... A-5
A.5.1. Natural Raindrop Size ........................................................................ A-5
A.5.2. Drip Test Drop Size ............................................................................ A-6
A.6. MOTION AND FLUX DENSITY ................................................................. A-6
A.6.1. Wind ................................................................................................... A-6
A.6.2. Motion ................................................................................................ A-6
A.7. ALTITUDE ................................................................................................. A-7
A.8. TEST SETUP CONSIDERATIONS ........................................................... A-7
A.8.1. Manifold Size ...................................................................................... A-7
A.8.2. Pressurised Test Equipment .............................................................. A-8
A.8.2.1. Nozzle Selection ................................................................................ A-8
A.8.2.2. Nozzle Arrangement........................................................................... A-8
A.8.2.3. Nozzle Operating Pressure ................................................................ A-9
A.9. REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS ........................................ A-9

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 310

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE

NOTE: METHOD 300, GENERAL GUIDANCE AND REQUIREMENTS,


CONTAINS INFORMATION NECESSARY TO CONDUCT THE TEST
PROCEDURES OF THIS METHOD, AND SHALL BE USED IN
COMBINATION WITH THIS TEST METHOD. ADDITIONALLY, ANNEX A
CONTAINS GUIDANCE ON TAILORING AND SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
FOR PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING TEST PROCEDURES.

1. SCOPE

1.1. PURPOSE

These tests are conducted to determine with respect to rain, water spray or dripping
water:

a. The effectiveness of protective covers, cases, packaging, or seals;

b. The capability of the materiel to satisfy its performance requirements


during or following exposure;

c. The physical deterioration of the materiel due to wetting/moisture


ingress;

d. The effectiveness of the water removal systems.

1.2. APPLICATION

This method is applicable to materiel that may be exposed to rain, water spray or
dripping water. The immersion test (Method 307) was traditionally considered to be
more severe than the rain test for determining the penetrability of materiel. The
immersion test may, in some cases, be used to verify watertightness in lieu of a rain
test provided that the materiel configuration would be the same for both situations
and the method of water ingress is well understood. However, there are documented
situations in which the impact of rain causes pumping of water across seals that does
not occur in the immersion test because the seals are held tight against the backing
plate by the static pressure. In most cases it is more appropriate to carry out both
tests.

1-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

1.3. LIMITATIONS

These test procedures are not suitable for:

a. Determining the effects of rain erosion;

b. Determining the atmospheric rain effects on propagation of


electromagnetic radiation, light, etc.

c. Evaluating the adequacy of aircraft windshield rain removal devices;

d. Evaluating materiel exposed to only light condensation drip rates (lower


than 140 L/m2/hr) caused by an overhead surface. For this case the
aggravated humidity cycle of Method 306 will induce a significant
amount of free water on both inside and outside surfaces;

e. Evaluating the effects of pressure washers or decontaminations


devices.

1-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE

2. TEST GUIDANCE

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8.

2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Rain (when falling, upon impact, and as deposited water), water spray and dripping
water have a variety of effects on materiel. Examples of effects resulting from
exposure to these environments are as follows. The list is not intended to be all-
inclusive and some of the examples may overlap the categories.

a. In the atmosphere, it:

(1) Inhibits visibility/detectability through optical devices.

(2) Decreases effectiveness of personnel in exposed activities.

b. After deposition and/or penetration, it:

(1) Degrades the strength/causes swelling of some materials.

(2) Increases weight.

(3) May freeze, which can cause delayed deterioration and


malfunction by swelling or cracking of parts, or binding of moving
parts.

(4) Causes high humidity which can, in time, encourage corrosion


and mould growth.

(5) Reduces the burn rate of propellants.

(6) Modifies thermal exchanges.

(7) Can render an electrical or electronic apparatus inoperative or


dangerous.

(8) Can cause flash flooding, which may result in an immersion


environment.

2-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

2.2. CHOICE OF TEST PROCEDURE

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8.

Three test procedures are provided in this method.

2.2.1. Procedure I – Rain and Blowing/Driving Rain

The Rain and Blowing Rain test is appropriate if the anticipated environment includes
rain or rain combined with wind. The Driving Rain test set-up attempts to simulate
blowing rain by using a pressurised nozzle arrangement but is not recommended
unless facility limitations preclude wind generation, since the effects of impact velocity
may not be properly addressed.

2.2.2. Procedure II – Exaggerated Rain

This procedure is not intended to simulate natural rainfall but is recommended when:

a. Large (shelter-size) materiel is to be tested and a blowing-rain facility is


unavailable or impractical;

b. A high degree of confidence in the watertightness of materiel is desired;

c. The materiel will be exposed to non-natural sprays, such as road-spray


or sprinkler systems;

d. The flux density of water impacting upon the item will be more severe
due to extreme wind or motion of the item (e.g., An item attached to the
exterior of a vehicle during a normal rainfall will experience a more
intense rate of rain impact due to the velocity of the vehicle).

2.2.3. Procedure III – Drip

This procedure is appropriate when materiel is not expected to be exposed to rain,


but may be exposed to dripping/falling water from severe condensation or leakage
from overhead surfaces.

2.3. SEQUENCE

See Method 300 Chapter 8.

This Method is applicable at any stage in the test program, but its effectiveness is
maximised if it is performed towards the end of the test program since the synergistic
effects of the other tests can affect seal integrity of an enclosure.

2-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

2.4. CHOICE OF TEST SEVERITIES

See Method 300 Chapters 1, 4, and 8.

Variables include the test item configuration, rainfall rate, duration of exposure, wind
velocity, test item exposure surfaces (orientation), and the water temperature with
respect to the test item temperature.

2.4.1. Rainfall rate

1. For Procedure 1, the rainfall rate and duration should be tailored to address
the anticipated deployment locale, material commodity, and mission criticality. Only
when rainfall intensity-frequency-duration curves, commodity failure modes, material
criticality, or mission location/duration are unavailable or not well understood, are the
rates and durations suggested in Figure 1 recommended. Figure 1 includes 3 parts:
an extreme 5-minute rainfall at an intensity of 14 mm/min, 25-minute rainfall at 8
mm/min, and 2-hour rainfall 1.7 mm/min. These parts, combined as one test, provide
survival confidence for stationary materiel exposed for an extended period in the
worst locations of the world (reference a). Procedure 1 can consist of one or more
parts as required to address specific commodity, materiel/usage or criticality issues.
Small and localized rain bursts, such as during a thunderstorm, produces the
heaviest rainfalls over a few hours or less, represented by the highest and mid
intensity rates in Figure 1. These parts address the ability of materiel to withstand
heavy storms and adequately dissipate and drain away water, and could be omitted if
for example the item will not be operated in heavy rain. The lower intensity long
duration portion represents steady-state rain, which addresses failures such as
material soaking up water over a long period of time, or the gradual buildup of water
inside an item with inadequate drainage. This part could be omitted if these issues
do not affect the materiel. Care must be exercised to ensure that the test adequately
assesses the commodity, usage and environment over the anticipated life cycle.
Further information and guidance regarding rainfall rates may be obtained from
Annex A and Leaflet 2311.

2. For Procedure II, the suggested spray rate is 40 mm/min. Tailoring is not
recommended unless the specific reasons for tailoring are fully understood, as this
test has been traditionally used to provide materiel confidence.

3. The recommended drip rate for Procedure III is 280 L/m2/hr (4.67 mm/min) for
an exposure duration of 15 minutes. The intention of Procedure III is to ensure that
the item will survive droplets of water falling onto it at any particular location and
consequently this procedure is an aggravated test whereby droplets fall repeatedly
over the entire surface of the test item. This can cause difficulties with small items
that are not able to drain away the flow of water produced by multiple drips. When
evaluating equipment exposed only to light (lower than 140 L/m2/hr) condensation
drip rates caused by an overhead surface, the aggravated humidity cycle of Method
306 may induce similar levels of surface water. In such cases, effects of internal

2-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

condensation and the lack of drop impact and splash must be considered. For
known conditions where a 280 L/m2/hr drip rate cannot occur, the product may be
tested by reducing the drip rate and proportionately increasing the test duration. For
example, for a product exposed only to 140 L/m 2/hr, the rate may be appropriately
reduced if the duration of the test is extended to 30 minutes to ensure the equivalent
volume of water falls on the product.

2.4.2. Exposure duration

1. The exposure duration should be determined from the life cycle profile but
should not normally be less than that specified in the individual procedures. This
duration is representative for a stationary item exposed for 10 years in the worst
locations of the world. For materiel liable to accidental exposure, lower intensities or
shorter durations may be appropriate.

2. With certain materials, the water penetration and thus the degradation is more
a function of time (length of exposure) than the volume or rain/drip rate. For any
materiel made of material that may absorb moisture, the duration of the test may
have to be significantly extended to reflect the real life cycle. For items that do not
absorb water there is likely minimal value in exceeding the recommended durations,
however the duration may be extended where concern exists.

2.4.3. Droplet size

Although nominal drop-size spectra exist for instantaneous rainfall rates, natural rain
varies intensity from moment to moment and hence these instantaneous spectra are
effectively meaningless. For Procedure I and Procedure II, droplet sizes should not
be smaller than approximately 0.5 mm in diameter which is considered to be a mist
or drizzle rather than rain, or larger than 4.5 mm. For Procedure III, polyethylene
tubing sleeves added to the dispensing tubes (see Figure 3) will increase the droplet
size to its maximum. Procedure III is not meant to simulate rain but rather droplets of
condensation or overhead leakage, and therefore droplets may be larger than
4.5 mm in diameter.

NOTE: Observations have shown that water droplets introduced into a high
velocity air stream tend to break up over distance (reference b). It is
recommended that the droplets be introduced as close as possible to the test
item while assuring the droplets achieve the required velocity prior to impact
with the test item, where applicable.

2.4.4. Wind velocity

Rainfall accompanied by winds of 18 m/s is not uncommon during storms. This


velocity is recommended unless otherwise specified or vertical rain conditions are

2-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

required. Gusts exceeding 24 m/s can be associated with these winds and may be
required in the test plan. Unless otherwise specified, the wind need only be applied
during the 2-hour steady-state rainfall. Where test facility limitations preclude the
simulation of wind, the test setup shown in Figure 4 may be used.

2.4.5. Test item exposure surface(s) (orientation)

Wind-driven rain will usually have more of an effect on vertical surfaces than on
horizontal surfaces, and vice versa for vertical or near-vertical rain. Orient the test
item such that the most vulnerable surfaces face the driving rain. Rotate the test item
as required to expose all vulnerable surfaces or openings, with attention to locations
where pooling of water may occur.

2.4.6. Temperature

Experience has shown that a temperature differential between the test item and the
rain water can affect the results of a rain test. For nominally sealed items, increasing
the test item temperature approximately 10 °C above the rain water temperature at
the beginning of each exposure period will subsequently produce a negative pressure
inside the test item, and will provide a more reliable verification of its watertightness.

2-5 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

2-6 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

3. INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

In addition to the information specified in Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6, the following
are required:

a. Rainfall, spray, or drip flow rate(s) at exposure surface;

b. Exposure duration;

c. Water temperature;

d. Test item preheat temperature;

e. Exposure surfaces detailed with respect to (a) and (b);

f. Wind velocity, operational time, and direction with respect to (e).

3-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

4. TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

See Method 300 Chapters 3, 4, and 5 for test facility, test conditions and test control
information.

4.1. TEST FACILITIES

See Method 300 Chapter 5. Unless otherwise specified, water used for rain tests can
be from local water supply systems and shall be free from particles that can block the
nozzle or tubing apertures. For the drip test, it is recommended that water from this
source be filtered using a fine sediment filter to ensure particulate buildup does not
block the tubing. A water-soluble dye such as fluorescein may be added to the
rainwater to aid in locating water leaks. No rust or corrosive contaminants shall be
imposed on the test item by the test facility. The facility temperature need not be
controlled, as the water introduced as rain will significantly affect it.

4.1.1. Procedure I - Rain and Blowing/Driving Rain

The rain facility shall have the capability of producing falling rain accompanied, if
required, by wind at the velocity specified. Where facility limitations preclude the
generation of wind, the facility shall be capable of producing rain using the
arrangement of the nozzles around the test item as shown in Figure 4. In this case,
the rainfall rate will need to be increased on the appropriate materiel surface(s) to
represent the effective rainfall rate that would be induced by the wind (See Annex A
for details). The rain is to be produced by a water distribution device of such design
that the water is homogeneously distributed in the form of droplets having a diameter
range predominantly between 0.5 and 4.5 mm (see paragraph 2.4.3). Spray nozzles,
or the apparatus shown in Figure 2 (with the polyethylene tubing removed), are
suggested. If a dispenser is used for steady state rain, the height of the dispenser
shall be sufficient to ensure that the drops approach terminal velocity (approximately
9 m/s). The wind source shall be capable of producing a horizontal wind velocity of at
least 18 m/s.

4.1.2. Procedure II – Exaggerated Rain

The spray is to be produced by a water distribution device such that the water
impacting the materiel is a steady spray pattern of homogeneous droplets
predominantly in the range specified in paragraph 2.4.3. The nozzles used shall be
arranged to ensure homogeneous wetting of the test item surfaces; one such
arrangement is depicted in Figure 5. A minimum operating pressure of 377 kPa is
recommended to produce the desired effects.

4-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

4.1.3. Procedure III - Drip

The dispenser arrangement shall allow a flow rate of not less than 280 l/m 2/h, but
without coalescence of the drips into a stream. Alternative dispenser designs are
shown in Figures 2 and 5, but other configurations may be used provided the
spacing, rate, and size of individual drops are equivalently maintained. Either
arrangement shown in Figure 2 is recommended over that of Figure 5 due to the
simplicity of construction, maintenance, cost and reproducibility of tests. The
polyethylene tubing ensures maximum droplet size. Use a drip height representative
of the actual situation being simulated; unless otherwise specified, one metre is
suggested. The drip area of the dispenser should be large enough to cover the entire
top surface of the test item. The dispenser shown in Figure 5 requires accurate
leveling together with extensive cleaning and maintenance to ensure consistency of
the drip pattern. It is recommended that de-ionised or distilled water be used to
minimize contamination of the test facility, and that the test item and the dispenser be
covered to prevent accumulation of dust that could clog the dispenser holes. Since
facility imperfections or small amounts of contamination can affect the test, control
the flow rate either by introducing water through a flow metre (preferred) or by
controlling the depth of the water in the drip dispenser (after verifying that the
selected depth produces the required flow) to ensure the proper drip rate.

4.2. CONTROLS

In addition to the controls specified in Method 300 Chapters 3 and 4, verify that the
rainfall/spray rate and wind velocity at the position of the test item are correct before
placement of the test item in the test facility. It may be necessary to measure the
rainfall rate without the wind in order to ensure accurate measurement. Ensure that
only separate (or discrete) drops are issuing from the dispenser. Where nozzles are
used, it is not correct to measure the spray pattern of each nozzle independently as
any overlap or excess spacing would not be found. Additionally, the pressure shall
be at least the minimum necessary to maintain a homogeneous pattern distribution.
Once the spray pattern and rate have been verified, it may be sufficient to verify the
water pressure immediately before subsequent tests, so long as none of the
variables of the test have been altered. For Procedure III, the flow rate must be
confirmed before and after the test to ensure test tolerances are met from beginning
to end of test.

4.3. TEST INTERRUPTION

See Method 300 Chapter 7.

4.4. TEST PROCEDURES

4.4.1. Test Preparation

Before starting the test, determine the information to be documented in accordance

4-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

with Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6, and perform the pretest standard ambient check
specified in Method 300 Chapter 2. If wind is required, position the wind source with
respect to the test item in accordance with paragraph 2.4.5.

NOTE: No sealing, taping, caulking, etc., shall be applied to the test item
except as required by the design specification for the test item. Unless
otherwise specified, test items shall be free of surface contamination such as
oil, grease or dirt, which could cause dewetting.

4.4.2. Procedure I – Rain and Blowing/Driving Rain

Step 1. For materiel intended to be opened during use or for field


maintenance, open the test item.

Step 2. Heat the test item to a higher temperature than the rain water
such that the test item temperature has been stabilized at
10 ± 2 °C above the rain water temperature at the start of each
exposure to the rain (see paragraph 2.4.6).

Step 3. Install the test item in the rain test facility in the required test
configuration. Position the test item so that when steady state or
wind-driven rain is initiated, rain will be sprayed over the
specified surfaces of the test item.

Step 4. Start the rain and, if appropriate, the wind at the velocity
specified in the test plan, and maintain the prescribed rainfall
conditions for the specified duration.

Step 5. If an operational check is required, operate the test item for the
last 10 minutes (or as otherwise specified) of the rain duration
selected for Step 4.

Step 6. Examine the test item for water within one hour of completion of
exposure. If possible, examine the test item in the test chamber;
otherwise remove the test item from the test facility and conduct
a visual inspection. Dry the exterior surface of the test item
before opening for internal inspection. If a noticeable amount of
free water has penetrated the test item, judgment regarding
potential safety hazards shall be made before operating the test
item. It may be necessary to empty water from the test item to
prevent a safety hazard. Record the approximate quantity and
location of any free water found inside the test item, and identify
probable area(s) of ingress.

4-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

Step 7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for all faces of the test item that could
be exposed to blowing or steady state rain.

Step 8. If required, operate the test item to demonstrate compliance with


the requirements document, and document the results.

4.4.3. Procedure II – Exaggerated Rain

Step 1. Install the test item in the test facility in normal operational
configuration.

Step 2. Position the nozzles as required by the test plan or as indicated


in paragraph 4.4.1 and Figure 5.

Step 3. If practical, heat the test item to a higher temperature than the
rain water such that the test item temperature has been
stabilized at 10 ± 2 °C above the rain water temperature at the
start of each exposure to the rain (see paragraph 2.4.6).

Step 4. Unless otherwise specified, spray individually or in any


combination all exposed surfaces of the test item with water for
40 minutes per face.

Step 5. Inspect the interior of the test item for evidence of free water.
Estimate the water volume and the probable point of entry, and
document.

Step 6. If required following removal of any free water, operate the test
item to demonstrate compliance with the requirements
documents, and document the results. Be aware of any potential
electrical safety hazard.

4.4.4. Procedure III – Drip

Step 1. Heat the test item to a higher temperature than the rain water
such that the test item temperature has been stabilized at
10 ± 2 °C above the rain water temperature at the start of each
exposure to the rain (see paragraph 2.4.6).

Step 2. Install the test item in the test facility in accordance with the test
plan, in its operational configuration with all connectors and
fittings engaged.

Step 3. Subject the entire top surface of the test item to water droplets
falling from specified height measured from the upper main
surface of the test item at the specified uniform rate for 15
minutes or as otherwise specified.

4-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

Step 4. At the conclusion of the exposure period, examine the test item
in the test facility if possible. Dry the test item externally and
remove sufficient panels or covers to allow the interior to be
inspected.

Step 5. Visually inspect the test item for evidence of water penetration.
Estimate the amount of any water inside the test item, and
estimate the probable point of entry, and document.

Step 6. Conduct an operational check of the test item as specified in the


test plan and document the results, but be aware of potential
electrical hazards.

4-5 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

4-6 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

5. EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

1. In addition to the failure criteria specified in Method 300 Chapter 9, particular


attention should be given to swelling which may cause the materiel to exceed its
specified design tolerances or cause binding and/or distortion. Weight increases may
indicate absorption or ingress to hidden crevasses, which may later lead to material
delamination, degradation, or structural damage. In some cases, it may be
insufficient to test operability of the materiel after exposure, and may be critical to test
the operability of the item during exposure. Additionally, based on a risk assessment
of the consequences of water penetration, determine if one of the following is
applicable:

a. Watertight: any evidence of water penetration into the test item


enclosure following the rain test shall be considered a failure;

b. Acceptable water penetration: water penetration of not more than


4 cm3 per 28,000 cm3 (1 ft3) of test item enclosure shall be acceptable
provided the following conditions are met:

(1) There is no immediate or anticipated long-term effect of the


water on the operation of the materiel;

(2) The test item in its operational configuration (transit/storage case


open or removed) can successfully complete the aggravated
temperature/humidity procedure of Method 306.

2. This quantity of water is approximately the quantity required to raise the


relative humidity of one cubic foot of air at standard ambient conditions to saturation
at 49 °C. The 49 °C value is realistic for equipment exposed to higher temperature
and solar radiation effects.

3. Greater water penetrability may be acceptable, provided the above conditions


are met and it can be proven that safety, operability, and survivability are not
affected.

5-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

5-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

6. REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

See Method 300 Chapter 10.

a. Kaddatz, J., “NATO Rain Characterisation and Procedure


Development”, QETE Project A011401, Canadian Department of
National Defence, 2003.

b. Rogers, R. R., “Short Course in Cloud Physics,” Pergamon Press,


Oxford; 1979.

c. Moriceau J. Etude Technique No. 749/84/SEM, DGA/LRBA, Vernon,


France

Test Level Rate Duration Wind Velocity

Extreme 14 mm/min 5 min If specified

High 8 mm/min 25 min If specified

Steady-State 1.7 mm/min 120 min 18 m/s

Figure 1: Procedure I, Recommended Rainfall Test Levels

6-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

Water Supply
Flow control or
calibration is required to
ensure the correct drip
rate (140 or 280
L/m2/hr)

DRIP DISPENSERS

OR Tube should extend


approximately 6 mm
above the bottom surface
of the tank to avoid
collecting debris
HOLE
SPACING
20 to 25 mm

20

20

19

Corrosion
Internal Diameter of Tubes Resistant
approximately 0.5 to 0.6 mm Stainless Tubes
Dimensions are in mm
Length 25 mm

Polyethylene or similar flexible sleeve 5 mm long by 5mm outside diameter,


placed over ends of tubing to increase drop size. It should extend 2.5 mm
beyond the bottom of the tubing.

Remove for rain tests.

Figure 2: Sample Facility Setup for Rain or Drip Test


Figure 2. Sample facility setup for rain or drip test

6-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

RECTANGULAR PACKAGES CYLINDRICAL PACKAGES

Figure 3: Nozzle Arrangement for Procedure I, Where Wind is Unavailable

6-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

Nozzle

Circular Pattern Nozzles: Square Pattern Nozzles:


Use array of nozzles based on equilateral Use array of nozzles based on
triangular spacing for minimal variance in square spacing for minimal
spray distribution. variance in spray distribution.

*Adjust spacing and standoff as necessary to achieve spray overlap.

Note: Ensure nozzles are perpendicular to the surface(s), and situated such that
each surface including top surface (and especially vulnerable areas) is sprayed.

Figure 4: Typical Nozzle Arrangement for Procedure II

6-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

Figure 5: Details of Alternative Dispenser for Drip Test, Procedure III

6-5 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 310

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6-6 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 310

ANNEX A DETAILED GUIDANCE FOR TAILORING RAIN

A.1. INTRODUCTION

This Annex provides additional information to aid in tailoring the rain and
blowing/driving rain test procedures.

A.2. INTENSITY VS DURATION

A.2.1. Types of Rain

Rainfall is often classified according to the process causing the uplift of air initiating
the rain formation; there are three main types of rain that are not mutually exclusive,
and these are known as orographic, cyclonic, and convective (references a and b).

A.2.1.1. Orographic Rain

With orographic rain, the main cause is the forced ascent of moist air over high
ground. The enhanced precipitation is often due to raindrops falling into the large
amounts of low cloud formed by this ascent, giving rise to the ‘seeder/feeder’
mechanism. Orographic precipitation is often responsible for high monthly and
annual rain amounts; however, windward slopes are also prone to very extreme
amounts when affected by tropical storms. Due to the high rainfall on the windward
slope of a mountain, the leeward side will often have lower precipitation; this
condition is known as the “shadow effect”.

A.2.1.2. Cyclonic Rain

With cyclonic rainfall, large scale uplift is associated with features of the general
weather situation, such as fronts and depressions. Tropical cyclones are responsible
for most of the extreme amounts for a few hours to a few days.

A-1 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 310

A.2.1.3. Convective Rain

Convective rain falls from a cumuliform cloud with an unstable air mass, where
columns of cloudy air can rise, and rapidly form raindrops. Rainfall intensity is
typically greater than for cyclonic or orographic rain, but individual areas of rain are
generally small (20 km diameter or less), with dry areas close by. This type of rain
produces the heaviest rainfalls over periods of a few hours or less. Although heavy
winds are often associated with convective rain, these typically do not occur at the
core of the storm where the rain is heaviest, since the causation for heavy rain is the
strong downdraft.

A.2.2. Measuring Rainfall Intensity

Instantaneous rainfall intensity cannot be measured directly, but rather is an average


value calculated as the volume of water per unit surface impact area per unit time
(e.g., mm3/mm2/min or L/m2/hr). The measurement units can be simplified to specify
rate in depth of water per unit time (e.g., mm/min), as is often the case in this test
method. The volume of water collected is measured using a fluidic measurement unit
(e.g., mL), converted to mm3, divided by the surface area of the opening to the
collection container, and finally divided by the time of collection. A common
apparatus for measuring rainfall intensity is the tipping bucket rain gauge, however
tipping buckets may not have the capacity to measure 14 mm/min, and will almost
certainly not be able to measure 40 mm/min.

A-2 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 310

A.2.3. Intensity-Frequency-Duration (IFD) Curves

1. Due to the different types of rainfall, shorter rainfalls are often more intense.
Climatologists and meteorologists often present this information in a simple diagram,
known as IFD curves. These curves show the relationship between the intensity and
duration, for different return periods. A sample IFD curve is shown in Figure 1. IFD
curves will differ from one location to the next due to the differences in geographic
features that influence the causation of the rainfall.

2. Standard practices for rain data collection do not often include gathering data
for durations of less than one hour. When IFD curves are not available for short
durations, the intensities for durations less than 1 hour may be estimated from the 1-
hour value (reference c), as shown in Table A-1. These average ratios have been
developed empirically from hundreds of station-years of records.

Table A-1: Ratios for Estimating Short Duration Rainfall Rates from 1-Hour
Value

Duration (minutes) 5 10 15 30
Ratio (n-minutes to 60-minutes) 3.48 2.70 2.28 1.58

3. Thus, if the 100-year one-hour rainfall rate is 102 mm/hr (1.7 mm/min), the
100-year ten-minute rainfall rate would be 275 mm/hr (4.6 mm/min). Caution must be
exercised when using this approach. In regions where most of the rainfall occurs in
connection with thunderstorms, the above ratios would tend to yield values that are
too low; in regions where most of the rainfall results from orographic influences with
little severe convective activity, these ratios might tend to yield values that are too
high.

4. Alternatively, the IFD curve can be derived if the mean and standard deviation
of annual extreme rainfall rates for various durations are known, by analyzing the
data as a Gumbel double exponential distribution (Note: the Gaussian/Normal
distribution does not apply and consequently the data is not entirely contained within
3 standard deviations).

Using the method suggested in reference d,

x  x  K (T)s

where x is the exceedance value, x and s are the mean and standard deviation of
the annual extreme rainfalls, T is the return period, and K(T) is defined by:

 6 T 
K(T)   0.5772  ln ln 
  T  1

A-3 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 310

A.3. RISK ASSESSMENT

A.3.1. Return Period

1. One traditional convention for expressing frequency of occurrence is the return


period, which is an average of the length of time between rainfall rates of a specific
magnitude. For example, the 100-year rainfall rate occurs, on average over a large
period of time (a millennium), every 100 years. This does not mean that if the event
occurs on a given year that it cannot occur the following year.

2. An alternate approach to expressing this value is to state that there is a 1 in


100 (1%) chance that a rainfall of this magnitude could occur any given year. By
applying annual probabilities in succession, the resulting probability of occurrence
increases. Figure 2 relates the anticipated design life to the required return period
rainfall that must be selected, in order to achieve a given probability of success.
Success is defined as the condition in which the specified rainfall rate is not
exceeded during the design life (duration of exposure) of the materiel.

3. Consequently, for a materiel intended for a field exposure of 10 years, the 100-
year return period rainfall must be used to provide 90% confidence that the item will
not experience rain more intense than the test condition. This success probability
was used to derive the recommended values in the rain and blowing/driving rain test
procedure.

A.3.2. Percentage Frequency of Occurrence

Another method traditionally used to express rainfall rate is the frequency of


occurrence (reference b, reference e and reference f). Caution must be exercised
when interpreting data that uses the term frequency. Some sources refer to the
percentage of time that rainfall is exceeded when raining (i.e., rainfall rate greater
than some threshold value - the threshold is dependent upon the source of the data);
others reference the general percentage of time that the rainfall rate is exceeded,
including time when it is not raining (i.e., rainfall rate = 0 mm/min). This information is
extremely useful for determining if the rain test is applicable or for determining
operational failure criteria, however it can be misleading to define survivability failure
criteria to rates that are exceeded only 0.5% of the wettest month, as this may be
equivalent to annually receiving up to 3.65 hours of rain (during the specified month)
in which the rainfall rate exceeds this threshold. If there is little variance in the
precipitation patterns throughout the year, this could mean the materiel will
experience up to 43.8 hours annually at this intensity.

A-4 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 310

A.4. RECORD INTENSITIES

1. The intensities associated with the maximum observed rainfalls (reference c)


have been enveloped by the equation:

R = 60.4T-0.525

where R is the rainfall rate in mm/min and T is the duration in minutes.

2. The most intense 100-year return period (10 year design life, 90 % confidence)
rainfalls have been estimated to occur in Hawaii and Puerto Rico (reference g and
reference h), and these values were selected as the recommended test rain rates.

Figure 3 shows the recommended 100-year rainfall rates in comparison with the
maximum observed intensities.

A.5. DROP SIZE

The velocity of water droplets is dependent upon the drop size. This is due to the
fact that the air resistance is proportionate to the square of the velocity. Conversely,
the velocity is dependent upon the effective surface area that this resistance acts
upon which changes as the drop deforms slightly.

A.5.1 Natural Raindrop Size

1. Natural raindrop velocities for various drop sizes are shown in Table A-2. Note
that these values are approximate estimates only, and do not need to be matched
precisely.

Table A-2: Approximate Terminal Velocity Associated with Various Drop


Sizes

Drop Diameter Droplet Terminal Velocity


(mm) (m/s)
0.5 2
1 4
2 6.5
3 8
4 9

2. Where droplets are formed and allowed to fall naturally for the rain/blowing
rain procedure, the test facility must be sufficient in height to ensure terminal velocity
of the droplets is reached before impact upon the test item. Test facilities using
pressurised water may not require as much height, as the droplets will leave the
spray nozzle with some initial velocity.

A-5 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 310

3. Drop sizes greater than 4.5 mm do not typically occur in natural rainfall, as
droplets of this size will tend to break up during their descent, either due to air
resistance or collision with other droplets.

A.5.2. Drip Test Drop Size

Since the drip test is not to simulate rain, the droplets do not need to reach terminal
velocity. It is possible to achieve larger droplet sizes, since the air resistance may not
be sufficient to cause them to break up. The largest drop size that can be achieved
without coalescence is recommended.

A.6. MOTION AND FLUX DENSITY

The flux density of water droplets on the vertical surfaces of the materiel may be
increased in situations where either wind or motion is involved.

A.6.1. Wind

Wind will increase the horizontal rate of water impact on vertical surfaces. Windward
surfaces will receive:
v2
R eff  R no min al 1 
u2

Where Reff is the effective rainfall rate impacting upon the windward
vertical surface (mL/m2/min)

Rnominal is the vertical rainfall rate without wind (mL/m2/min)

v is the velocity of the wind (m/s)

u is the vertical velocity of rain droplets (m/s)

A.6.2. Motion

1. Where materiel is in motion, the rate of water impact upon the front of the
materiel will increase proportionately to the square of the velocity. This is especially
important on equipment mounted to the exterior of surface vehicles. For example, a
vehicle traveling at 25 m/s (90 kph), the rate of surface impact on the front of the
materiel can be increased by over 4 times the nominal rainfall rate.

The effective rainfall rate can be calculated:

v2
R eff  R no min al 1 
u2

A-6 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 310

Where Reff is the effective rainfall rate impacting upon the forward
surface (mL/m2/min)

Rnominal is the vertical rainfall rate (mL/m2/min)

v is the velocity of the vehicle (m/s)

u is the vertical velocity of rain droplets (m/s)

2. The theoretical angle of impact can be calculated  = tan-1(v/u) where  is the


angle measured with respect to the horizontal plane.

3. Where wind and motion exist simultaneously, v in the above equations is the
net vector summation of the vehicle speed and wind speed.

4. For example, for a materiel mounted to the exterior of a typical land vehicle
travelling 100 kph (27.8 m/s) in rainfall of 2 mm/min intensity and a head wind of
65 kph (18 m/s), the resultant effective rainfall rate is:

v vehicle  v wind 2
R eff  R no min al 1 
u2

R eff  2 1 
27.8  182
92

Reff =10.4 mm/min

Simultaneously, the wind velocity should be increased to 45.8 m/s (vvehicle + vwind)
which may help alleviate concerns regarding impact velocity.

A.7. ALTITUDE

Rainfall at altitudes of up to 4 km (13000 ft) may be 25-30% higher than rainfall rates
at sea-level (reference a and reference b). Above this altitude, the precipitation will
be consist partly or fully of snow or hail.

A.8. TEST SETUP CONSIDERATIONS

A.8.1. Manifold Size

1. The test setup must be of sufficient size to produce the desired effect. In
procedures where wind is involved, the rate of water impacting upon the windward
surface is increased as is described in paragraph 6.1; the cause for this increase
originates from the fact that the wind is collecting droplets that would normally fall off
to the side of the materiel and pushing them into the vertical surface. As such, there

A-7 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 310

must be sufficient droplets falling to the side of the materiel during testing to recreate
this phenomenon.

2. The required manifold extension, measure from the side of the materiel, is
dependent upon the resultant angle of the driving rain, which is in turn dependent
upon the wind velocity. The minimum required extension is:

u
dh
v

Where: h is the vertical distance between the apparatus producing the


droplets and the lowest point on the test item (m)

u is the vertical velocity of falling rain (m/s)

v is the wind speed (m/s)

A.8.2. Pressurised Test Equipment

A.8.2.1. Nozzle Selection

Nozzle selection is not an exact science. Although nozzle companies publish


flow/pressure/spray angle tables for each nozzle, even the nozzles that suggest they
produce even distributions may in fact have a fallout rate directly under the nozzle
that is significantly higher than the average over the spray area. Trial-and-error may
be required to determine the optimum nozzle. Contrary to intuition, larger capacity
nozzles may cause lower rainfall rates due to an increase in the spray angle, which
will increase the impact surface area.

A.8.2.2. Nozzle Arrangement

For nozzles that produce a round spray pattern, an equilateral triangle manifold
arrangement will result in the most even spray distribution. Nozzles that produce a
square spray pattern will be most effective on a square grid arrangement.

A.8.2.2.1. Nozzle Spacing

It has been observed that using nozzles that produce a fraction of the required fallout
rate, and providing significant overlap, may result in a more even and consistent
spray distribution than selecting nozzles that produce the desired rainfall rate and
spacing them with small overlap. Additionally, this will help ensure the rainfall rate is
consistent regardless of the vertical distance away from the nozzle.

A-8 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 310

A.8.2.3. Nozzle Operating Pressure

For procedures involving pressurised water, a minimum pressure (dependent upon


selected spray nozzle) is required to maintain a homogeneous spray pattern and
prevent (non-obvious) streaming. Increased pressure will result in smaller droplet
size, and consequently the lowest practical operating pressure is recommended. At
certain pressures, some nozzles may be subject to sputtering due to resonance of
the vane or some other design factor. This pressure region should be avoided, since
results may lack reproducibility due to the chaotic variance. Particular attention
should be given to external variables that may influence water pressure (e.g., flushing
lavatory).

A.9. REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

a. DEF STAN 00-035 (Part 4) Chapter 6-01

b. MIL-HDBK-310 Global Climatic Data for Developing Military Products,


23 June 1997.

c. WMO No. 168, Guide to hydrological practices: data acquisition and


processing, analysis, forecasting and other applications (5th Ed.), 1994.

d. Hogg, W.D. and Carr, D.A. Rainfall Frequency Atlas for Canada,
Canadian Government Publishing Centre, 1985.

e. AECTP 200, Leaflet 2311.

f. Tattleman, Paul. A Climatological Model for 1-min Precipitation Rates.

g. Technical Paper No. 43, Rainfall-Frequency Atlas of the Hawaiian


Islands, US Department of Commerce Weather Bureau, 1962.

h. Technical Paper No. 42, Generalized Estimates of Probable Maximum


Precipitation and Rainfall-Frequency Data for Puerto Rico and Virgin
Islands, US Department of Commerce Weather Bureau, 1961.

i. Moriceau, J., Etude Technique No. 749/84/SEM, DGA/LRBA, Vernon,


France.

A-9 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 310

10
1-Year
2-Year
5-Year
10-Year
25-Year
50-Year
100-Year

1
Rainfall Intensity (mm/min)

0.1

0.01
1 10 100 1000 10000
Duration (mins)

Figure 1: Sample IFD Curve

99% 95% 90%


1000

80%
75%

50%
100
Return Period (Years)

10

How to use the chart:


1. Select desired design life
2. Select an acceptable
confidence criteria
3. Read the required return period
1
1 10 100
Design Life (Years)

Figure 2: Risk Assessment Diagram

A-10 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 310

100.00
Maximum Observed
Estimated 100-Year Hawaii/Peurto Rico Rainfall Rates
WMO Envelope for Maximum Rainfall Rates
Recommended 100-Year Return Rainfall Rates

10.00
Average Rainfall Rate (mm/min)

y = 60.4x-0.525

y = 35.5x-0.6
1.00

0.10

0.01
1 10 100 1000
Duration (mins)

Figure 3: Maximum Observed and Recommended 100-Year Rainfall Rates

A-11 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 310

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

A-12 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 311

METHOD 311
ICING

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE ........................................................................................... 1-1


1.1. PURPOSE ................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2. APPLICATION .......................................................................................... 1-1
1.3. LIMITATIONS ........................................................................................... 1-1
CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE .......................................................................... 2-1
2.1. ICE FORMATION ..................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1. Principal Causes ................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2. Types of Ice........................................................................................ 2-1
2.2. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT ........................................................ 2-2
2.3. TEST PROCEDURE ................................................................................. 2-3
2.4. CHOICE OF TEST SEVERITIES .............................................................. 2-3
2.4.1. Configuration and Orientation ............................................................ 2-3
2.4.2. Test Temperature ............................................................................... 2-3
2.4.3. Water Delivery Rate ........................................................................... 2-3
2.4.4. Water Delivery Method ....................................................................... 2-4
2.4.5. Droplet Size ........................................................................................ 2-4
2.4.6. Ice Thickness ..................................................................................... 2-4
2.5. OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS ....................................................... 2-4
CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST
INSTRUCTION ............................................................................... 3-1
CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES .................................... 4-1
4.1. TEST FACILITY ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.2. CONTROLS .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.3. TEST INTERRUPTIONS .......................................................................... 4-1
4.4. PROCEDURE ........................................................................................... 4-1
4.4.1. Preparation for Test............................................................................ 4-1
4.4.2. Test Procedure. .................................................................................. 4-2
CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS ....................................... 5-1
CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................. 6-1

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 311

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 311

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE

NOTE: METHOD 300, GENERAL GUIDANCE AND REQUIREMENTS,


CONTAINS INFORMATION NECESSARY TO CONDUCT THE TEST
PROCEDURES OF THIS METHOD, AND SHALL BE USED IN COMBINATION
WITH THIS TEST METHOD.

1. SCOPE

1.1. PURPOSE

The icing test is conducted to evaluate the effect of icing on the operational capability
of materiel. This Method also provides tests for evaluating the effectiveness of de-icing
equipment and techniques, including prescribed means to be used in the field.

1.2. APPLICATION

a. This Method is applicable to materiel that may be exposed to icing such


as produced by freezing rain or freezing drizzle (see paragraph 2.1.1
below).

b. This Method can be used for ice accretion from sea splash or spray, but
the ice thicknesses may need to be modified to reflect the lower density
of the ice.

1.3. LIMITATIONS

This Method does not simulate snow conditions or ice build-up on aircraft flying through
supercooled clouds. Although frost occurs naturally, the effects are considered less
significant and are not specifically addressed in this Method. This Method may not be
suitable for the assessment of aerial/antenna performance, (i.e., rime ice saturated with
air causes substantial signal reflection). For optional tests for testing vehicle
windscreens/windshields, see EEC Directive 78/317/EEC (reference a). Also, this
Method does not address icing effects from falling, blowing or recirculating snow and
wet snow or slush. These are considered less severe than those in paragraph 2.2.

1-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 311

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

1-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 311

CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE

2. TEST GUIDANCE

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8.

2.1. ICE FORMATION

2.1.1. Principal Causes

A build-up of ice occurs in four principal ways:

a. From rain, drizzle or fog falling on materiel whose surface temperature is


at or below freezing;

b. From sublimation;

c. From freezing rain or freezing drizzle falling on materiel at or near


freezing, or

d. From sea spray and splash that coats materiel when the materiel
temperature is below freezing.

2.1.2. Types of Ice

(See reference b)

Two types of ice are commonly encountered: rime ice (opaque/granular) and glaze ice
(clear/smooth). Published extremes for ice accretion may be used for calculating
design and structural evaluations, but are not considered practical for establishing test
conditions due to the large thicknesses involved, unless the test is intended to provide
practical confirmation of design calculations.

a. Rime ice: A white or milky and opaque granular deposit of ice formed by
a rapid freezing of supercooled water drops as they impinge upon an
exposed object. Rime ice is lighter, softer and less transparent than
glaze. Rime is composed essentially of discrete ice granules and has
densities ranging from 0.2 g/cm3 (soft rime) to almost 0.9 g/cm3 (hard
rime). Factors that favour rime formation are small drop size, slow
accretion, a high degree of supercooling, and rapid dissipation of latent
heat of fusion. The opposite effects favour glaze formation.

(1) Hard rime: Opaque, granular masses of rime deposited chiefly


on vertical surfaces by dense, supercooled fog. Hard rime is

2-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 311

more compact and amorphous than soft rime, and builds out into
the wind as glazed cones or feathers. The icing of ships and
shoreline structures by supercooled spray from the sea usually
has the characteristics of hard rime.

(2) Soft rime: A white, opaque coating of fine rime deposited chiefly
on vertical surfaces, especially on points and edges of objects,
generally in supercooled fog. On the windward side, soft rime
may grow to very thick layers, long feathery cones, or needles
pointing into the wind and having a structure similar to that of
frost.

b. Glaze ice: A coating of ice, generally clear and smooth but usually
containing some air pockets, formed on exposed objects by the freezing
of a film of supercooled water vapour. Glaze is denser, harder and more
transparent than rime. Its density may be as high as 0.9 g/cm3. Factors
that favour glaze formation are large drop size, rapid accretion, slight
supercooling, and slow dissipation of heat of fusion. The opposite effects
favour rime formation. Glaze occurs when rain or drizzle freezes on
objects, and is clear and nearly as dense as pure ice. Since glaze ice is
more difficult to remove, it is structurally a more significant factor and will
be the focus of this test.

2.2. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Ice formation can impede materiel operation and survival and affect the safety of
operating personnel by creating, as example, the following problems:

a. Binding moving parts together.

b. Adding weight to radar antennas, aerodynamic control surfaces,


helicopter rotors, etc.

c. Increasing footing hazards for personnel.

d. Interfering with clearances between moving parts.

e. Inducing structural failures.

f. Reducing airflow efficiency as in cooling systems or filters.

g. Impeding visibility through windshields and optical devices.

h. Affecting transmission of electromagnetic radiation.

2-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 311

i. Providing a source of potential damage to equipment from the


employment of mechanical, manual, or chemical ice removal measures.

j. Reducing efficiency of aerodynamic lifting and control surfaces; and.

k. Reducing (aircraft) stall margins.

2.3. TEST PROCEDURE

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8.

When an icing test is deemed necessary, the procedure included in this Method is
considered suitable for most materiel.

2.4. CHOICE OF TEST SEVERITIES

See Method 300 Chapters 1, 4, and 8.

The test variables are test item configuration and orientation, air and test item
temperature, water delivery method, droplet size, and ice thickness. The values
chosen for the variables are primarily dependent on the intended use of the materiel.

2.4.1. Configuration and Orientation

The following factors are to be considered:

a. Should the test item receive icing on all sides and on top?

b. Should the test item be in its deployment configuration? If required,


perform tests in other configurations such as for shipping or outside
storage.

2.4.2. Test Temperature

Test temperatures that may be used to produce the required environmental conditions
are recommended in the test procedure. The recommended temperatures of the
chamber and water may have to be adjusted for different size facilities to prevent
premature freezing of the water droplets before they come in contact with the test item.
However, the initial test item temperature should not be below 0 °C to allow water to
penetrate (cracks, seams, etc.) prior to freezing.

2.4.3. Water Delivery Rate

The objective is to produce a clear, uniform coating of glaze ice. Any delivery rate that
produces a uniform coating of glaze ice is acceptable. A water delivery rate of

2-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 311

25 mm/hr has been suggested in the test procedure and is based on data from
previous testing.

2.4.4. Water Delivery Method

Any of the following water delivery systems can be used as long as the water is
delivered as a uniform spray:

a. Nozzle arrays directing spray to the top, sides, front and rear of the test
item.

b. Nozzle arrays that direct spray straight down onto the test item.
Sidespray coverage is achieved by using wind or an additional
hand-held nozzle. If wind is used it should be the minimum necessary
to maintain uniform ice accretion.

c. A single nozzle directing the spray over the appropriate surfaces of the
test item.

2.4.5. Droplet Size

The droplet size range may have to be adjusted for different size facilities. A fine spray
in the range of 1.0 to 1.5 mm diameter nominal droplet size has produced satisfactory
icing in some facilities.

2.4.6. Ice Thickness

Unless specifically measured data for the anticipated situation are available, the
following ice thicknesses are recommended (reference c):

a. 6 mm - represents general conditions, light loading.

b. 13 mm - represents general conditions, medium loading.

c. 37 mm - represents heavy ground loading and marine mast loading.

d. 75 mm - represents extremely heavy ground loading and marine deck


loading.

2.5. OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS

a. Some materiel covered with ice may be expected to operate immediately


without first undergoing de-icing procedures; other materiel would not be
expected to operate until some form of de-icing has taken place (e.g.,
aircraft ailerons (flaps) prior to flight).

2-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 311

b. Ice removal, if required, may include built-in ice-removal systems,


prescribed means that could be expected to be employed in the field, or
a combination of these.

c. The correct operation of anti-ice systems such as pre-heated surfaces.

2-5 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 311

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

2-6 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 311

CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST


INSTRUCTION

3. INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

In addition to the information derived from Method 300 Chapter 6, the following are
required:

a. Ice thickness to be applied.

b. Ice removal method(s) (if employed).

c. Any variations from recommended test temperatures and droplet sizes.

d. Surfaces of the test item to which ice is to be applied.

e. Velocity of any wind used.

3-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 311

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 311

CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

4. TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

See Method 300 Chapters 3, 4, and 5 for test facility, test conditions and test control
information.

4.1. TEST FACILITY

In addition to having the characteristics specified in Method 300 Chapter 5, the


chamber and drainage system should be arranged to minimize the collection of
puddles/ice in the chamber. It is not necessary to use de-ionized or distilled water for
this test. No rust or corrosive contaminants shall be imposed on the test item by the
test facility.

4.2. CONTROLS

See Method 300 Chapters 3 and 4.

4.3. TEST INTERRUPTIONS

See Method 300 Chapter 7.

4.4. PROCEDURE

4.4.1. Preparation for Test

Before starting any of the test procedures, determine the information to be documented
from Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6, and perform the pretest standard ambient
checkout specified in Method 300 Chapter 2. In addition:

a. Clean all outside surfaces of any contamination not present during


normal operation. Even thin films of oil or grease will prevent ice from
adhering to the test item and change the test results.

b. To facilitate measurement of ice thickness, depth gauges such as copper


bars or tubes of an appropriate size shall be mounted in places where
they will receive the same general waterspray as the test item. It is
recommended that the gauges be mounted on the test item, particularly
for large or rounded items where this may be the only way of verifying the
thickness on the item. Other suitable thickness measurement techniques
may be used.

4-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 311

NOTE: Since artificially produced ice accretion rates tend to depend upon the
distance between the test item and the spraying system, structures with large
height variations, such as antenna masts, should have test bars placed at the
different heights.

c. Water used in the spray system should be cooled to between 0 °C and


3 °C.

d. If difficulty is experienced in producing a satisfactory layer of glaze ice, it


may be necessary to vary one or more of the parameters, i.e., water or
test item temperature, spray rate, distance between the nozzles and the
test item, etc.

4.4.2. Test Procedure

Step 1. Place the test item in the chamber and arrange the nozzles to
produce ice on specified surfaces.

Step 2. Stabilize the test item temperature at 0 °C (-0/+2 °C).

Step 3. Deliver a uniform precooled water spray for 1 hour to allow water
penetration into the test item crevices/openings (although a water
temperature of 0 to 3 °C is ideal, a water temperature of 5 °C and
a water delivery rate of 25 mm/hr has proven satisfactory).

Step 4. Adjust the chamber air temperature to -10 °C or as specified and


maintain the waterspray rate until the required thickness of ice has
accumulated on the appropriate surfaces. Wind or a side spray
may be used to assist accumulation of ice on the sides of the test
item.

NOTE: It may be easier to stop spraying during the temperature reduction to


facilitate temperature adjustment and to minimize frosting of test chamber
refrigeration coils.

Step 5. Maintain the chamber air temperature for a minimum of 4 hours to


allow the ice to harden. Examine for safety hazards and, if
appropriate, attempt to operate the test item. Document the
results (with photographs if necessary).

Step 6. If the specification allows ice removal, remove the ice. Limit the
method of ice removal to that determined in paragraph 4, e.g.,

4-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 311

built-in ice removal systems, plus expedient means that could be


expected to be employed in the field. Note the effectiveness of ice
removal techniques used.

Step 7. Examine for safety hazards and, if appropriate (and possible),


attempt to operate the test item at the specified low operating
temperature of the materiel.

Step 8. If required, repeat steps 4 through 7 to produce other required


thicknesses of ice.

Step 9. Stabilize the test item at standard ambient conditions and perform
a post-test operational check.

Step 10 Document (with photographs if necessary) the results for


comparison with pretest data.

4-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 311

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

4-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 311

CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

5. EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

See Method 300 Chapter 9.

The following guidance is provided to aid in failure analysis. In most cases the test
item is considered to have failed if:

a. For materiel that must operate without ice removal, the performance of
the test item has been degraded beyond that specified in the
requirements document.

b. For materiel that requires ice removal before operation, the performance
of the item has been degraded beyond the specified limits/requirements
after normal ice-removal efforts have been undertaken.

c. Normal ice removal damages the materiel.

5-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 311

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

5-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 311

CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

6. REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

In addition to the references given in Method 300 Chapter 10, the following are
provided for background information.

a. EEC Directive 78/317/EEC, Motor Vehicles Defrosting and Demisting of


Systems, August 1979.

b. Glossary of Meteorology, Edited by Ralph E. Huschke, Published by the


American Meteorological Society (1959).

c. Letter, Cold Regions Research and Engineering Laboratory, Corps of


Engineers (U.S.), CECRL-RG, 22 October 1990, SUBJECT: Ice
Accretion Rates (Glaze).

6-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 311

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 312

METHOD 312
LOW PRESSURE (ALTITUDE)

Method 312 has been moved to Method 301.

Method 312 is reserved for future use in subsequent editions.

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 312

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 313

METHOD 313
SAND AND DUST

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE............................................................................................... 1-1


1.1. PURPOSE ................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2. APPLICATION........................................................................................... 1-1
1.3. LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................ 1-1
CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE .............................................................................. 2-1
2.1. USE OF MEASURED DATA ..................................................................... 2-1
2.2. SEQUENCE .............................................................................................. 2-1
2.3. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT ........................................................ 2-1
2.4. CHOICE OF TEST PROCEDURE ............................................................ 2-2
2.4.1. Procedure I: Blowing Dust. ................................................................... 2-2
2.4.2. Procedure II: Blowing Sand. ................................................................. 2-3
CHAPTER 3 TEST SEVERITIES................................................................................ 3-1
3.1. GENERAL ..................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2. TEMPERATURE ........................................................................................... 3-1
3.3. AIR VELOCITY .............................................................................................. 3-1
3.4. SAND AND DUST COMPOSITION .............................................................. 3-2
3.5. SAND AND DUST CONCENTRATIONS ...................................................... 3-4
3.6. ORIENTATION .............................................................................................. 3-5
3.7. DURATION .................................................................................................... 3-5
3.8. OPERATION DURING TEST........................................................................ 3-6
3.9. REMOVAL OF SAND AND DUST ACCUMULATIONS ............................... 3-6
CHAPTER 4 INFORMATION REQUIRED .............................................................. 4-1
4.1. INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTIONS ....... 4-1
4.2. INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR VERIFICATION ................................... 4-1
4.2.1. Pre-test ................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.2. During Test ............................................................................................. 4-2
4.2.3. Post Test ................................................................................................ 4-3
CHAPTER 5 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES ........................................ 5-1
5.1. PREPARATION FOR TEST ...................................................................... 5-1
5.2. TEST FACILITY ............................................................................................ 5-1
5.2.1. Blowing Dust. ......................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.2. Blowing Sand. ........................................................................................ 5-1
5.3. INSTALLATION CONDITIONS OF THE TEST ITEM ................................ 5-2
5.4. TOLERANCES AND RELATED CHARACTERISTICS ............................. 5-2
5.5. CONTROLS .............................................................................................. 5-3
5.6. TEST INTERRUPTIONS ........................................................................... 5-3
5.6.1. Interruption Due To Laboratory Equipment Malfunction ..................... 5-3
5.6.2. Interruption Due To Test Materiel Operation Failure .......................... 5-4
5.6.3. Interruption Due To a Scheduled Event ............................................. 5-5
5.6.4. Interruption Due to Exceeding Test Tolerances ................................. 5-5

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 313

CONTENTS - Continued

5.7. PROCEDURES ......................................................................................... 5-5


5.7.1. Procedure I - Blowing Dust .................................................................... 5-5
5.7.2. Procedure II - Blowing Sand. ................................................................. 5-8
CHAPTER 6 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS ........................................... 6-1
CHAPTER 7 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS ................................. 7-1

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 313

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE

NOTE: METHOD 300, GENERAL GUIDANCE AND REQUIREMENTS,


CONTAINS INFORMATION NECESSARY TO CONDUCT THE TEST
PROCEDURES OF THIS METHOD, AND SHALL BE USED IN COMBINATION
WITH THIS TEST METHOD.

1.1. PURPOSE

The purpose of the Sand and Dust test method is to obtain data to evaluate the
effects of the desert environmental conditions on material safety, integrity and
performance. Perform the small-particle dust (<149 m) procedure to ascertain the
ability of materiel to resist the effects of dust. Perform the blowing sand test
procedure to determine if materiel can be stored and/or operated during blowing sand
(150 to 850 m particle size).

1.2. APPLICATION

This method is applicable to all materiel for which exposure to a dry, blowing sand or
blowing dust-laden atmosphere is anticipated.

1.3. LIMITATIONS

The scope of this method is laboratory testing, but can be tailored to item specific test
evaluation requirements. This method is not suitable for determining erosion of
airborne (in flight) materiel because of the particle impact velocities involved, or for
determining the effects of a build-up of electrostatic charge. This Method does not
address sand or dust testing outdoors. Guidance for outdoor and commodity specific
testing is provided in: Test Operations Procedure (TOP) 01-2-621 Outdoor Sand and
Dust Testing; TOP 02-2-819 Sand Dust Testing of Wheeled and Tracked Vehicles;
TOP 03-2-045 Small Arms - Hand and Shoulder Weapons and Machineguns;
TOP 03-4-012 Desert Environmental (Sand and Dust) Testing of Vehicle-Mounted
Primary and Secondary Automatic Weapon Systems, Up To 40mm; NATO AC/225
(LG/3-SG1)D/14 Evaluation Procedures for Future NATO Small Arms Weapon
Systems. This method does not address aerosols other than dust. This method
does not address settling dust. If settling dust is of concern, concentration levels can
be obtained from International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 60721-2-5, and
test procedures for settling dust can be obtained from IEC 60068-2-68 Test Lb.
Human factors related to sand and dust exposure are not addressed.

1-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

1-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE

2.1. USE OF MEASURED DATA

1. Having selected this Method and relevant procedures (based on the materiel's
requirements documents and the tailoring process), it is necessary to complete the
tailoring process by selecting specific parameter levels and special test
conditions/techniques for these procedures based on requirements documents, Life
Cycle Environmental Profile (LCEP), and information provided with this method.
From these sources of information, determine the functions to be performed by the
materiel in sand and dust environments, or following storage in such environments.
Then determine the sand and dust concentrations of the geographical areas and
micro-environments in which the materiel is designed to be employed. To do this,
consider the following in light of the operational purpose and life cycle of the materiel.

2. Base the specific test conditions on field data if available. Consider the
configuration of the test item (operational, storage, etc.) when selecting available field
data. In the absence of field data, determine the test conditions from the applicable
requirements documents. If this information is not available, utilize information in
Chapter 3 and in the references of Chapter 7.

2.2. SEQUENCE

1. Use the Life Cycle Environmental Profile as a general guide, see Method 300,
“General Guidance and Requirements” for additional information.

2. This method can produce a dust coating on, or severe abrasion of a test item,
that could influence the results of other environmental test methods such as Solar
Radiation (Method 305), Humidity (Method 306), Mould Growth (Method 308),
Contamination by Fluids (Method 314), and Salt Fog (Method 309). Therefore, use
judgement to determine the sequence of tests. The presence of dust in combination
with other environmental parameters can induce corrosion or mould growth. A warm,
humid environment can cause corrosion in the presence of chemically reactive dust.

3. If both sand and dust procedures are to be applied to the same test item, it is
generally more appropriate to conduct the less damaging first, i.e., blowing dust and
then blowing sand.

2.3. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Although the blowing sand and dust environment is usually associated with hot-dry
regions, it exists seasonally in most other regions. Naturally - occurring sand and
dust storms are an important factor in the deployment of materiel, but with the
increased mechanisation of military operations, they can cause fewer problems than

2-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

does sand and dust associated with man’s or battlefield activities. Examples of
problems that could occur as a result of exposure to blowing sand and dust are as
follows; the list is not intended to be all-inclusive.

a. Abrasion and erosion of surfaces.

b. Penetration of seals.

c. Degraded performance of electrical circuits.

d. Obstruction/clogging of openings and filters.

e. Physical/interference with mating parts.

f. Fouling/interference of moving parts.

g. Reduction of heat transfer.

h. Interference with optical characteristics.

I. Overheating and fire hazard due to reduced/restricted ventilation or


cooling.

j. Wear (increased fretting due to imbedding between mating surfaces).

k. Increased chaffing between non-mating contacting surfaces.

l. Weight gain, static/dynamic balance.

m. Attenuation of signal transmission.

2.4. CHOICE OF TEST PROCEDURE

This Method includes two laboratory (chamber) test procedures: Blowing Dust and
Blowing Sand. Select the applicable procedure based on the materiel’s intended
deployment exposure and function.

2.4.1. Procedure I: Blowing Dust

Use this procedure to assess the ability of materiel to resist the effects of dust
(<149 m particle size) that may obstruct openings, abrade surfaces, penetrate into
cracks, crevices, bearings and joints, and to evaluate the effectiveness of filters and
protective covers that are designed to prevent dust intrusion. This method is also
used to evaluate the reduction in heat transfer from dust accumulation such as
fouling of cooling fins.

2-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

2.4.2. Procedure II: Blowing Sand

Use this procedure to determine if materiel can be stored and/or operated under
blowing sand (150 to 850 m particle size) conditions without degradation of
performance, effectiveness, reliability, and maintainability due to the abrasion
(erosion) or clogging effect of sharp-edged particles.

2-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

2-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

CHAPTER 3 TEST SEVERITIES

3.1. GENERAL

After choosing the test procedure(s), determine the values of the test parameters and
whether the test item is to operate during the test. In the absence of field data, use
the following guidance.

3.2. TEMPERATURE

Unless otherwise specified, conduct the blowing sand and blowing dust tests with the
test item at the high operating or storage temperature. In the absence of this
information, perform the tests at, the maximum ambient air temperature for the A1
climatic category (Leaflet 2311) induced or meteorological, as required. A portion of
the Blowing Dust test is also performed at Standard Laboratory Temperature to
ensure that the equipment will perform across the temperature range. In some
cases, the test plan may not require the test be performed at the two temperatures.
In such case, it is recommended to perform the test at the higher temperature.

3.3. AIR VELOCITY

a. Blowing Dust. In the absence of specified values, the air velocities


used in the blowing dust test procedure include an air velocity of no
greater than 2.5 m/s to maintain test conditions, and a higher air
velocity of 9 m/s ± 1.3 m/s typical of desert winds. Use other air
velocities if representative of natural conditions and if the capabilities of
the test chamber allow. The lower air speed during temperature
conditioning is to ensure that airborne dust within the chamber is
minimized and the pressure applied to the dust laden test item due to
wind speed is minimized during this period.

b. Blowing Sand. Winds of 18 m/s capable of blowing the large particle


sand are common, while gusts up to 30 m/s are not unusual. If the air
velocity around the materiel in its field application is known to be
outside of this range, use the known velocity, otherwise select an air
velocity in the range of 18 to 30 m/s for most blowing sand applications.
Apply a tolerance of ±10%.

1. Ensure the sand particles impact the test item at velocities ranging from
18 to 30 m/s. In order for the particles to attain these velocities, maintain an
approximate distance of 3 m from the sand injection point to the test item. Use other
distances if it can be proven the particles achieve the necessary velocity at impact.

3-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

NOTE: For typical testing, uniform wind speeds are provided across the test
area. If the test item is large and at ground level some consideration should be
given to account for the wind profile from the ground to the test item height.
See AECTP 230 for wind profiles found in nature.

2. Wind speed verification typically takes place prior to the testing. For this
verification, the sampling rate for wind speed measurements will be a minimum of 4
samples per second. The steady state (sustained) wind speeds will be verified by
averaging the wind speeds over 10 seconds with the wind generation equipment
controls held constant. A gust is defined as a 3 second period at the level of
increased wind speed. When performing a test with gusts, a minimum of four gusts
per hour is recommended. The accuracy of wind measurement devices, such as
cup, propeller and hot wire anemometers, are negatively affected by the sand and
dust environment, therefore wind speed measurements should be taken in clean air
with these devices. Variation in wind direction, or high turbulence, can also influence
cup and propeller measurement accuracy.

3.4. SAND AND DUST COMPOSITION

A variety of materials are applicable for dust and sand testing, the selection depends
on the test objectives (erosion, infiltration, electrical conductivity etc.) and material
availability. Material properties such as particle size, hardness, roundness and
sphericity, material composition must be considered against the test objectives.
Quartz is a typical test material due to being chemically inert and available both as
ground quartz (silica flour dust) and sand. Kaolinite (clay) based materials can be
used to evaluate reaction with moisture or hydraulic fluids.

a. Blowing Dust

(1) Composition: Conduct the small particle (blowing dust)


procedure with any of the following (by weight):

(a) Red china clay is common throughout much of the world


and contains:

CaCO3, MgC03, Mg0, TiO2, etc. 5%


Ferric oxide (Fe2O3) 10 ± 5%
Aluminium oxide (Al2O3) 20 ± 10%
Silicon dioxide (SiO2) remaining percentage

(b) Silica flour (ground quartz) has been widely used in dust
testing and contains 97 to 99 per cent (by weight) silicon
dioxide (SiO2).

3-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

(c) If other materials are used for dust testing, their particle
size distribution may fall below that in paragraph 3.4.a.(2)
below. Ensure material to be used is appropriate for the
intended purpose and regions of the world being
simulated. These materials for dust testing include:

- Talc (talcum powder) (hydrated magnesium


silicate).

- F.E. (fire extinguisher powder composed mainly of


sodium or potassium hydrogen carbonate with a
small amount of magnesium stearate bonded to the
surface of the particles in order to assist free-
running and prevent clogging - must be used in dry
conditions to prevent corrosive reaction and
formation of new chemicals (reference c)).

- Undecomposed feldspar and olivine (that have


similar properties to quartz).

- Portland cement - must be kept dry to prevent


solidification or corrosion.

WARNING: Refer to the supplier’s Safety Data Sheet (SDS) or equivalent for
health hazard data. Exposure to silica flour (ground quartz) can cause silicosis;
other materials may cause adverse health effects.

(2) Particle Size. Unless otherwise specified, use a particle size


distribution of 100% of the material by weight less than 150 µm,
with a median diameter (50% by weight) of 20  5 µm. This dust
is commonly referred to as a “140 mesh silica flour (ground
silica)” (about 2% retained on a 140 mesh (106 µm) sieve), and
should provide comparable results to prior test requirements.
National documentation may contain other more specific
distributions. ASTM D185-07, Standard Test Methods for
Coarse Particles in Pigments, provides a method for particle size
measurements by sieve analysis. If particle size measurements
are carried out using techniques other than sieve analysis, it
must be demonstrated that the same results are produced.

a. Blowing Sand. Unless otherwise specified, for the large particle sand
test, use quartz sand (at least 95% by weight SiO 2). Use sand with a
sub-angular structure, a mean Krumbein (roundness and sphericity)
number range 0.5 to 0.7, and a hardness factor of 7 Mohs. If possible,

3-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

determine the particle size distribution from the geographical region in


which the materiel will be deployed. There are 90 deserts in the world,
each with different particle size distributions. The recommended
particle size distribution for the sand test is between 150 µm and
850 µm, with a mean of 90%  5% by weight smaller than 600 µm and
larger than 149 µm, and as least 5% by weight 600 µm and larger.
When materiel is designed for use in a region that is known to have an
unusual or special sand requirement, analyse a sample of the local
sand to determine the distribution of the material used in the test.
Specify the details of its composition in the requirements documents.

WARNING: The same health hazard considerations as noted for the dust
apply. Refer to the supplier’s Safety Data Sheet (SDS) or equivalent for health
hazard data; exposure to crystalline silica can cause silicosis.

3.5. SAND AND DUST CONCENTRATIONS

a. Blowing Dust. Maintain the average dust concentration for the blowing
dust test at 10.6  7 g/m3 unless otherwise specified. This
concentration exceeds that normally associated with moving vehicles,
aircraft, and troop movement, but has historically proven to be a reliable
concentration for blowing dust tests using silica flour (ground quartz)
material. If available, use a dust concentration based on natural
environment data or other historical information to accurately represent
the specific service condition.

b. Blowing Sand. Unless otherwise specified, maintain the average sand


concentrations as follows (reference a):

(1) For materiel likely to be used close to helicopters and other


aircraft operating over unpaved surfaces: 2.2  0.5 g/m3.

(2) For materiel never used or exposed in the vicinity of operating


aircraft, but that may be used or stored unprotected near
operating surface vehicles: 1.1  0.3 g/m3.

(3) For materiel that will be subjected only to natural conditions:


0.18 g/m3, -0.0/+0.2 g/m3. (This large tolerance is due to the
difficulties of measuring concentrations at low levels.)

NOTE: If the wind velocity is increased intermittently to simulate a gust it is


permissible to allow the sand feed rate to remain constant and the
concentration to be reduced for this period of time of intermittent increase in
wind speed.

3-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

3.6. ORIENTATION

a. Blowing Dust. Orient the test item such that the most vulnerable
surfaces face the blowing dust. Rotate the test item as required to
expose all vulnerable surfaces to equal portions of the total test time.
When possible, evaluate the airflow around the test item in-service to
determine required chamber boundary conditions to create similar
airflow and cooling conditions. Consider removal of the dust
accumulation during the reorientation of the test item. See
paragraph 3.9.

b. Blowing Sand. Orient the test item with respect to the direction of the
blowing sand such that the test item will experience maximum erosion
effects in the fielded configuration. The test item may be re-oriented at
90-minute intervals. Consider the incident angle of sand particle impact
on the severity of erosion in selecting orientations. When possible,
evaluate the airflow around the test item in-service to determine
required chamber boundary conditions to create similar airflow and
cooling conditions.

3.7. DURATION

a. Blowing Dust. Unless otherwise specified, conduct the blowing dust


test for 6 hours at standard laboratory temperatures and for 6 hours at
the high storage or operating temperature. It is permissible to stop
between the two 6-hour periods provided the humidity level is kept
below 30% and all test conditions are restabilized prior to continuing. In
some cases, the test plan may not require the test be performed at the
two temperatures. In such case, it is recommended to perform the test
for 6-hours at the higher temperature.

b. Blowing Sand. For blowing sand tests, 90 minutes per face is


considered to be a minimum.

NOTE: If facility limitations do not allow for the coverage of an entire face of
the test item, the length of overall exposure should be extended to allow for the
equivalent amount of exposure that would be performed if the facility limitation
did not exist. For example, if an item with four vulnerable sides is undergoing
dust testing, but the facility can only cover half of each face, two exposures
would be needed for each face. In this case the total time of testing would be
doubled.

3-5 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

3.8. OPERATION DURING TEST

1. Determine the need to operate the test item during exposure to sand or dust
from the anticipated in-service operational requirements. For example, continuously
operate heat dissipating materiel while exposed to sand and dust environments if the
item is expected to be operated continuously in the field. Certain materiel, although
exposed to sand and dust environments while non-operating, may be operated only
in an environmentally controlled shelter. Tailor the operating requirements in the test
plan accordingly. Specify the time and periods of operation in the test plan. This
schedule should normally contain at least one 10-minute period of continuous
functioning of the test item during the last hour of the test, with the test item’s most
vulnerable surface facing the blowing sand or dust.

2. For test items that will be required to operate in the field for extended periods
of time consider longer operational periods, up to the full period of dust exposure.
Depending on the test item and the LCEP, repeated manipulation may be required
between exposures to ensure proper operation. For example, the wear of hydraulic,
pneumatic seals, or operator controls may not occur without repetitive
use/manipulation of the equipment during testing.

3. Consider removal of the dust accumulation on the test item prior to the period
of operation. See paragraph 3.9.

3.9. REMOVAL OF SAND AND DUST ACCUMULATIONS

1. Experience has shown that dust accumulations of 13 mm (0.5 inch) on the test
item are not uncommon during the chamber dust exposure. This can create a
condition that may not be experienced in the life cycle of the test item. This layer of
dust may form a protective layer over the seals. Removing the dust during the
reorientation of the test item may provide a more realistic application of the fielded
environment. If dust removal is to be performed, the item specific dust removal
procedures shall be documented prior to test in the approved test plan.

2. In the event of an operational test this build-up of dust will reduce the ability of
the test item to shed the thermal load generated by electronics. If dust accumulations
are expected in the field perform the operational test without removing the dust. If
the item will be routinely maintained or exposed to other environments (high winds,
rain, etc.) that will mitigate dust build up consider removing the dust prior to
operation.

3. Procedures for dust removal must reflect the in service use in accordance with
the field manual with the tools available in the field. Remove accumulated dust from
the test item by brushing or wiping taking care to avoid introduction of additional dust
or disturbing any that may have already entered the test item. Do not remove dust by
either air blast or vacuum cleaning unless these methods are likely to be used in
service.

3-6 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

4. Photographs prior to and following the dust removal must be performed.

3-7 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3-8 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

CHAPTER 4 INFORMATION REQUIRED

4.1. INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTIONS

1. In addition to the information derived from Method 300, the following are
required for these tests:

a. Sand or dust composition.

b. Sand or dust concentration.

c. Test item orientation (incident angle).

d. Time of exposure per orientation.

e. Methods of sand and dust removal as used in service.

f. Test temperatures.

g. Air velocity.

2. The following may be required:

a. Procedures for determining the test item’s degradation due to abrasion.

b. Operational Test Instructions including time period of operation and test


item performance.

c. Any additional parameters to be measured and recorded. (i.e., weight,


balance, fluid contamination.)

d. Any permitted deviations from the test procedure.

e. Necessary variations in the basic test procedures to accommodate


environments identified in the LCEP.

4.2. INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR VERIFICATION

4.2.1. Pre-test

a. General. Information listed in Method 300.

b. Specific to this Method.

4-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

(1) Air velocity calibration of fan settings (if the velocity is not
continuously measured and recorded). Any calibrations of feed
rates or chamber checkouts required to prove proper application
of the applied environment.

(2) Pre-test photographs of the item and test setup.

(3) Results of pre-test functional test. Record of air and test item
temperature and humidity during pre-test functional test, if
required.

(4) Thermocouple locations and photographs.

(5) Provide the composition and particle size distribution of the Sand
and Dust.

4.2.2. During Test

a. General. Information listed in Method 300.

b. Specific to this Method.

(1) Chamber Air and Test Item Temperature vs. Time for the entire
test period.

(2) Photographic documentation prior to and following each change


in test item orientation or cleaning.

(3) Durations of Blowing Sand or Dust exposure for each orientation.

(4) Photographic documentation showing the orientation of the test


item with respect to the air flow.

(5) Documentation of operating and non-operating periods as well


as any functional tests conducted.

(6) Document when thermal stabilization of the test item was


achieved for the purpose of evaluating the duration of high
temperature exposure.

(7) Any deviations from the original test plan.

c. Specific to Blowing Dust.

(1) Relative Humidity vs. Time.

4-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

(2) Dust Concentration vs. Time.

(3) Wind Speed vs. Time or record of measurements performed to


calibrate wind speed just prior to the testing.

d. Specific to Blowing Sand.

(1) Sand Concentration vs. Time or record of measurements


performed to calibrate sand concentration just prior to the testing.

(2) Wind Speed vs. Time or record of measurements performed to


calibrate wind speed just prior to the testing.

4.2.3. Post Test

a. General. Information listed in Method 300.

b. Specific to this Method.

(1) Results of each visual inspection. Detailed photographs.

(2) Documentation of the cleaning methods performed. Detailed


photographs before and after cleaning methods are applied.

(3) Any deviations from the original test plan.

(4) Functional test results. Describe any anomalies.

(5) Documentation of any sand or dust intrusions.

(6) Documentation of abrasion areas.

4-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

4-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

CHAPTER 5 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

See Method 300 for test facility, test conditions, and test control information.

5.1. PREPARATION FOR TEST

In addition to the information provided in Method 300, ensure the test item and facility
are properly grounded to avoid build-up of an electrostatic charge and possible
airborne dust explosions. Ensure that the plans are in place to gather the information
required by paragraph 4.2. The following information is also appropriate.

5.2. TEST FACILITY

In order to provide adequate circulation of the sand or dust-laden air, do not occupy
more than 50% of the test section’s cross-sectional area (normal to airflow) and 30%
of the volume of the test chamber by the test item(s). The use of a chamber turntable
reduces personnel exposure to airborne particulates when re-orienting the test item.
For any test the material composition, particle shape, and particle size distribution
should be documented from manufacturer supplied data or actual test facility
measurement. Material properties can vary between production lots, thus for long
duration or repetitive/competitive tests the same lot should be used for successive
tests.

5.2.1. Blowing Dust

a. Use a test facility that consists of a chamber and accessories to control


dust concentration, velocity, temperature, and relative humidity of dust-
laden air. Ensure that the dust is uniformly distributed in the air stream.
Ensure that the air stream velocities are uniform. Ensure the chamber
has a means of maintaining and verifying the concentration of dust in
circulation. An acceptable means for doing this is by use of a properly
calibrated opacity meter and standard light source. When using this
method ensure that the light source and opacity meter are kept free of
dust accumulations and lens abrasion, use of a dry air purge system is
a common methodology.

b. Use dust in this test as outlined in paragraph 3.3.

5.2.2. Blowing Sand

a. Control the sand feeder to emit the sand at the specified


concentrations. To simulate the effects produced in the field, locate the
feeder in such a manner as to ensure the sand is approximately

5-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

uniformly suspended in the air stream when it strikes the test item.
Ensure that the air stream velocities are uniform.

b. Because of the abrasive characteristics of blowing sand, it is not


recommended that the sand be recirculated through the fan or air
conditioning equipment. Instead, it should be separated from the air
downstream from the test item.

5.3. INSTALLATION CONDITIONS OF THE TEST ITEM

1. The configuration of the test item will affect the test results. Use the
anticipated configuration of the materiel in the life cycle environmental profile. As a
minimum, consider the following configurations:

a. In a shipping/storage container or transportation case.

b. Deployed in the fielded configuration.

2. Grounding of the test items should be performed to avoid buildup of


electrostatic energy. If available, ground the item utilizing existing test item ground
points or those designated by the test item design documentation.

3. For the blowing sand test, calibrate the sand dispensing system for the sand
concentration specified in the test plan, and adjust the air supply or test item position
to obtain the specified air velocity at the test item when it is located a minimum of
3 metres from the sand injection point.

4. If not previously accomplished, measure the sand concentration and wind


velocity over the test cross sectional area to ensure uniformity.

5. For blowing sand and blowing dust tests, if operation is required, this is
typically performed on the face of the test item deemed most vulnerable during the
final exposure at each test temperature.

5.4. TOLERANCES AND RELATED CHARACTERISTICS

The uniformity of the dust and sand in the air stream as well as the wind speeds
should be measured and documented. The test tolerances in Table 1 provide the
tolerances on the average of the sand concentration, dust concentration and wind
speeds measured at sufficient number of points to ensure uniformity across cross
sectional test area.

5-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

Table 1: Test Tolerances

Measurement Sand Dust


Concentration see paragraph 3.4 ±7 g/m3
Wind Speed ±10% ±1.3 m/s
Air Temperature ±2 °C ±2 °C
Relative Humidity 0 to 30% 0 to 30%

5.5. CONTROLS

a. In addition to the controls specified in Method 300, control the test


chamber relative humidity so that it does not exceed 30% because
higher levels may cause caking of dust particles.

b. For the blowing sand test, continuously measure the humidity and
temperature during the test. Verify the air velocity and sand
concentration prior to testing by determining the sand feed rate using
the following formula:

Feed Rate = (Concentration) x (Area) x (Velocity)

Where:

Feed Rate = mass of sand introduced into the test chamber per set
time interval.

Concentration = sand concentration required by the test plan

Area = cross-sectional area of the sand laden wind stream at the test
item location.

Velocity = average velocity of air across the cross-sectional area at the


test item location.

5.6. TEST INTERRUPTIONS

Test interruptions can result from a number of situations that are described in the
following paragraphs. See Method 300 for additional information.

5.6.1. Interruption Due To Laboratory Equipment Malfunction

1. Specific to this Method. When interruptions are due to failure of the laboratory
equipment, analyze the failure to determine root cause. If the test item was not
subjected to an over-test condition as a result of the equipment failure, repair the test
equipment or move to alternate test equipment and resume testing from the point of

5-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

interruption. Assuming test parameters are within test tolerances, the abrasion,
penetration and collection of sand and dust are cumulative effects that are not
affected by premature test stoppage. Re-establish appropriate test conditions and
continue from the point of interruption.

2. If the test item was subjected to an over-test condition as a result of the


equipment failure, notify the test engineer or program engineer responsible for the
test materiel immediately. Following exposure to excessive sand or dust
concentrations, remove as much of the accumulation as possible (as would be done
in service) and continue from the point of interruption. If abrasion is of concern, either
restart the test with a new test item or reduce the exposure period by using the
concentration-time equivalency (assuming the over test concentration rate is known).

5.6.2. Interruption Due To Test Materiel Operation Failure

Failure of the test materiel to operate as required during operational checks presents
a situation with several possible options. Failure of subsystems often has varying
degrees of importance in evaluation of the test materiel integrity. Selection of one or
more options from a through c below will be test specific.

a. The preferable option is to replace the test item with a “new” one, and
restart the entire test.

b. An alternative is to replace/repair the failed or non-functioning


component or assembly with one that functions as intended, and restart
the entire test. Conduct a risk analysis prior to proceeding since this
option places an over-test condition on the entire test item, except for
the replaced component. If the non-functioning component or
subsystem is a line replaceable unit (LRU) whose life-cycle is less than
that of the system test being conducted, it may be allowable to
substitute the LRU and proceed from the point of interruption.

c. For many system level tests involving either very expensive or unique
materiel, it may not be possible to acquire additional hardware for re-
test based on a single subsystem failure. For such cases, perform a
risk assessment by the organization responsible for the system under
test to determine if replacement of the failed subsystem and resumption
of the test is an acceptable option. If such approval is provided, the
failed component should be re-tested at the subcomponent level.

NOTE: When evaluating failure interruptions, consider prior testing on the


same test item and consequences of such.

5-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

5.6.3. Interruption Due To a Scheduled Event

There are often situations in which scheduled test interruptions will take place. The
abrasion, penetration and collection of sand and dust are cumulative effects that are
not affected by test interruptions. Document all scheduled interruptions in the test
plan and test report.

5.6.4. Interruption Due to Exceeding Test Tolerances

5.6.4.1. Undertest Interruption

Follow any undertest interruption by reestablishing the prescribed test conditions and
continue from the point of interruption.

5.6.4.2. Overtest Interruption

If the test item was subjected to an over-test condition as a result of the test
equipment failure, notify the test engineer or program engineer responsible for the
test materiel immediately. Following exposure to excessive sand concentrations,
remove as much of the accumulation as possible (as would be done in service) and
continue from the point of interruption. If abrasion is of concern, either restart the test
with a new test item or reduce the exposure period by using the concentration-time
equivalency (assuming the overtest concentration rate is known).

5.7. PROCEDURES

WARNING: The relatively dry test environment combined with the moving air,
dust and sand particles may cause a build-up of electrostatic energy that could
affect operation of the test item. Use caution when making contact with the test
item during or following testing.

5.7.1. Procedure I - Blowing Dust

WARNING: Silica flour (ground quartz) or other dusts of similar particle size
may present a health hazard. When using silica flour (ground quartz), ensure
the chamber is functioning properly and not leaking; if a failure of containment
is noted and personnel might have been exposed, air samples should be
obtained and compared to the current threshold limit values of the national
safety and health regulations. Chamber repair and/or other appropriate action
must be taken before continuing use of the chamber. Care should be taken
during all steps where exposure of personnel to the dust is possible.

5-5 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

5.7.1.1. Pre-test Standard Ambient Checkout

All items require a pre-test standard ambient checkout to provide baseline data.
Conduct the pre-test checkout as follows:

Step 1. Conduct a complete visual examination of the test item with


special attention to sealed areas and small/minute openings, and
document the results.

Step 2. Prepare the test item in its operating configuration or as otherwise


specified in the test plan. Install test item instrumentation as
required by the test plan. When applying surface mount
thermocouples, minimize the coverage of the test item surface to
the greatest extent possible.

Step 3. Position the test item as near the center of the test chamber as
possible and away from any other test item (if more than one item
is being tested). Orient the test item to expose the most critical or
vulnerable parts to the dust stream. Ensure the test item is
grounded (either through direct contact with the test chamber or
with a grounding strap).

NOTE: If required by the test plan, change the orientation of the test item
during the test as specified.

Step 4. Stabilize the test item temperature at standard laboratory


conditions.

Step 5. Conduct a functional test in accordance with the test plan and
record results.

Step 6. If the test item operates satisfactorily, proceed to Step 1 of the test
procedure. If not, resolve the problem and restart at Step 1 of pre-
test checkout.

CAUTION: When temperature conditioning, ensure the total test time at elevated
temperatures do not exceed the life expectancy of any safety critical materials.
This is particularly applicable to energetic materials. See Method 300.

5-6 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

5.7.1.2. Blowing Dust Test Procedure

Step 1. With the test item in the chamber and stabilized at standard
laboratory temperature (see paragraph 3.2), adjust the air velocity
to the required value, determined from the test plan. Adjust the
relative humidity to less than 30% and maintain it throughout the
test.

Step 2. Adjust the dust feed control for a dust concentration of


10.6  7 g/m3

Step 3. Unless otherwise specified, maintain the conditions of Steps 1 and


2 for at least 6 hours. If required, periodically reorient the test item
to expose other vulnerable faces to the dust stream. If required,
perform dust removal when the test item is reoriented. See
paragraph 3.9. SEE THE ABOVE WARNING REGARDING
HEALTH HAZARDS. If required, operate the test item in
accordance with the test plan. Otherwise proceed to Step 4.

Step 4. Stop the dust feed. (See paragraph 3.7.) If required, operate the
test item in accordance with the test plan. Reduce the test section
air velocity to no greater than 2.5 m/s and adjust the temperature
to the required high temperature (see paragraph 3.2), or as
otherwise determined from the test plan. The rate of temperature
change shall be no greater than 3 °C/min.

Step 5. Maintain the Step 4 conditions for a minimum of 1 hour following


test item temperature stabilization.

Step 6. Adjust the air velocity to that used in Step 1, and restart the dust
feed to maintain the dust concentration as in Step 2.

Step 7. Continue the exposure for at least 6 hours or as otherwise


specified. If required perform the following:

a. Periodically reorient the test item to expose other


vulnerable faces to the dust stream.

b. Perform dust removal when the test item is reoriented. See


paragraph 3.9. Take photographs prior to and following the
dust removal.

c. Operate and/or manipulate the test item in accordance with


the test plan.

SEE THE ABOVE WARNING NOTE REGARDING HEALTH HAZARDS.

5-7 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

Step 8. Stop the dust feed, stop or reduce the air speed to no greater than
2.5 m/s, and allow the test item to return to standard laboratory
conditions at a rate not to exceed 3 °C/min. Stop any air flow and
allow the dust to settle.

Step 9. Photograph the test item to document dust accumulation.

Step 10. Remove accumulated dust from the test item by brushing or
wiping, taking care to avoid introduction of additional dust or
disturbing any that may have already entered the test item. See
paragraph 3.9. Do NOT remove dust by either air blast or vacuum
cleaning unless these methods are likely to be used in service.

SEE THE ABOVE WARNING REGARDING HEALTH HAZARDS.

Step 11. Inspect the test item for dust penetration, giving special attention
to bearings, seals, lubricants, filters, ventilation points, etc.
Document the results.

Step 12. Perform a functional test in accordance with the approved test
plan, and document the results for comparison with pre-test data.
See Chapter 6 for evaluation of results.

Step 13. If required, clean the test item further to ensure that personnel that
will be handling or occupying the test item are not exposed to
unnecessary health hazards.

5.7.2. Procedure II - Blowing Sand

5.7.2.1. Pre-test Standard Ambient Checkout

All items require a pre-test standard ambient checkout to provide baseline data.
Conduct the pre-test checkout as follows:

Step 1. Conduct a complete visual examination of the test item with


special attention to sealed areas and small/minute openings, and
document the results.

Step 2. Prepare the test item in its operating configuration or as otherwise


specified in the test plan. Install test item instrumentation as
required by the test plan. When applying surface mount
thermocouples, minimize the coverage of the test item surface to
the greatest extent possible.

5-8 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

Step 3. Position the test item at the required distance from the sand
injection point. Orient the test item to expose the most critical or
vulnerable parts to the dust stream.

Step 4. Ensure the test item is grounded (either through direct contact
with the test chamber or with a grounding strap).

NOTE: If required to change the orientation during the test, ensure that the
instrumentation and fixtures will allow this to occur.

Step 4. Stabilize the test item temperature at standard laboratory


conditions.

Step 5. Conduct a functional test in accordance with the test plan and
record results.

Step 6. If the test item operates satisfactorily, proceed to Step 1 of the test
procedure. If not, resolve the problem and restart at Step 1 of pre-
test checkout.

CAUTION: When temperature conditioning, ensure the total test time at elevated
temperatures do not exceed the life expectancy of any safety critical materials.
This is particularly applicable to energetic materials. See Method 300.

5.7.2.2. Blowing Sand Test Procedure

Step 1. Increase the chamber temperature (at a rate not to exceed


3 °C/min) and stabilise the test item at the required high
temperature (see paragraph 3.2), or as otherwise determined
from the test plan.

Step 2. Adjust the air velocity to that required by the test plan.

Step 3. Adjust the sand feeder to obtain the sand mass flow rate
determined from the pre-test calibration.

Step 4. Maintain the conditions of Steps 1 through 3 for the duration


specified in test plan. If required, interrupt the blowing sand and
reorient the test item at 90-minute intervals to expose all
vulnerable faces to the blowing sand and repeat Steps 2
through 4.

5-9 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

Step 5. If functioning of the test item during the test is required, perform
a functional test of the item during the last hour of the test and
document the results. The functional test should be performed
during the exposure of the most vulnerable face. If not, proceed
to Step 6.

SEE THE ABOVE WARNING REGARDING HEALTH HAZARDS

Step 6. Stop the sand feed. Allow the chamber air temperature to return
to standard laboratory conditions at a rate not to exceed
3 °C/min. Stabilize the test item temperature. Stop any air flow
through the chamber.

Step 7. Visually inspect the item looking for clogging effects, abrasion,
and sand accumulation that may impede operation of the test
item.

Step 8. Photograph the sand accumulation on the test item.

Step 9. Remove accumulated sand from the test item by using the
methods anticipated to be used in service such as brushing,
wiping, shaking, etc., taking care to avoid introduction of
additional sand into the test item.

Step 10. Visually inspect the test item looking for abrasion and clogging
effects, and any evidence of sand penetration. Document the
results.

Step 11. Conduct a functional test of the test item in accordance with the
approved test plan and record results for comparison with pre-
test data.

5-10 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

CHAPTER 6 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

In addition to the guidance provided in Method 300 the following are provided to
assist in the evaluation of the test results. Determine if:

a. Sand or dust has penetrated the test item in sufficient quantity to cause
binding, clogging, seizure or blocking of moving parts, non-operation of
contacts or relays, or the formation of electrically conductive paths with
resulting short circuits.

b. Functional performance is within the specified requirements/tolerances.

c. Protective coatings or seals were compromised.

d. Abrasion of the test item exceeds the specified requirements.

e. The test item operates as required.

f. Air filters are clogged restricting air flow.

6-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

CHAPTER 7 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

a. Synopsis of Background Material for MIL-STD-210B, Climatic Extremes


for Military Equipment. Bedford, MA: Air Force Cambridge Research
Laboratories, January 1974. DTIC number AD-780-508.

b. Industrial Ventilation. A Manual of Recommended Practice. Committee


on Industrial Ventilation, PO Box 16153, Lansing, MI 48901.

c. International Electrotechnical Commission Publication 60068-2-68, Test


L, Dust and Sand and Test Lb, Settling Dust.

d. International Electrotechnical Commission Publication 60721-2-5,


Classification of Environmental Conditions, Part 2: Environmental
Conditions Appearing in Nature, Section 5: Dust, Sand, Salt Mist.

e. ASTM D185-07, Standard Test Methods for Coarse Particles in


Pigments, 2012.

f. MIL-HDBK-310, Global Climatic Data for Developing Military Products.

h. Test Operations Procedure (TOP) 01-2-621, Outdoor Sand and Dust


Testing, June 2009.

i. TOP 02-2-819, Sand Dust Testing of Wheeled and Tracked Vehicles,


18 November 2009.

j. TOP 03-2-045, Small Arms - Hand and Shoulder Weapons and


Machineguns, 24 June 2016.

k. TOP 03-4-012, Desert Environmental (Sand and Dust) Testing of


Vehicle-Mounted Primary and Secondary Automatic Weapon Systems,
Up To 40mm, 2 September 2004.

l. NATO AC/225 (LG/3-SG/1)D/14, Evaluation Procedures for Future


NATO Small Arms Weapon Systems, 6 July 2001.

7-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 313

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

7-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 314

METHOD 314
CONTAMINATION BY FLUIDS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE ........................................................................................... 1-1


1.1. PURPOSE. ................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2. APPLICATION........................................................................................... 1-1
1.3. LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................ 1-1
CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE .......................................................................... 2-1
2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT ........................................................ 2-1
2.2. CONTAMINANT FLUID GROUPS (See paragraph 2.5.1 below.) ............. 2-1
2.2.1. Fuels. ................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2.2. Hydraulic Fluids. ................................................................................. 2-2
2.2.3. Lubricating Oils. ................................................................................. 2-2
2.2.4. Solvents and Cleaning Fluids. ............................................................ 2-2
2.2.5. De-icing and Anti-Freeze Fluids. ........................................................ 2-2
2.2.6. Runway de-Icers. ............................................................................... 2-2
2.2.7. Insecticides. ....................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.8. Disinfectants. ...................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.9. Coolant Dielectric Fluids..................................................................... 2-3
2.2.10. Fire Extinguishants. ............................................................................ 2-3
2.3. CHOICE OF PROCEDURAL OPTIONS ................................................... 2-3
2.4. SEQUENCE. ............................................................................................. 2-3
2.5. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS........................................................... 2-3
2.5.1. Test Fluid(s). ...................................................................................... 2-3
2.5.2. De-icing and Anti-Feeze Fluids .......................................................... 2-4
2.5.3. Test Temperature. .............................................................................. 2-4
2.5.4. Method of Application. ........................................................................ 2-5
2.5.5. Soak Duration. ................................................................................... 2-5
CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST
INSTRUCTION ............................................................................................. 3-1
CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES .................................... 4-1
4.1. TEST FACILITY ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.2. CONTROLS .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.3. TEST INTERRUPTIONS ........................................................................... 4-1
4.4. PROCEDURE ........................................................................................... 4-1
4.4.1. Preparation for Test............................................................................ 4-1
4.4.2. Contamination Test Procedure. .......................................................... 4-2
CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF TEST RESULTS ............................................... 5-1
CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................. 6-1
ANNEX A ENVIRONMENTAL AND TOXICOLOGICAL
CONSIDERATIONS ................................................ ...........................A-1
A.1. GASOLINE FUELS AND MINERAL/SYNTHETIC OILS ............................ A-1
A.2. SOLVENTS AND CLEANING FLUIDS ...................................................... A-1
A.3. DE-ICING AND ANTI FREEZE FLUIDS .................................................... A-1

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 314

CONTENTS - Continued

A.4. DISINFECTANT. FORMULATIONS CONTAINING FORMALDEHYDE AND


O-CRESOL (AS USED IN CHEMICAL TOILETS) WILL ATTACK AND
BLISTER SKIN ............................................................................................. A-2
A.5. COOLANT DIELECTRIC FLUID .................................................................. A-2
A.6. FIRE EXTINGUISHANTS ............................................................................ A-2
A.7. INSECTICIDES ............................................................................................ A-2

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 314

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE

NOTE: METHOD 300, GENERAL GUIDANCE AND REQUIREMENTS,


CONTAINS INFORMATION NECESSARY TO CONDUCT THE TEST
PROCEDURES OF THIS METHOD, AND SHALL BE USED IN COMBINATION
WITH THIS TEST METHOD.

1. SCOPE

1.1. PURPOSE

To determine if materiel is unacceptably affected by temporary exposure to


contaminating fluids (liquids) such as may be encountered during its life cycle, either
occasionally,4 intermittently,5 or over extended periods.6

1.2. APPLICATION

Select the tests described in this Method when there is a high probability of fluid
contamination during the materiel's life cycle. Contamination may arise from exposure
to fuels, hydraulic fluids, lubricating oils, solvents and cleaning fluids, de-icing and anti-
freeze fluids, runway de-icers, insecticides, disinfectants, coolant dielectric fluid, and
fire extinguishants.

WARNING: THIS METHOD REQUIRES THE USE OF SUBSTANCES


AND/OR TEST PROCEDURES THAT MAY HAVE AN ENVIRONMENTAL
IMPACT OR BE INJURIOUS TO HEALTH IF ADEQUATE PRECAUTIONS ARE
NOT TAKEN. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION IS PROVIDED IN ANNEX A.
REFER TO THE SUPPLIER'S MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET (MSDS) OR
EQUIVALENT FOR HEALTH HAZARD DATA ON THE VARIOUS CHEMICALS
USED, AND COORDINATE WITH LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AUTHORITIES.

1.3. LIMITATIONS

This test is not intended to demonstrate the suitability of materiel to perform during
continuous contact with a fluid, e.g., an immersed fuel pump, nor should it be used to
demonstrate resistance to electrolytic corrosion.

4 Extraordinary/unusual circumstances occurring once or twice in a year.


Regular basis under normal operation, possibly seasonally, over the life of the materiel.
Long periods such that materiel is thoroughly exposed.

1-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 314

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

1-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 314

CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE

2. TEST GUIDANCE

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8.

2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Examples of problems that could occur as a result of exposure to contaminating fluids


follow, but the list is not intended to be all-inclusive and some of the examples may
overlap.

a. Packaging failure.

b. Crazing or swelling of plastics and rubbers.

c. Leeching of antioxidants and other soluble materials.

d. Seal or gasket failures.

e. Adhesion failures.

f. Paint/legend removal.

g. Corrosion.

2.2. CONTAMINANT FLUID GROUPS

(See paragraph 2.5.1 below.)

The following groups of fluids are listed in Table I. In addition to the guidance provided
below, consider that personnel and/or their clothing may introduce the contaminant in
areas not normally considered for direct contamination.

2.2.1. Fuels

Fuels will, for the most part, be of the gasoline or kerosene type, and whereas the
former may be expected to evaporate rapidly - possibly with few permanently harmful
effects, the latter - being more persistent - can be damaging to many elastomers,
particularly at elevated temperatures. Fuels do not normally affect paints and most
plastics, but silicone resin bonded boards may tend to de-laminate after prolonged
exposure. Some fuels may have additives to inhibit icing or to dissipate static charges.
Where there is reason to believe that these additives may increase the severity of the
test, include them in the test fluids.

2-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 314

2.2.2. Hydraulic Fluids

Commonly-used hydraulic fluids may be of the mineral oil or ester-based synthetic


type, and may be at elevated temperatures in their working states. The latter are
damaging to most elastomers and to plastics; phosphate esters are especially
damaging to these materials and to paint finishes.

2.2.3. Lubricating Oils

Mineral or synthetic-based lubricating oils may be at elevated temperatures in their


working states. Mineral oil is damaging to natural rubber but less so to synthetics such
as polychloroprene, chloro-sulphonated polyethylene and silicone rubber. Synthetic
lubricants are extremely damaging to plastics such as PVC as well as to many
elastomers.

2.2.4. Solvents and Cleaning Fluids

Many areas of aircraft or vehicles may require dirt or grease removal before servicing
can begin. The fluids given in Table 1 are representative of those presently in use.

2.2.5. De-icing and Anti-Freeze Fluids

These fluids may be applied, often at elevated temperatures, to the leading edges,
intakes, etc., of aircraft and may penetrate areas where they can contaminate
components and equipment. These fluids are based, typically, on inhibited ethylene
glycols.

2.2.6. Runway De-icers

These fluids are used on runways and other areas to lower the freezing point of water.
They may penetrate undercarriage and equipment bays of aircraft as a fine mist.

2.2.7. Insecticides

Aircraft flying in and through the tropics may be treated with insecticide sprays as a
routine precaution. To ensure that these will not have an adverse effect on materiel, it
may be necessary to make exploratory tests using proprietary insecticides.

2.2.8. Disinfectant

The primary contaminating agent is likely to be the disinfectant used, that will be a
formaldehyde/phenol preparation, and its use on waste liquid from galleys and toilet
compartments, where a leak may permit contamination of materiel below the leak.

2-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 314

2.2.9. Coolant Dielectric Fluids

These are used as thermal transfer liquids to assist cooling of certain equipment. They
are usually based on silicate ester materials, and their effects on materials may be
considered to be similar to the phosphate ester hydraulic fluids, although not quite as
severe.

2.2.10. Fire Extinguishants

Halon (chloro bromo fluoro hydrocarbon) or similar compounds are likely to be used on
aircraft, and will be relatively short-lived. Ground-based extinguishants are aqueous
foams derived from fluoro chemicals or fluoroproteins. Their effects will be mainly due
to water or buildup of trapped residues. The necessity for testing with these products
is based on the need to maintain equipment functioning after release of the
extinguishant.

2.3. CHOICE OF PROCEDURAL OPTIONS

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8.

There are three exposure options provided in the test procedure: occasional
contamination, intermittent contamination, and extended contamination. The
requirements document should specify the option to be used based on the
anticipated life cycle scenario, along with the order of application of the test fluids if
more than one is required.

2.4. SEQUENCE

Do not perform these tests prior to other climatic environmental tests because of
potential effect of the contaminants or their removal by decontaminants.

2.5. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8.

The most significant parameters used in this test method are the fluid to be used, the
temperature and duration of exposure. It is also important in this test procedure to
specify the operational configuration of the test item, as well as whether or not the test
item is heat dissipating during operation.

2.5.1. Test Fluid(s)

Select a test fluid(s) from those listed in Table 1 that is representative of that commonly
encountered during the life cycle. Each specified test fluid is the worst case
representative of a group of fluids and is the most likely to affect the performance of the
materiel. In the requirements document list other fluids identified during the tailoring

2-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 314

process as possible contaminants. Service grades of fluids may be changed or


modified with development formulations and equipment demands. Some may
subsequently be found undesirable because of environmental or health and safety
problems. Table 1 may be updated as necessary in the future.

2.5.2. Combination of Test Fluids

When more than one test fluid is to be applied, consider the following:

a. The need to assess the effect of the fluids individually, combined or in


succession.

b. If the order of exposure to fluids in service is known, or if the order of


exposure to fluids recognized as having synergistic effects is known and
is realistic in service, specify this order.

c. If the test item should be cleaned between or after tests, or if a new test
item should be used for each test fluid. Choice of cleaning fluid should
not result in further contamination. Some of the specified test fluids
may be used as cleaning fluids (e.g., aviation fuel, solvents, or cleaning
fluids), otherwise, a fluid known to be used in normal cleaning
procedures should be used.

2.5.3. Test Temperature

Use temperatures representative of the actual conditions under which fluid


contamination can occur either intentionally or accidentally. The application of
contaminating fluids could result in thermal shock as well as contamination effects.

2.5.3.1. Test Item Temperature

Use a test item temperature representative of the materiel temperature when exposed
to the contaminating fluid. For example, materiel to be de-iced will most likely be at or
below freezing; materiel exposed to hydraulic leaks while on tarmac may have surface
temperatures above 50 °C.

2.5.3.2. Test Fluid Temperature

In most cases, use the temperature of the test fluid equal to its temperature during its
most extreme operating condition. Design assessment may prove that other
temperatures provide a more severe environment, e.g., longer exposure at lower
temperatures because of slower evaporation. Table I includes worst-case test fluid
temperatures.

2-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 314

2.5.3.3. Soak Temperature

In order for contamination effects to mature, a soak of the test item following
contamination is necessary. The temperature of both the contaminating fluid and the
materiel will, most likely, change during actual contamination situations. The post-
contamination soak will not necessarily reflect the exposure scenario, but rather the
worst-case effect(s) on the materiel. Accordingly, for the soak temperature, use the
materiel's maximum life cycle temperature for the anticipated exposure situation.

2.5.4. Method of Application

The method of application of contaminating fluids should, if known, be the same as


would occur during the life cycle of the materiel. If not known, consider an application
no more severe than would be reasonably expected.

2.5.5. Soak Duration

Unless otherwise justified, expose the contaminated test item to the required soak
temperature (paragraph 2.5.3.3) for a minimum of 96 hours.

2-5 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 314

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

2-6 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 314

CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

3. INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

In addition to that provided in See Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6, following information
shall be provided:

a. The test fluid(s) to be used and its temperature.

b. The method of test fluid application.

c. The soak (post-wetting) temperature and duration.

d. The cleaning/decontaminating fluids.

e. The sequence of test fluid applications and post-test cleaning


instructions.

f. The type of exposure, i.e., occasional, intermittent or extended.

g. Any requirement for long term surveillance and inspections.

3-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 314

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 314

CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

4. TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

See Method 300 Chapters 3, 4, and 5 for test facility, test conditions and test control
information.

4.1. TEST FACILITY

In addition to the information provided in Method 300 Chapter 5, use a test facility that
includes an enclosure and a temperature control mechanism designed to maintain the
test item at a specified temperature. The contamination facility is a tank within the test
enclosure (non-reactive with the contaminant) in which the test item is exposed to the
selected contaminant by immersion, spraying, splashing or brushing. Design the
temperature control mechanism to maintain the test item at the specified temperature.
When the flash point of the test fluid is lower than the test temperature, design the test
facility to fire and explosion standards.

4.2. CONTROLS

In addition to the controls provided in Method 300 Chapters 3 and 4, ensure the test
and cleaning (decontaminating) fluids are handled and disposed as required by local
environmental and safety requirements. Some test fluid specifications are referenced
in Table I.

4.3. TEST INTERRUPTION

See Method 300 Chapter 11.

4.4. PROCEDURE

The following test procedure may be used to determine the resistance of the material
to contaminating fluids. Conduct the operational checks after each exposure to each of
the specified fluids.

4.4.1. Preparation for Test

Before starting the test procedure, determine the information specified in Method 300
Chapters 4 and 6, and perform the test preparation procedure specified in Method 300
Chapter 2. Unless otherwise specified, clean the test item to remove unrepresentative
coatings or deposits of grease. If more than one fluid has been identified, determine if
each is to be evaluated simultaneously or sequentially. If sequential testing is
specified, specify in the requirements document any necessary cleaning method
between tests for different contaminants.

4-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 314

4.4.2. Contamination Test Procedure

Step 1. Place the test item in its specified configuration (operational,


storage, etc.) and place it in the test facility. If appropriate, the
configuration may include appropriate electrical or mechanical
connections.

Step 2. Stabilize the test item at the appropriate temperature for the
identified contamination scenario (see paragraph 2.5.3.1).

Step 3. Stabilize the temperature of the specified fluid(s) to that


determined from paragraph 2.5.3.2. If simultaneous application of
more than one fluid is required, apply the fluid with the highest
application temperature first, the next highest next, and so on until
all required fluids have been applied7.

Step 4.

a. For occasional contamination, apply the specified fluid(s)


(e.g., dip, spray, etc.) to the entire surface of the test item
that is likely to be exposed.

b. For intermittent contamination, apply the specified fluid(s)


(e.g., dip, spray, etc.) to the entire surface of the test item
that is likely to be exposed. Repeat this procedure one or
more times as necessary to maintain all the test item
surfaces in a wetted condition for the period specified in the
requirements document. If not specified, subject the test
item to 3, 24-hour cycles, each cycle consisting of 8 hours
in the wetted condition, followed by a drain period of 16
hours at the temperature specified in Step 2.

c. For extended contamination, immerse the test item in the


specified fluid and maintain for the period specified in the
requirements document. If not specified, the fluid
temperature shall be as given in Table 1, and the duration
of immersion shall be a minimum of 24 hours.

Step 5. Allow the test item to drain naturally. Shaking or wiping is not
permitted but, if representative of service conditions, it may be
rotated about any axis to allow for drainage from different
positions.

Before mixing two or more fluids, ensure they are compatible and will not produce hazardous
reactions.

4-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 314

Step 6. Maintain the test item at the temperature determined in paragraph


2.5.3.1 for 8 hours (see step 2).

Step 7. Stabilize the test item at standard ambient conditions.

Step 8. Visually examine the test item for degradation of materials,


protective finishes and dimensional changes. Record results.

Step 9. If appropriate, conduct an operational check of the test item


similar to that in Method 300 Chapter 2, and document the results
for comparison with the pretest data.

Step 10. If testing sequentially, repeat steps 2-9 for each specified fluid.

Step 11. If specified, store the test item at standard ambient conditions to
permit evaluation of any long-term effects.

4-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 314

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

4-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 314

CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF TEST RESULTS

5. EVALUATION OF TEST RESULTS

In addition Method 300, Chapter 9, any contamination effects must be analyzed for its
immediate or potential (long term) effects on the proper functioning of the test item.
Satisfactory operation immediately following this test is not the sole criterion for
pass/fail.

5-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 314

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

5-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 314

CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

6. REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

See Method 300 Chapter 10.

a. Defence Standard 42-40/Issue 1, Foam Liquids, Fire Extinguishing


(Concentrates, Foam, Fire Extinguishing), UK Ministry of Defence.

b. Defence Standard 68-161/Issue 1, Dispensers, Insecticide Aerosol Flying


Insect Killer, UK Ministry of Defence.

c. BS 6580:1992, Specification for Corrosion Inhibiting, Engine Coolant


Concentrate ('Antifreeze'), British Standards Institute.

d. Defence Standard 79-17/Issue 2, Compound, Cleaning, Foaming, for


Aircraft Surfaces, UK Ministry of Defence.

e. MIL-PRF-87252E, Coolant Fluid, Hydrolytically Stable, Dielectric,


21 March 2018 (U.S.)

f. Test Operations Procedure (TOP) 03-2-609, Chemical Compatibility of


Nonmetallic Materials Used in Small Arms Systems, 12 February 1999;
USATECOM, AMSTE-TM-T, APG, MD 21005-5055.

6-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 314

Table I: Major Contaminant Fluid Groups and Test Fluids


Test Fluid
Contaminant Fluid Group Test Fluid Temperature
(±2oC) ***
Fuels Kerosene Aviation turbine fuel (JP-4 (NATO F-40), JP-5 70
(NATO F-44), JP-8 (NATO F-34), etc.)
Diesel DL-A, DL-1, DL-2 (ASTM D975) 23
Gasoline ISO 1817, Test liquid B; ASTM 4814, 40*
(Piston Automotive spark ignition engine
engine)
Hydraulic Mineral oil NATO H-520/NATO H-515; U.S. MIL-H-5606 70
oils based
Phosphate ISO 1817, test liquid 103; U.S. MIL-H-46170 70
ester based (FRH); NATO H-544
(synthetic)
Silicone Dimethyl silicone (ZX42; NATO S1714) 70
based
Lubricating Mineral NATO 0-1176 (OMD 80); NATO Stock #4210 99 70
oils based 224 8369
Internal MIL-PRF-2104, 15W40; NATO D-1236 70
combustion
engines
Ester based ISO 1817, test liquid 101 150
(synthetic)
Solvents & cleaning fluids Propan-2-ol (isopropyl alcohol) 50*
1.1.1 - Trichloroethane/NATO H-515 50
Denatured alcohol 23*
Cleaning compound for aircraft surfaces 23
Deicing & antifreeze fluids Inhibited ethylene glycol (BS 6580) 80% and 23
50% solution in water (v/v); U.S. antifreeze
MIL-A-46153 (NATO S-750)
Runway de-icers 25% urea/25% ethylene glycol in water (v/v)** 23
Insecticides Insecticides 23
Disinfectant (heavy duty Clear, soluble phenolics, e.g., phenol or its 23
phenolics) derivatives dissolved in a surfactant and diluted
with water to give a clear solution
Black fluids, e.g., refined tar products dissolved 23
in a carrier oil and emulsified with detergent
White fluids, e.g., colloidal emulsions of refined 23
coal tar products in water, usually containing a
small amount of surfactant
Coolant dielectric fluid Coolanol 25R (DTD 900/4931) 70
Fire extinguishants Protein: NATO Stock #4210 99 224 6855 23
Fluoroprotein: NATO Stock #4210 99 224 6854 23
* Exceeds the critical flash 47point temperature; obtain expert advice.
** Subject to change; identified as environmental hazard.
*** See paragraph 2.5.3.2. Use these temperatures if no other information exists.

6-2 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 314

ANNEX A ENVIRONMENTAL AND TOXICOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS

A.1. GASOLINE FUELS AND MINERAL/SYNTHETIC OILS

a. Open burning will produce environmental pollution.

b. Contact with the skin will promote de-fatting.

c. Ignition under certain circumstances will cause explosion.

d. Low flash point of gasoline (piston engine): -18 °C.

e. Spillage can cause contamination of waterways and underground water


supplies. Three hundred liters of gasoline has the capacity to produce a
surface film over one square kilometre of still water.

f. Carcinogenic chemicals such as benzene are present in fuels; oils often


contain other toxic ingredients.

g. Tri alkyl phosphate is a typical synthetic hydraulic oil. Spillage can cause
toxic pollution of waterways and underground water supplies.

A.2. SOLVENTS AND CLEANING FLUIDS

a. Propan-2-ol is flammable.

b. 1.1.1 Trichloroethane is currently being withdrawn from use because of


its environmental impact when reacting with ozone. It is also believed to
have mutagenic properties.

c. Denatured alcohol is both toxic and flammable. It is a mixture containing


approximately 95% ethyl alcohol, 5% methyl alcohol and minor
ingredients such as pyridine.

d. Detergent made from biodegradable phosphates sodium sulphate and


sodium carboxy methyl cellulose is a conventional laundry substance.
Untreated discharge into waterways must be avoided.

A.3. DE-ICING AND ANTI FREEZE FLUIDS

a. All aqueous solutions of ethylene glycol are toxic and the inclusion of
25% urea will promote the growth of algae.

A-1 Edition D Version 1


ANNEX A TO
AECTP-300
METHOD 314

b. 50% inhibited aqueous potassium acetate solution is commercially


marketed and reputed to be a completely safe new alternative to the
ethylene glycols. However, its interaction with aluminum alloys is less
than satisfactory.

A.4. DISINFECTANT. FORMULATIONS CONTAINING FORMALDEHYDE AND


O-CRESOL (AS USED IN CHEMICAL TOILETS) WILL ATTACK AND
BLISTER SKIN

A.5. COOLANT DIELECTRIC FLUID

a. Coolanol 25R is a silicate ester that can be hydrolyzed to produce


flammable products. The U.S. has withdrawn it from use.

b. The most recent coolants are based on polymerized alpha olefins that
are both non-toxic and generally inert.

A.6. FIRE EXTINGUISHANTS

The propellant gases currently used to produce foaming are chloro fluoro
hydrocarbons (CFC's). These react with ozone and are therefore environmentally
destructive.

A.7. INSECTICIDES

Most insecticides may be regarded as toxic to man. If the delivery vehicle for the
insecticide is a kerosene-type (fuel/oil) spray or mist, many of the features identified
under paragraph 1 above will also apply.

A-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 315

METHOD 315
FREEZE / THAW

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE ........................................................................................... 1-1


1.1. PURPOSE ................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2. APPLICATION........................................................................................... 1-1
1.3. LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................ 1-1
CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE .......................................................................... 2-1
2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT ........................................................ 2-1
2.2. TEST PROCEDURE ................................................................................. 2-1
2.3. CHOICE OF TEST SEVERITIES .............................................................. 2-2
2.3.1. Temperature Range ........................................................................... 2-2
2.3.2. Moisture ............................................................................................. 2-2
2.3.3. Test Item Configuration ...................................................................... 2-2
2.3.4. Number of Cycles ............................................................................... 2-2
CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST
INSTRUCTION ............................................................................... 3-1
CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES .................................... 4-1
4.1. TEST FACILITY ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.2. CONTROLS .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.3. TEST INTERRUPTIONS ........................................................................... 4-1
4.4. PROCEDURES ......................................................................................... 4-1
4.4.1. Preparation for Test............................................................................ 4-1
4.4.2. Procedure I - Diurnal Cycling Effects.................................................. 4-1
4.4.3. Procedure II - Cold-to-Warm Transfer ................................................ 4-2
4.4.4. Procedure III - Rapid Temperature Change ....................................... 4-3
CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS ....................................... 5-1
CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND related DOCUMENTS................................... 6-1

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 315

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 315

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE

NOTE: METHOD 300, GENERAL GUIDANCE AND REQUIREMENTS,


CONTAINS INFORMATION NECESSARY TO CONDUCT THE TEST
PROCEDURES OF THIS METHOD, AND SHALL BE USED IN
COMBINATION WITH THIS TEST METHOD.

1. SCOPE

1.1. PURPOSE

The purpose of this test is to determine the ability of materiel to withstand:

a. The effects of moisture phase changes between liquid and solid, in or


on the materiel as the ambient temperature cycles through the freeze
point;

b. The effects of moisture induced by transfer from a cold-to-warm or warm-


to-cold environment.

1.2. APPLICATION

This test is applicable to materiel that will experience one or more excursions through
freeze point while wet or in the presence of moisture (free water or vapour). See
paragraph 2.2 for specific examples.

1.3. LIMITATIONS

This test is not intended to evaluate the effects of low temperature, thermal shock,
rain or icing. These may be determined by Methods 303, 304, 310 and 311
respectively.

1-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 315

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

1-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 315

CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE

2 TEST GUIDANCE

2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT

This test induces physical changes in or on the materiel of a transitory kind.


Examples of problems that could occur during this test are as follows:

a. Distortion or binding of moving parts.

b. Failure of bonding materials.

c. Failure of seals.

d. Failure of materials due to freezing/re-freezing of absorbed, adjacent or


free water.

e. Changes in characteristics of electrical components.

f. Electrical flashover/reduced insulation resistance.

g. Fogging of optical systems during freeze-thaw transitions.

h. Inability to function correctly due to ice adhesion and interference or


blockage of moving parts.

2.2. TEST PROCEDURE

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8.

When a freeze/thaw test is deemed necessary, the procedures included in this


method are considered suitable for most materiel. Three procedures are included:

a. Procedure I - To simulate the effects of diurnal cycling on materiel


exposed to temperatures varying slightly above and below the freeze
point that is typical of daytime warming and freezing at night when
deposits of ice or condensation, or high relative humidity exist. For
Procedure I to be effective, frost must form on the test item surfaces
during the temperature increase through the freeze point, and then melt
just prior to re-freezing.

b. Procedure II - For materiel transported directly from a cold to a warm


environment such as from an unheated aircraft, missile or rocket, to a

2-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 315

warm ground area, or from a cold environment to a warm enclosure,


and resulting in free water or fogging.

NOTE: Tests for fogging are only appropriate for materiel designed to not fog
or that has built-in de-fogging capabilities).

c. Procedure III - For materiel that is to be moved from a warm


environment to a cold environment (freeze) and then back to the warm
environment, inducing condensation (free water).

2.3. CHOICE OF TEST SEVERITIES

See Method 300 Chapters 4 and 8.

The most significant parameters to be specified for this test method are temperature,
moisture level/form, test item configuration (operational or storage) and the number of
freeze/thaw cycles.

2.3.1. Temperature Range

The temperatures used shall be within the storage or operational range of the test item.
Normally, the temperature cycle ranges between + 5 °C and -10 °C for diurnal cycling
effects, and -10 °C to standard ambient (Method 300 Chapter 3), but these can be
varied as required to achieve the desired effects.

2.3.2. Moisture

Water used to create the test moisture may be drawn from local (clean) water sources.
The moisture may be applied as a water vapour or free water (spray).

2.3.3. Test Item Configuration

See Method 300 Chapter 4.

2.3.4. Number of Cycles

A cycle is defined as a change from one thermal-moisture condition to another and


back to the original condition. Unless otherwise specified in the test procedure, hold
the test item at each condition for a minimum of one hour following temperature
stabilization of the test item (Method 300 Chapter 4). Unless otherwise justified by the
materiel's life cycle profile, apply the following minimum number of cycles:

a. Diurnal cycling effects (daily freeze-thaw): Five.

2-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 315

b. Cold-to-warm transfer (for free water or possible fogging): Three.

c. Warm-cold-warm (for freezing and melting): One.

2-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 315

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

2-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 315

CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

3. INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

In addition to the information derived from Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6, a brief
scenario of service conditions should be provided to explain the intended simulation.
Also state:

a. The type of moisture required (vapor or spray).

b. The initial test conditions and the temperatures to be used.

c. Whether the test is a demonstration of survival or functional performance.

d. The number of cycles to be used.

3-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 315

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 315

CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

4. TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

See Method 300 Chapters 3, 4, and 5 for test facility, test conditions and test control
information.

4.1. TEST FACILITY

In addition to the requirements specified in Method 300 Chapter5, the use of two
chambers is recommended for Procedures II and III in order to simulate the sudden
temperature changes often associated with movement between outside ambient and
indoor conditions. For procedures II and III, either a single chamber or combination
of chambers is acceptable as long as the test procedure requirements are satisfied.

4.2. CONTROLS

See Method 300 Chapters 3 and 4.

4.3. TEST INTERRUPTIONS

See Method 300 Chapter 7.

4.4. PROCEDURES

4.4.1. Preparation for Test

a. Before starting the test procedure, determine the information specified


in Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6, and perform the test preparation
procedure specified in Method 300 Chapter 2.

b. Ensure any fluids contained in the test item are compatible with the
temperatures used in the test.

c. Install thermocouples in/on the test item to measure temperature


stabilization and surface temperatures.

4.4.2. Procedure I - Diurnal Cycling Effects

Step 1. Remove unrepresentative coatings/deposits and contaminants


such as oils, grease and dirt that could affect the adhesion of ice
to the specimen surface.

Step 2. Place the test item in the test chamber at standard ambient

4-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 315

conditions and in the required configuration. Spray the test item


sufficient to fill any horizontal pockets to simulate water collected
during a rainstorm.

Step 3. Reduce the temperature inside the chamber to 10 °C below the


freeze point or as otherwise specified for the initial conditions at a
rate not exceeding 3 °C per minute. Maintain the condition for a
minimum of one hour after the test item temperature has
stabilized.

Step 4. Increase the chamber temperature linearly over a period of three


hours. When the chamber air temperature reaches 0 °C,
introduce moisture using water vapor, steam, vapor generator or
other means to raise and maintain the humidity at or close to
saturation.

Step 5. When the test item surface temperature reaches 0 °C, ensure
frost has formed on the test item surfaces. If so, go to Step 6; if
not, repeat Steps 3 and 4 using a faster heating rate.

Step 6. Continue raising the test chamber towards a test item surface
temperature of 4 °C (water at maximum density) until the frost just
melts, then reduce the temperature linearly to 10 °C below the
freeze point over a period of three hours. Maintain the conditions
for a minimum of one hour following test item temperature
stabilization.

Step 7. Repeat steps 4-6 as required to complete the number of cycles


identified in paragraph 2.3.4.

Step 8. Maintain the chamber and test item at the low temperature
conditions until a visual examination and/or performance checks
have been completed.

Step 9. Return the test item to standard ambient conditions. Perform a


complete visual and operational check, and document the results.

4.4.3. Procedure II - Cold-to-Warm Transfer

Step 1. Remove unrepresentative coatings and contaminants such as


oils, grease and dirt that could affect the formation of
condensation.

Step 2. Place the test item in the test chamber at standard ambient
conditions and in the required configuration.

4-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 315

Step 3. Adjust the chamber temperature to 10 °C below the freezing point


or as otherwise specified for the initial conditions at a rate not
exceeding 3 °C per minute. Maintain the condition until the test
item temperature has stabilized plus one hour.

Step 4. Transfer the test item to another chamber (previously adjusted to


the upper specified temperature) as quickly as possible such that
condensation/fogging occurs. The use of insulated transport
containers is recommended. This second chamber should be
maintained at the specified upper temperature (usually room
ambient) with a relative humidity of 95  5%.

Step 5. Start operation and any performance tests of the test item 60  15
seconds after completion of the transfer, and document results.

Step 6. Return the test item to the low temperature chamber and repeat
Steps 3-5 as required to complete the number of cycles identified
in paragraph 2.3.5.

Step 7. Return the test item to standard ambient conditions. Perform a


complete visual and operational check, and document the results.

4.4.4. Procedure III - Rapid Temperature Change

Step 1. Remove unrepresentative coatings and contaminants such as


oils, grease and dirt that could affect the adhesion of ice to the
specimen surface.

Step 2. Place the test item in the test chamber at standard ambient
conditions and in the required configuration.

Step 3. Adjust the chamber temperature to the specified upper


temperature (usually room ambient) at a rate of approximately
3 °C per minute, and a relative humidity of 95  5%. Maintain
these conditions until the test item temperature has stabilized plus
one hour.

Step 4. Transfer the test item as quickly as possible and in not more than
5 minutes to another chamber stabilized at 10 °C below the freeze
point. The use of insulated transport containers is recommended.
Stabilize the test item temperature and hold for one additional
hour.

Step 5. Unless otherwise specified, perform an operational check.

Step 6. If more than one cycle is required, stabilize the test item at room

4-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 315

ambient temperature and at a RH of 95% as in Step 3, note the


presence of any free water, and repeat Step 4.

Step 7. Return the test item to above-freezing conditions as soon as


possible.

Step 8. As any ice melts, note location(s) of free water.

Step 9. Perform an operational check and physical inspection, and


document results.

Step 10. Adjust the test item to standard ambient conditions and repeat
Steps 3-9 as necessary to verify prior results.

4-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 315

CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

See Method 300 Chapter 9.


.

5-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 315

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

5-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 315

CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

6. REFERENCES AND RELEATED DOCUMENTS

See Method 300 Chapter 10.

6-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 315

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 316

METHOD 316
EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE ........................................................................................... 1-1


1.1. PURPOSE ................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2. APPLICATION........................................................................................... 1-1
1.3. LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................ 1-1
CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE .......................................................................... 2-1
2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT ........................................................ 2-1
2.2. CHOICE OF TEST PROCEDURE ............................................................ 2-1
2.2.1. Procedure I (Explosive Atmosphere) .................................................. 2-1
2.2.2. Procedure II (Explosion Containment)................................................ 2-1
2.3. SEQUENCE .............................................................................................. 2-1
2.4. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS........................................................... 2-1
2.4.1. Fuel .................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4.2. Fuel-Vapour Mixture ........................................................................... 2-2
2.4.3. Temperature....................................................................................... 2-3
2.4.4. Effect of Humidity on Flammable Atmosphere ................................... 2-3
2.4.5. Altitude Simulation.............................................................................. 2-4
2.5. DEFINITIONS............................................................................................ 2-4
CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE
TEST INSTRUCTION ..................................................................... 3-1
CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES .................................... 4-1
4.1. TEST FACILITY ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.2. CONTROLS .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.3. TEST INTERRUPTIONS ........................................................................... 4-1
4.4. PROCEDURE ........................................................................................... 4-1
4.4.1. Preparation for Test............................................................................ 4-1
4.4.2. Operation in Explosive Atmosphere ................................................... 4-3
4.4.3. Explosion Containment ...................................................................... 4-4
CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS ....................................... 5-1
CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................. 6-1

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 316

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 316

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE

NOTE: METHOD 300, GENERAL GUIDANCE AND REQUIREMENTS,


CONTAINS INFORMATION NECESSARY TO CONDUCT THE TEST
PROCEDURES OF THIS METHOD, AND SHALL BE USED IN
COMBINATION WITH THIS TEST METHOD.

1. SCOPE

1.1. PURPOSE

The explosive atmosphere test is performed to:

a. demonstrate the ability of materiel to operate in fuel-air explosive


atmospheres without causing ignition, or

b. demonstrate that an explosive or burning reaction occurring within


encased equipment will be contained, and will not propagate outside
the test item.

1.2. APPLICATION

This method applies to all materiel designed for use in the vicinity of fuel-air explosive
atmospheres associated with aircraft, automotive and marine fuels at or above sea
level. Procedure II specifically relates to atmospheres in a space in which flammable
fluids or vapors exist, or can exist, either continuously or intermittently (e.g., in fuel
tanks or within fuel systems). NOTE: Materiel tested to Procedure II is designed
such that ignition of an explosive mixture is contained within the materiel without
igniting the surrounding explosive atmosphere; and, during normal operation, or as a
result of any fault, the temperature of any external surface will not rise to a level
capable of causing ignition (including hermetically-sealed materiel). Use other
explosive atmosphere safety tests (e.g., electrical or mine safety) if more appropriate.

1.3. LIMITATIONS

a. This test utilizes an explosive mixture that has a relatively low flash
point that may not be representative of some actual fuel-air or aerosol
(such as suspended dust) mixtures.

b. The explosive atmosphere test is a conservative test in that if the test


item does not ignite the test fuel-air mixture, there is a low probability
that the materiel will ignite prevailing fuel vapour mixtures in service.

1-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 316

Conversely, the ignition of the test fuel-air mixture by the test item does
not mean the materiel will always ignite fuel vapours that occur in actual
use.

c. This test is not appropriate for altitudes above approximately 16km


where the lack of oxygen inhibits ignition.

d. Because this test is designed for electrical spark ignition, this method is
not intended to demonstrate ignition due to high surface temperatures.

1-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 316

CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE

2. TEST GUIDANCE

2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Low levels of electrical energy discharge or electrical arcing by devices as simple as


pocket transistor radios can ignite mixtures of fuel vapour and air. A "hot spot" on the
surface of the case of a hermetically sealed, apparently inert materiel case can ignite
fuel-air mixtures. Fuel vapours in confined spaces can be ignited by a low energy
discharge such as a spark from a short circuited flashlight cell, switch contacts,
electrostatic discharge, etc.

2.2. CHOICE OF TEST PROCEDURE

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8.

2.2.1. Procedure I (Explosive Atmosphere)

May be used to determine the ability of all sealed and unsealed materiel to operate
safely in a fuel-vapour laden environment.

2.2.2. Procedure II (Explosion Containment)

Is used to determine the ability of the test item's case or other enclosures to contain
an explosion or flame that is a result of an internal materiel malfunction.

2.3. SEQUENCE

See Method 300 Chapter 8.

Considering the approach to conserve test item life by applying what are perceived to
be the least damaging environments first, generally apply explosive atmosphere tests
late in the test sequence. Vibration, shock, and temperature stresses may distort
seals and reduce their effectiveness, thus making ignition of flammable atmospheres
more likely. It is recommended that the test items first undergo vibration, shock,
and/or temperature testing.

2.4. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS

See Method 300 Chapters 4 and 8.

2-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 316

2.4.1. Fuel

Unless otherwise specified, use n-hexane as the test fuel, either reagent grade or
95% n-hexane with 5% other hexane isomers. This fuel is used because its ignition
properties in flammable atmospheres are equal to or more sensitive than the similar
properties of both 100/130 octane aviation gasoline, JP-4 and JP-8 jet engine fuel.
Optimum mixtures of n-hexane and air will ignite from hot-spot temperatures as low
as 223 °C, while optimum JP-4 fuel-air mixtures require a minimum temperature of
230 °C for auto-ignition, and 100/130 octane aviation gasoline and air requires 441 °C
for hot-spot ignition. Minimum spark energy inputs for ignition of optimum fuel vapour
and air mixtures are essentially the same for n-hexane and for 100/130-octane
aviation gasoline. Much higher spark energy input is required to ignite JP-4 or JP-8
fuel and air mixtures. Use of fuels other than hexane is not recommended.

WARNING: Due to the hazardous nature of the fuels used in this test, the Test
Facility Operators must ensure that they comply with Local and National
Regulations, especially with respect to the personal exposure levels, pollution,
and hazardous material disposal.

2.4.2. Fuel-Vapour Mixture

Use a homogeneous fuel-air mixture in the correct fuel-air ratios for the explosive
atmosphere test. Fuel weight calculated to total 3.8 percent by volume of the test
atmosphere represents 1.8 stoichiometric equivalents of n-hexane in air, giving a
mixture needing only minimum energy for ignition. This yields an air/vapour ratio
(AVR) of 8.33 by weight.

a. Required information to determine fuel weight:

(1) Chamber air temperature during the test.

(2) Fuel temperature.

(3) Specific gravity of n-hexane (see Figure 1).

(4) Test altitude: maximum operating altitude and ambient ground


(nominal).

(5) Net volume of the test chamber: free volume less test item
displacement expressed in liters.

2-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 316

b. Calculation of the volume of liquid n-hexane fuel for each test altitude:

Volume of 95 percent n-hexane (ml) =

 (net chamber vol (liters)) x (chamber pressure (pascals)) 


(4.27x 10 -4 )  
 (chamber temp (K)) x (specific gravity of n - hexane) 

0.68

0.675
SPECIFIC
GRAVITY0.67

0.665

0.66

0.655

0.65

Figure 1: 0.645
Specific gravity of n-hexane
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 °C
TEMPERATURE

2.4.3. Temperature

Heat the fuel-air mixture to the highest ambient air temperature at which the materiel
is required to function during deployment and provide the greatest probability of
ignition. Perform all testing at this maximum air temperature. For forced-air-cooled
materiel, use the highest temperature at which the materiel can be operated and
performance evaluated in the absence of cooling air as the test temperature.

2.4.4 Effect of Humidity on Flammable Atmosphere

The effect of humidity upon the fuel-air composition need not be considered in the
test if the ambient air dewpoint temperature is 10 °C or less because this
concentration of water vapour only increases the n-hexane fuel concentration from
3.82 percent to 3.85 percent of the test atmosphere. If the atmospheric pressure is
cycled from an equivalent of 1525 metres above the test level to site pressure (a 17
percent change in pressure), the volume of n-hexane will decrease from 4.61 percent

2-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 316

to 3.85 percent. This decrease will compensate for the fuel enrichment effect that
results from water vapour dilution of the test air supply.

2.4.5. Altitude Simulation

The energy required to ignite a fuel mixture increases as pressure decreases. All test
conditions will be met with two steps in a single explosive atmosphere test performed
at the highest anticipated operating altitude of the materiel (not exceed 12,200 m
where the possibility of an explosion begins to dissipate), and between 78 and
107 kPa (most ground ambient pressures).

2.5. DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this Method, the following definitions apply:

a. Simulated altitude. Any height that is produced in the test chamber by


reducing air pressure.

b. Test altitude. The nominal simulated height(s) above sea level at which
the test item will be tested, i.e., the maximum altitude identified in
paragraph 2.4.5.

2-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 316

CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

3. INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

In addition to the information specified in Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6, the following
are required:

a. The fuel volume and/or weight.

b. The quantity of fuel required at each test point.

c. The off/on cycling rate for the test item.

d. Any information relative to the location of spark-emitting devices or high


temperature components.

3-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 316

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 316

CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

4. TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

See Method 300 Chapters 3, 4, and 5 for test facility, test conditions and test control
information.

4.1. TEST FACILITY

See Method 300 Chapter 5.

Use a chamber with a means of igniting the fuel-air mixture such as a spark-gap
device, as well as a means of determining the explosiveness of a sample of the
mixture such as a spark-gap or glow plug ignition source with sufficient energy to
ignite a 3.82-percent hexane mixture. An alternative method of determining the
explosive characteristics of the vapour is by using a calibrated explosive gas meter
that verifies the degree of explosiveness and the concentration of the fuel-air mixture.

4.2. CONTROLS

See General Guidance and Requirements, paragraph 10 and consider the following:

4.3. TEST INTERRUPTIONS

See Method 300 Chapter 7.

If there is an unscheduled undertest interruption, restore the chamber air pressure to


ground ambient pressure and purge the chamber to remove the flammable
atmosphere. Inject the required volume of n-hexane and reinitiate the test using the
same test item.

4.4. PROCEDURE

4.4.1. Preparation for Test

Before starting the test procedure, determine the information specified in Method 300
Chapters 4 and 6. Perform the test preparation procedure specified in Method 300
Chapter 2, and include the following:

a. For test item thermal stabilization measurements for both procedures,


install thermocouples on the most massive functional part of the test
item, and two thermocouples attached to the inside of the test chamber
to detect any temperature increase due to burning of the mixture.

4-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 316

b. Procedure I

(1) Install the test item in the test chamber in such a manner that it
may be functioned and controlled from the exterior of the
chamber via sealed cable ports. Remove or loosen the external
covers of the test item to facilitate the penetration of the
explosive mixture. Test items requiring connection between two
or more units may, because of size limitations, have to be tested
independently. In this case, extend any interconnections through
the cable ports.

(2) Function the test item to determine correct operation. If possible,


identify the location of any sparking or high temperature
components that could cause an explosion.

(3) When necessary, simulate in-service mechanical loads on drive


assemblies and servo-mechanical systems, and electrical loads
on switches and relays; duplicate torque, voltage, current,
inductive reactance, etc. In all instances, operate the test item in
a manner representative of service use.

c. Procedure II

(1) Make provision to circulate the fuel-air mixture into the case
being tested. In the case of forced-air-cooled materiel, the
cooling air must contain the proper fuel-air mixture. For materiel
not using forced-air cooling, drill and tap the case for insertion of
a hose from a blower (to insert the fuel-air mixture), as well as for
an outlet hose connection. Take adequate precautions to
prevent ignition of the ambient mixture by backfire or release of
pressure through the supply or vent hose. Do not alter the case
internal volume by more than ± 5% with any modification to
facilitate the introduction of ignitable vapor.

(2) Provide a positive means of igniting the explosive mixture within


the case. Drill or tap the case as necessary for a spark gap, or
mount a spark gap internally. Ensure points of ignition are not be
more that 12.5 mm from any vent holes or flame arresting
devices; and, unless the design of the materiel makes this
impractical, use as many points of ignition as are practical.

(3) To detect explosions within the case, insert a thermocouple into


the case and attach it to a sensitive galvanometer outside the
test chamber.

4-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 316

(4) Ensure the air within the test chamber has a water vapor dew
point lower than 10 °C (see paragraph 2.4.4).

4.4.2 Operation in Explosive Atmosphere

Step 1. With the test item installed, seal the chamber and stabilize the
test item and chamber inner walls to within 10 °C below the high
operating temperature of the test item.

Step 2. Adjust the chamber air pressure to simulate the highest


operating altitude of the materiel (not to exceed 12,200 m) plus
2000 metres to allow for introducing, vapourising and mixing the
fuel with the air as described in paragraph 2.4.2.

Step 3. Slowly introduce the required volume of n-hexane into the test
chamber.

Step 4. Circulate the test atmosphere and continue to reduce the


simulated chamber altitude for at least three minutes to allow for
complete vapourisation of fuel and the development of a
homogeneous mixture.

Step 5. At a pressure equivalent to 1000 m above the test altitude, verify


the potential explosiveness of the air-vapour mixture by
attempting to ignite a sample of the mixture taken from the test
chamber using a spark plug ignition source with sufficient energy
to ignite a 3.82 percent hexane mixture. If ignition does not
occur, purge the chamber of the fuel vapour, and repeat
Steps 1-4. An alternative method of determining the explosive
characteristics of the vapour is by using a calibrated explosive
gas meter that verifies the degree of explosiveness and the
concentration of the fuel-air mixture.

Step 6. Function the test item and continue operation from this step until
completion of step 8. Ensure electrical contacts are actuated as
frequently as reasonably possible.

Step 7. To ensure adequate mixing of the fuel and air, slowly decrease
the simulated chamber altitude at a rate no faster than 100
metres per minute by bleeding air into the chamber.

Step 8. Stop decreasing the altitude at 1000 m below the test altitude,
perform one last functional check and switch off power to the test
item.

4-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 316

Step 9. Verify the potential explosiveness of the air-vapour mixture as in


Step 5 above. If ignition does not occur, purge the chamber of
the fuel vapour, and repeat the test from Step 1.

Step 10. Adjust the chamber air pressure to simulate the altitude at the
ground level where the test is being performed plus 2000 metres
to allow for introducing, vapourising and mixing the fuel with the
air as described in 2.4.2.

Step 11. Slowly introduce the required volume of n-hexane into the test
chamber for testing at ground level. If desired, introduction of the
required volume of fuel can commence at any point following
completion of Step 9.

Step 12. Circulate the test atmosphere and continue to reduce the
simulated chamber altitude for at least three minutes to allow for
complete vapourisation of fuel and the development of a
homogeneous mixture.

Step 13. At a pressure equivalent to 1000 m above the ground altitude,


verify the potential explosiveness of the air-vapour mixture as in
Step 5 above, and repeat the necessary steps if ignition does not
occur.

Step 14. Function the test item and continue operation from this step until
completion of Step 16. Ensure electrical contacts are actuated
as frequently as reasonably possible.

Step 15. To ensure adequate mixing of the fuel and air, slowly decrease
the simulated chamber altitude at a rate no faster than 100
metres per minute by bleeding air into the chamber.

Step 16. Stop decreasing the altitude at ground pressure, perform one last
functional check and switch off power to the test item.

Step 17. Verify the potential explosiveness of the air-vapour mixture as in


Step 5 above. If ignition does not occur, purge the chamber and
repeat Steps 10-17.

Step 18. Document test results as per paragraph 4.

4.4.3. Explosion Containment

Step 1. Place the test item or a model of the test item of the same
volume and configuration within the case, and install the case in
the explosion chamber.

4-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 316

Step 2. Ensure that the air within the test chamber has a water vapor
dew point lower than 10 °C per paragraph 2.4.4.

Step 3. Seal the chamber with the test item inside, and raise the ambient
air temperature inside the chamber to high operating
temperature of the test item.

Step 4. When the temperature of the both the test item and the test
chamber inner walls come to within 11 °C of the chamber
ambient air temperature, reduce the chamber air pressure to
2000 m of simulated altitude above the site ambient pressure
(i.e., ground level).

Step 5. Slowly introduce the required quantity of n-hexane into the test
chamber to obtain an optimum fuel-vapor/air mixture, and then
introduce it into the interior of the test item.

Step 6. Slowly decrease the simulated chamber altitude (no faster than
100 metres per minute) to return the pressure altitude to site
ambient pressure (i.e., ground level).

Step 7. Energize the internal case ignition source and confirm the
occurrence of an explosion within the test item using the installed
thermocouple. If no explosion occurs, purge the chamber and
the test item of all air/fuel vapor and return to Step 3.

Step 8. If the explosion inside the test item’s case did not propagate to
the fuel/air mixture outside the test item, repeat Steps 4-10 four
times if the test item’s case is not in excess of 0.02 times the
chamber volume. If the test item volume is equal to or greater
than 0.02 times the chamber volume, purge the chamber and
test item of air/fuel vapor and repeat Steps 3-10 four times.

Step 9. Check the potential explosiveness of the air/fuel vapor mixture by


attempting to ignite a sample of the mixture by a spark or glow
plug. If the chamber sample does not ignite, purge the chamber
of all air/fuel vapor mixture, and repeat the entire test from
Step 3.

Step 10. Document the test results.

4-5 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 316

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

4-6 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 316

CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

5. EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

In addition to that specified in Method 300 Chapter 9 for Procedure I, ignition of test
fuel vapour constitutes failure of the test item. For Procedure II, propagation of flame
to, or ignition of, a flammable atmosphere surrounding the test item when the test
atmosphere within the enclosure or case of the test item is intentionally ignited,
constitutes failure of the test. Apply any data relative to failure of a test item to meet
the requirements of the materiel specifications to the test analysis.

5-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 316

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

5-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 316

CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

6. REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

See Method 300 Chapter 10.

a. Haskin, W.L., Explosion-Proof Testing Techniques,. 1963.


ASD-TDR-62-1081. DTIC number AD-400-483.

b. Zabetakis, M.G., A.L. Furno, and G.W. Jones. "Minimum Spontaneous


Ignition Temperatures of Combustibles in Air," Industrial and
Engineering Chemistry 46 (1954), 2173-2178.

c. Washburn, E.W., ed. International Critical Tables of Numerical Data.


Chemistry and Technology. Vol. III. New York: National Research
Council/ McGraw-Hill, 1928. pp 27-29.

d. Kuchta, J.M. Summary of Ignition Properties of Jet Fuels and Other


1975. AFAPL-TR-75-70, pp 9-14. DTIC number AD-A021-320.

e. ASTM E 380-79. Standard for Metric Practice.

6-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 316

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 317

METHOD 317
TEMPERATURE, HUMIDITY, ALTITUDE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE ........................................................................................... 1-1


1.1. PURPOSE ................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2. APPLICATION........................................................................................... 1-1
1.3. LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................ 1-2
CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE .......................................................................... 2-1
2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT ........................................................ 2-1
2.2. CHOICE OF TEST PROCEDURE ............................................................ 2-1
2.3. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS........................................................... 2-1
2.3.1. Ground (initial) Conditions .................................................................. 2-2
2.3.2. Induced Conditions............................................................................. 2-2
CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE
TEST INSTRUCTION......................................................................... 3-1
CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES .................................... 4-1
4.1. TEST FACILITY ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.2. CONTROLS .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.1. Humidity Measurement ...................................................................... 4-1
4.2.2. Temperature Measurement ................................................................ 4-1
4.2.3. Pressure Measurement ...................................................................... 4-1
4.3. TEST INTERRUPTIONS ........................................................................... 4-1
4.4. PROCEDURES ......................................................................................... 4-2
4.4.1. Preparation for Test............................................................................ 4-2
4.4.2. Procedure I - Logistic Air Transport (stabilized conditions) ................ 4-2
4.4.3. Procedure II - Tactical Air Carriage (cycling conditions) ..................... 4-3
CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS ....................................... 5-1
CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................. 6-1

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 317

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 317

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE

NOTE: METHOD 300, GENERAL GUIDANCE AND REQUIREMENTS,


CONTAINS INFORMATION NECESSARY TO CONDUCT THE TEST
PROCEDURES OF THIS METHOD, AND SHALL BE USED IN
COMBINATION WITH THIS TEST METHOD.

1. SCOPE

1.1. PURPOSE

The main objectives of these tests are to determine if:

a. Materiel is safe to handle and/or operate during and following exposure


to combined environments involving variations in temperature, humidity
and air pressure, or

b. Materiel can be stored and operated as specified in the requirements


documents during and following exposure to combined environments
involving temperature, humidity and air pressure variations that it is
expected to encounter during its service life, or

c. Materiel experiences physical damage during and/or after experiencing


exposure to combined environments involving temperature, humidity
and ambient pressure variations.

1.2. APPLICATION

1. Most of the simulated conditions included in this test method relate to


unconditioned cargo-bay air transport or external air carriage of materiel, but some
others such as high altitude air drop from aircraft may be relevant.

2. This test method is used when the requirements documents state that the
materiel is likely to be transported or operated in situations where combination of
temperature, humidity and pressure variations may occur.

3. These variations may be caused by displacements of materiel at altitude such


as those occurring during aircraft missions (tactical or logistic transport, dropping of
materiel, etc.).

4. Some of these situations, such as those encountered with specific jet fighter
missions, may produce cyclic variations of those environments due to rapid variations

1-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 317

of altitude. The application of this Method relies on the knowledge of these


variations.

1.3. LIMITATIONS

This method is not intended to be used to test materiel to be installed in space


vehicles, aircraft, or missiles that fly at altitudes above 30,000 m. Method 312 should
be used when only the low pressure effects on materiel are to be investigated.

1-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 317

CHAPTER 2 TEST GUIDANCE

2 TEST GUIDANCE

2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT

1. In addition to the effects of the individual environments (temperature, humidity,


low pressure) listed in Methods 302, 303, 306 and 312, the combination of these
environments may produce the following effects on materiel (the list is not intended to
be all-inclusive):

2. Acceleration of corrosion due to humidity condensation in/on materiel and


differential pressure cycling,

3. Acceleration of humidity ingress when passing from high altitude (low


pressure-low temperature-low humidity) to ground or near-ground level conditions
(standard ambient pressure and warm, moist atmospheres), particularly at an airfield
in hot, wet tropical regions.

4. Therefore where possible it is preferable to conduct the combined test as this


allows simultaneous control of the individual environments allowing greater
reproducibility of test conditions, particularly between test sites.

2.2. CHOICE OF TEST PROCEDURE

See Method 300 Chapter 8.

Two types of test procedures are included in this Method.

Procedure I is used to assess the possible effects of air-transport climatic conditions


on materiel in unconditioned cargo-bay on its performance and safety in use.

Procedure II is used to assess the possible effects of external tactical air-carriage


climatic conditions on materiel, when temperature-humidity-pressure changes follow
the flight profile with sequential altitude changes.

2.3. CHOICE OF TEST PARAMETERS

See Method 300 Chapters 4 and 8.

The essential parameters for defining the combined environment tests (procedures I
and II) include air temperature, associated humidity and pressure, exposure time
(duration), and test item configuration. Such data can be tailored from ground
temperature/humidity data extracted from AECTP 200, Category 230, from reference

2-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 317

tables of standard atmospheres (e.g., ISO 5878) and from temperature / humidity /
pressure conditions measured in aircraft cargo-bays during operational use. Test
parameters for Procedure II are highly dependent on the tactical mission profile,
which include air speed, rate of climb or descent, atmospheric temperature and air
humidity at low altitude.

2.3.1. Ground (initial) Conditions

The severities of the ground conditions are directly related to the climatic categories
of the geographical locations. They are based upon actual measurements or taken
from climatic data documents such as AECTP 200, Category 230. Altitude conditions
may be obtained from:

 Real data measurements


 MIL-HDBK-310
 Standard Atmosphere tables such as those referenced in
STANAG 4044
 Table 1, where statistical values of air temperature at various altitudes
in the northern hemisphere are given.

2.3.2. Induced Conditions

1. For the logistic air transport conditions, the induced air conditions are those
encountered in the cargo-bay. The main characteristics of this environment are
described in AECTP 200, Category 230 (for consideration if specific measured data
are not available).

2. During tactical flights, the induced temperature experienced by materiel


externally stored must be determined either from specific measurements, or
computed from information on flight conditions (speed, altitude) and external
atmospheric temperature versus time.

2-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 317

CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

See Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6.

3-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 317

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 317

CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

4. TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

See Method 300 Chapters 3, 4, and 5 for test conditions, test facility, and test control
information.

4.1. TEST FACILITY

See Method 300 Chapter 5.

The inside of the enclosure must be designed in such a way as to prevent


condensation from falling on the test item from the ceiling or walls.

4.2. CONTROLS

See Method 300 Chapters 3, 4, and 5.

4.2.1. Humidity Measurement

Monitoring and control of the humidity inside the test enclosure may be accomplished
by using psychrometric systems, but when lowering air pressure inside the chamber it
may induce inaccurate monitoring of the humidity. New types of capacitive sensors
allow control of humidity in the chamber at lower pressure levels than psychrometric
systems.

4.2.2. Temperature Measurement

The temperature of the air surrounding the test item must be measured at a distance
equal to half that separating the test item from the walls of the enclosure, without
exceeding 1 metre from the test item. Care must be taken when taking these
measurements due to low air density.

4.2.3. Pressure Measurement

Unless otherwise specified, the rate of change of altitude shall not exceed 10 m/s.

4.3. TEST INTERRUPTIONS

See Method 300 Chapter 11.

4-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 317

4.4. PROCEDURES

The following test procedures provide the basis for assessing the suitability of the test
item in a combination of temperature, pressure and humidity environment.

4.4.1. Preparation for Test

Before starting any of the test procedures, determine the information specified in
Method 300 Chapters 4 and 6, and perform the test preparation procedure specified
in Method 300 Chapter 2.

4.4.2. Procedure I - Logistic Air Transport (stabilized conditions)

Step 1. Place the test item in its air-transport configuration and install it in
the test chamber. (If appropriate, the configuration may include
loading due to normal stacking configurations.)

Step 2. Adjust the chamber air conditions (temperature, pressure and


humidity) to the required initial ground level conditions specified in
the test plan and maintain for the specified time following
temperature stabilization of the test item.

Step 3. Adjust simultaneously the air temperature and pressure to


simulate the conditions specified in the test program. During this
phase, humidity and temperature may become difficult to control
due to the low pressure conditions and the humidity generation
shall be stopped.

NOTE: When it is not possible to adjust simultaneously the temperature,


humidity and pressure to simulate the real conditions, adjustments of the three
parameters may be done in the following order: temperature, humidity, and
pressure.

Step 4. Maintain the stabilized conditions (temperature, pressure,


humidity) for the time specified in the test program.

Step 5. Adjust simultaneously the air temperature, pressure and humidity


at the specified rate to the final conditions specified in the test
plan.

NOTE: When it is not possible to adjust simultaneously the temperature,


humidity and pressure to simulate the real conditions, adjustments of the three
parameters may be done in the following order: temperature, humidity, and
pressure.

4-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 317

Step 6. Place the test item in an operational configuration and conduct an


operational check of the test item when appropriate.

Step 7. Repeat Step 3 to 6 to produce the required number of cycles as


specified in the test plan.

Step 8. If appropriate adjust the temperature, humidity, and pressure to


the final ground conditions.

4.4.3. Procedure II - Tactical Air Carriage (cycling conditions)

Step 1. With the test item configured for operation, adjust the chamber air
conditions to either the standard or controlled ambient conditions
(see Method 300 Chapter 3), and conduct a pretest checkout.

Step 2. Adjust the chamber air conditions to the ground (initial)


temperature, humidity, and pressure levels specified in the test
plan.

Step 3. Adjust simultaneously the air temperature and pressure to


simulate the high level flight conditions specified in the test
requirements. During this phase, humidity and temperature may
become difficult to control due to the low pressure conditions and
the humidity generation shall be stopped.

NOTE: When it is not possible to adjust simultaneously the temperature,


humidity and pressure to simulate the real conditions, adjustments of the three
parameters may be done in the following order: temperature, humidity, and
pressure.

Step 4. Maintain the stabilized conditions (temperature, humidity,


pressure) for the time specified in the test program. If required,
conduct an operational check of the test item in accordance with
the approved test plan, and document the results.

Step 5. Adjust simultaneously the air temperature, pressure, and humidity


at the specified rate to the final conditions specified in the test
plan.

NOTE: When it is not possible to adjust simultaneously the temperature,


humidity and pressure to simulate the real conditions, adjustments of the three
parameters may be done in the following order: temperature, humidity and
pressure.

4-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 317

Step 6. Maintain these conditions for the time specified in the test plan. If
required in the test plan, conduct an operational check of the test
item in accordance with the approved test plan, and document the
results.

Step 7. Repeat Step 3 to 6 to produce the required number of cycles as


specified in the test plan.

Step 8. If appropriate, adjust the temperature, humidity, and pressure to


the final ground conditions.

Step 9. Visually examine the test item to the extent practical.

Step 10. With the test item not operating, stabilize the test item at standard
or controlled ambient conditions.

Step 11. Conduct an operational check of the test item in accordance with
the approved test plan, and document the results for comparison
with pretest data. Visually examine the test item to the extent
practical, to determine the extent of any physical damage.

4-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 317

CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

See Method 300 Chapter 9.

5-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 317

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

5-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 317

CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

See Method 300 Chapter 10.

a. STANAG 4044, Adoption of a Standard Atmosphere, 10 April 1969,


(ICAO Standard Atmosphere).

b. MIL-HDBK-310: Global Climatic Data for Developing Military Products,


23 June 1997.

6-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 317

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

6-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 317

Table 1. Statistical Values of Air Temperature at Various Altitudes in the Northern Hemisphere
LATITUDE 15N 30N 45N 60N 80N
Altitude Pressure
M 1% 10% 20% M 1% 10% 20% M 1% 10% 20% M 1% 10% 205 M 1% 10% 20%
km (kft) Mbar (hpa)

3 (10) 700 10.5 +6 +8 +9 4.8 -8 -4 -2 -5 -24 -19 -17 -13 -37 -31 -28 -17 -37 -32 -30

4.5 (15) 533 -3 -8 -6 -5 -12 -21 -17 -15 -25 -40 -34 -31 -34 -50 -43 -40 -39 -51 -46 -43

7.7 (25) 366 -20 -26 -23 -22 -28 -37 -33 -31 -40 -53 -47 -45 -45 -60 -53 -51 -49 -61 -56 -53

9.25 (30) 300 -36 -43 -40 -38 -44 -54 -50 -48 -54 -67 -61 -59 -56 -70 -64 -62 -60 -71 -66 -64

10.8 (35) 250 -43 -50 -47 -45 -48 -58 -54 -53 -55 -68 -62 -60 -56 -70 -64 -62 -61 -72 -67 -65

12.3 (40) 200 -53 -60 -56 -55 -54 -64 -60 -59 -56 -69 -63 -61 -56 -70 -64 -62 -63 -75 -69 -67

13 (42) 185 -56 -63 -60 -58 -56 -66 -62 -60 -56 -69 -63 -61 -56 -70 64 -62 -63 -75 -69 -67

15.5 (50) 125 -69 -77 -73 -72 -63 -74 -70 -70 -57 -71 -65 -62 -56 -70 -64 -61 -66 -78 -72 -70

18.5 (60) 70 -68 -76 -73 -71 -63 -73 -69 -68 -57 -71 -65 -62 -57 -71 -65 -62 -67 -87 -78 -76

21.5 (70) 44 -61 -69 -66 -64 -58 -72 -69 -66 -57 -71 -65 -62 -57 -83 -67 -64 -65 -86 -77 -75

26.2 (85) 20 -51 -58 -55 -52 -50 -60 -55 -54 -57 -73 -70 -62 -60 -85 -75 -69 -65 -89 -79 -74
For each altitude and latitude north, the mean value of temperature (M) is given together with those temperatures that are
equal or lower than 1%, 10%, or 20% of the period of the two coldest winter month

6-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 317

INTENTIONALLY BLANK.

6-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 318

METHOD 318
VIBRATION, TEMPERATURE, HUMIDITY, ALTITUDE

Reserved for future use in subsequent editions.

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 318

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 319

METHOD 319
ACIDIC ATMOSPHERE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE ........................................................................................... 1-1


1.1. PURPOSE ................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2. APPLICATION........................................................................................... 1-1
1.3. LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................ 1-1
CHAPTER 2 GUIDANCE/REQUIREMENTS ....................................................... 2-1
2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT ........................................................ 2-1
2.2. TEST PROCEDURE ................................................................................. 2-1
2.3. SEQUENCE .............................................................................................. 2-1
2.4. CHOICE OF TEST SEVERITIES .............................................................. 2-2
2.4.1. Temperature....................................................................................... 2-2
2.4.2. Test Duration ...................................................................................... 2-2
2.4.3. Test Item Configuration ...................................................................... 2-2
2.4.4. Chemical Composition and Concentration ......................................... 2-2
2.4.5. Operational Considerations ................................................................ 2-3
CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE
TEST INSTRUCTION ..................................................................... 3-1
CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES .................................... 4-1
4. TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES ............................................... 4-1
4.1. TEST FACILITY ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.2. CONTROLS .............................................................................................. 4-2
4.3. TEST INTERRUPTIONS ........................................................................... 4-2
4.4. PROCEDURE ........................................................................................... 4-2
4.4.1. Pretest Information. ............................................................................ 4-3
4.4.2. Preparation for Test............................................................................ 4-3
4.4.3. Acidic Atmosphere Test Procedure .................................................... 4-4
CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS ....................................... 5-1
CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................. 6-1

I Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 319

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

II Edition D Version 1
AECTP-300
METHOD 319

CHAPTER 1 SCOPE

NOTE: METHOD 300, GENERAL GUIDANCE AND REQUIREMENTS,


CONTAINS INFORMATION NECESSARY TO CONDUCT THE TEST
PROCEDURES OF THIS METHOD, AND SHALL BE USED IN COMBINATION
WITH THIS TEST METHOD.

1. SCOPE

1.1. PURPOSE

To determine the resistance of materials and protective coatings to acidic


atmospheres.

1.2. APPLICATION

Use this test method when the requirements documents state that the materiel is likely
to be stored or operated in areas where acidic atmospheres exist such as industrial
areas or near the exhausts of any fuel-burning device.

1.3. LIMITATIONS

This method is not a replacement for the salt fog method, nor is it suitable for
evaluating the effects of hydrogen sulphide.

1-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 319

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

1-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 319

CHAPTER 2 GUIDANCE/REQUIREMENTS

2. GUIDANCE/REQUIREMENTS

2.1. EFFECTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Acidic atmospheres are of increasing concern, especially for materiel in the vicinity of
industrial areas or near the exhausts of fuel burning devices. Examples of problems
that could occur as a result of acidic atmosphere exposure are as follows. The list is
not intended to be all-inclusive, and some of the examples may overlap the categories.
Reference 6a. provides further information

a. Chemical attack of surface finishes and non-metallic materials.

b. Corrosion of metals.

c. Pitting of cement and optics.

2.2. TEST PROCEDURE

See Method 300 Chapters 1 and 8.

When an acidic atmosphere test is deemed necessary, the procedure included in this
method is considered suitable for most applications. The tailoring options are limited.

2.3. SEQUENCE

See Method 300 Chapter 8.

1. Perform acidic atmosphere testing after any humidity or fungus testing, and
before any sand and dust testing or other tests that damage protective coatings.

a. Sand and dust testing deposits may inhibit acid effects as well as abrade
protective coatings;

b. Acid deposits may inhibit mould growth.

c. Residual deposits may accelerate chemical reactions during humidity


testing.

2. Because this test is similar in severity to the salt fog test, recommend separate
test items be used for each.

2-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 319

2.4. CHOICE OF TEST SEVERITIES

See Method 300 Chapters 4 and 8.

The essential parameters for defining the acidic atmosphere test include exposure
temperature, exposure time (duration), test item configuration, chemical composition of
the test atmosphere, and concentration of the test solution.

2.4.1. Temperature

The test method and exposure temperature used in this procedure are similar to those
used in the salt fog test.

2.4.2. Test Duration

Two severity levels are defined (reference 6b.). In view of the complexity of naturally
occurring corrosion processes, no strict equivalencies with real exposure can be
quoted. Use severity "A" below for simulating infrequent periods of exposure, or for
exposure in areas of low acidity. Use severity "B" below to represent approximately 10
years natural exposure in a moist, highly industrial area, or a shorter period in close
proximity to vehicle exhaust systems, particularly ship funnel exhausts where the
potential acidity is significantly higher.

a. Three 2-hour spraying periods with 22 hours storage after each.

b. Four 2-hour spraying periods with 7 days storage after each.

2.4.3. Test Item Configuration

See Method 300 Chapter 4.

2.4.4. Chemical Composition and Concentration

Use a test solution to be sprayed containing 0.88 g sulphuric acid/liter of solution


(0.009M H2S04), and 0.45 g nitric acid/liter of solution (0.007M HN03) in distilled or
deionized water. This will produce a solution with a pH of 1.67 that is representative of
the worst case conditions in the vicinity of smokestacks as measured in the UK.
Reference 6b. provides information regarding the more common chemical
environmental contaminants, together with some consequent likely forms of corrosion
which materiel could encounter.

WARNING: Strong acids are hazardous. The solution to be sprayed is harmful


to people and clothing. Operators carrying out the test must take suitable
precautions.

2-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 319

WARNING: Refer to the supplier’s Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or


equivalent for health hazard data.

a. Do not enter the chamber during spraying and, before entry after
spraying, purge the chamber with clean air to a level that will satisfy local
safety requirements. Continue purging at intervals if necessary to ensure
the concentration of noxious fumes remains at a suitably low level.

b. Wear a suitable respirator and/or eye protection. Use rubber gloves to


handle test items.

2.4.5. Operational Considerations

The test item will not normally be required to function during the test, but may be
required to do so on completion, or on completion of a representative sequence of
environmental tests.

2-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 319

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

2-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 319

CHAPTER 3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

3. INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN THE TEST INSTRUCTION

In addition to the information required in Method 300 Chapter 6, provide the following
information:

a. Whether the test is a demonstration of performance or survival.

b. Whether the requirement is to demonstrate safety, safety and


performance, or resistance to chemical attack after the test.

c. The test cycle, severities and durations to be used.

d. If functional performance is to be assessed, the phases of the test when


the test item is to operate and be assessed, and the levels of
performance required.

e. Whether the test item is to be tested in its normal packaging or


unpackaged.

f. The method of mounting the test item.

3-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 319

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

3-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 319

CHAPTER 4 TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

4. TEST CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES

See Method 300 Chapters 3, 4, and 5 for test conditions, test facility, and test control
information.

4.1. TEST FACILITY

See Method 300 Chapter 5. Additionally:

a. For construction of the chamber, supporting racks and spraying


equipment, use materials inert to the acid solution being sprayed, and
that will not cause electrolytic corrosion of material with which it comes in
contact.

b. Do not respray acidic test solution drippings from the walls and ceilings of
the chamber and from the test item. Vent the exposure chamber to
prevent pressure buildup.

c. Use a chamber capable of maintaining temperatures in the exposure


zone at 35 ± 2 °C. Continuously control this temperature during the test.
Do not use immersion heaters within the chamber exposure area for the
purpose of maintaining the temperature within the exposure zone.

d. Use an acid solution reservoir and dispenser made of material that is


non-reactive with the acid solution, e.g., glass, hard rubber, or plastic.
The reservoir provides a continuous supply to a tank normally (but not
necessarily) situated inside the test section in which the acid solution
level is held reasonably constant. The atomizers are connected to this
tank.

e. Use a chamber with a means for injecting the acid solution into the test
chamber, and with an input air humidifier to minimize clogging of the
nozzles. Use atomizers of such design and construction as to produce a
finely divided, wet, dense fog. Use atomizing nozzles and a piping
system made of material that is non-reactive to the acid solution. Use a
facility designed to provide the required atomization distribution and
fallout.

f. Use a test setup that includes a minimum of 2 fallout collection


receptacles. One is to be at the perimeter of the test item nearest to the
nozzle, and the other also at the perimeter of the test item but at the

4-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 319

farthest point from the nozzle. If multiple nozzles are used, the same
principles apply. Place the receptacles so that they are not shielded by
the test item and will not collect drops of solution from the test item or
other sources.

g. Maintain constant air pressure for the continuous, uniform atomization of


the acid solution using a compressed air supply, and produce a fallout
such that each receptacle collects from 1 to 3 ml of solution per hour for
each 80 cm2 of horizontal collecting area (10 cm diameter).

4.2. CONTROLS

In addition to that specified in Method 300 Chapters 3 and 4, the following controls
apply to this test:

a. Compressed air: Preheat the oil and dirt-free compressed air used to
produce the atomized solution (to offset the cooling effects of expansion
to atmospheric pressure) and pre-humidify it such that the temperature is
35 ± 2 °C and the relative humidity is in excess of 85% at the nozzle (see
Table 1).

Table 1: Temperature and Pressure Requirements for Operation at 35 °C

Air Pressure (kPa) 83 96 110 124


Preheat temperature (°C)
46 47 48 49
(before atomizing)

b. Heat the acid solution to within ± 6 °C of the test section temperature


before injection into the test section.

c. Test section air circulation: Use an air velocity in the test chambers that
is minimal (essentially zero).

4.3. TEST INTERRUPTIONS

See Method 300 Chapter 7.

4.4. PROCEDURE

The following test procedure provides the basis for assessing the suitability of the test
item in an acidic atmosphere environment, and has limited tailorability.

4-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 319

4.4.1. Pretest Information

See Guidance on Test Programme Development, Method 300 Chapter 6.

4.4.2. Preparation for Test

a. Prepare a test solution as specified in paragraph 2.4.4.

WARNING: MAKE THE SOLUTION BY ADDING ACID TO WATER, NOT VICE


VERSA. FAILURE TO DO SO COULD CAUSE A VIOLENT REACTION.

WARNING: Strong acids are hazardous. The solution to be sprayed is harmful


to people and clothing. Operators carrying out the test must take suitable
precautions.

WARNING: Refer to the supplier’s Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or


equivalent for health hazard data.

(1) Do not enter the chamber during spraying and, before entry after
spraying, purge the chamber with clean air to a level that will
satisfy local safety requirements. Continue purging at intervals if
necessary to ensure the concentration of noxious fumes remains
at a suitably low level.

(2) Wear a suitable respirator and/or eye protection. Use rubber


gloves to handle materiel.

b. Chamber operation verification: Immediately before the test and with the
exposure chamber empty, adjust all test parameters to those levels
required for the test. Maintain these conditions for at least one 24-hour
period (or until proper operation and fallout collection can be verified).
With the exception of fallout rate, continuously monitor all test
parameters to verify that the test chamber is operating properly.

c. Perform the pretest standard ambient check as specified in Method 300,


Chapter 2. Handle the test item as little as possible, particularly on the
significant surfaces, and prepare it for test immediately before exposure.
Unless otherwise specified, use test items free of surface contamination
such as oil, grease, or dirt, which could cause de-wetting. Do not include
the use of corrosive solvents, solvents that deposit either corrosive or

4-3 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 319

protective films, or abrasives other than pure magnesium oxide in the


cleaning methods.

4.4.3. Acidic Atmosphere Test Procedure

Step 1. With the test item installed in the test chamber in its storage
configuration (or as otherwise specified in the requirements
documents), adjust the test chamber temperature to 35 °C and
temperature condition the test item for at least 2 hours before
introducing the acid solution.

Step 2. Expose the test item to one of the two following severities as
specified in the test plan. (See paragraph 2.4.2.)

a. Four 2-hour spraying periods with 7 days storage after


each.

b. Three 2-hour spraying periods with 22 hours storage after


each.

Step 3. At the completion of Step 2, stabilize the test item at standard


ambient conditions.

Step 4. Visually examine the test item to the extent practical.

Step 5. If required, place the test item in an operational configuration and


conduct an operational check of the test item.

Step 6. If required, test items may be cleaned by rinsing in


distilled/deionized water and dried by the application of heat (up to
55 °C), where this is acceptable, or by other means.

Step 7. At the end of this test, and in conformity with the requirements
documents, examine the test item for corrosion and deterioration
of parts, finishes, materials and components.

4-4 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 319

CHAPTER 5 EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

5. EVALUATION OF THE TEST RESULTS

In addition to the failure criteria in Method 300 Chapter 9, any corrosion must be
analyzed for its immediate or potential effect on the proper functioning of the test item.
Satisfactory operation following this test is not the sole criterion for pass/fail.

5-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 319

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

5-2 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300
METHOD 319

CHAPTER 6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

6. REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

See Method 300 Chapter 10.

a. IEC 68-2-52, 1966, Test Kb, Salt Mist, Cyclic, NaCl solution.

b. Acid Deposition in the United Kingdom, Warren Spring Laboratory


SBN 085624 323X.

6-1 Edition D Version 1


AECTP-300(D)(1)

You might also like